VT4, SA For STG & Other Building Structural Steel Erection PC AE6 Owner's Requirement (R0, 20141209)

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board
PECC3
Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

Request for Proposal
PART 4 SECTION 10 CIVIL AND ARCHITECTUAL WORKS

CONTENT
Page
10.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... 9
10.1.1 General ................................................................................................. 9
10.1.2 Scope ...................................................................................................... 9
10.1.2.1 Main Buildings/Structures .................................................... 10
10.1.2.2 Ancillary Buildings ............................................................... 11
10.1.2.3 Fuel feed system and Coal Handling .................................... 11
10.1.2.4 Coal Storage Yard ................................................................. 12
10.1.2.5 Cooling Water system ........................................................... 13
10.1.2.6 Security Systems ................................................................... 14
10.1.2.7 Waste Water Treatment System ........................................... 14
10.1.2.8 Water Treatment System ...................................................... 15
10.1.2.9
Road& Bridge and Drainage System ................................... 15
10.1.2.10 Main Equipment Foundation .............................................. 15
10.1.2.11 Auxiliary Equipment Foundation ....................................... 16
10.1.2.12 Desulphurization System .................................................... 16
10.1.2.13 Miscellaneous Facilities...................................................... 16
10.1.2.14 100'000 DWT Coal Jetty .................................................... 16
10.1.3 Standards and Abbreviations ................................................................ 17
10.1.3.1 Compulsory Vietnamese National Technical Codes ............ 17
10.1.3.2 Applicable Standards ............................................................ 18
10.2 SITE INVESTIGATION & TEMPORARY FACILITIES ................................ 20
10.2.1 Site Survey and Investigation ................................................................ 20
10.2.1.1 Topographic/Bathymetric Survey ........................................... 20
10.2.1.2 Geological Investigation ......................................................... 20
10.2.2 Temporary Facilities .............................................................................. 21
10.2.2.2 Temporary Construction Water ............................................ 21
10.2.2.2 Temporary Construction Electricity ..................................... 21
10.2.2.3 Contractors Site Offices, Canteen and Welfare Facilities ... 22
10.2.2.4 Temporary Office for the Owner/Engineer .......................... 22
10.2.2.4 Storage of materials .............................................................. 24
10.2.2.1 Approval of Temporary Works ............................................ 24
10.3
DESIGN CRITERIA & GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................. 26
10.3.1 General .................................................................................................. 26
10.3.2 Dimension and Units ............................................................................. 26
10.3.3 Design Codes/Standards and Design Elevations ................................... 26
10.3.3.1 Design Codes/Standards ....................................................... 26
10.3.3.2 Design Elevations ................................................................. 26
10.3.4 Loads and Forces for on-shore structures/buildings .............................. 27
10.3.4.1 Dead Loads ........................................................................... 27
10.3.4.2 Live Loads ............................................................................ 27
10.3.4.3 Wind Loads ........................................................................... 29
10.3.4.4 Seismic Loads ........................................................................ 29
10.3.4.5 Earth Pressures....................................................................... 29
Part 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works

Revision 1
Page 1 of 247

PECC3

10.3.4.6 Horizontal Forces on Crane Runway Beam .......................... 29

10.3.4.7 Vibration Forces and Dynamic Effects .................................. 30
10.3.4.8 Impact Loads ......................................................................... 30
10.3.4.9 Water Pressure ....................................................................... 30
10.3.4.10 Other Loads and Forces ....................................................... 30
10.3.4.11 Load Combinations .............................................................. 31
10.3.4.12 Factors of safety ................................................................... 31
10.3.5 Loads and Forces for off-shore structures ............................................. 31
10.3.5.1 Self weight and surcharge ...................................................... 31
10.3.5.2 Wave Force ............................................................................ 31
10.3.5.3 Forces Produced by Ships ...................................................... 32
10.3.6 Land Reclamation .................................................................................. 32
10.3.7 Power House........................................................................................... 32
10.3.7.1 General Description ................................................................. 32
10.3.7.2 Design of Building ................................................................... 35
10.3.7.3 Architectural Features .............................................................. 35
10.3.7.4 Building Facilities .................................................................... 37
10.3.8 Coal Jetty ................................................................................................ 40
10.3.8.1 Coal Berth and related facilities............................................. 40
10.3.8.2 Access bridge ......................................................................... 42
10.3.8.3 Approach Navigation channel and Turning Basin ................. 43
10.3.9 Foundations for Coal Handling System & Pipe/Cable Rack ................. 43
10.3.9.1 Foundations of Coal Conveyor, Transfer Tower ................... 43
10.3.9.2 Pipe/Cable Rack Foundations and Trenches ......................... 44
10.3.9.3 Buildings of Coal Conveyor, Transfer Tower ....................... 44
10.3.10 Coal Storage Yard and Foundations .................................................... 44
10.3.10.1 Coal Storage Yard Foundations ........................................... 44
10.3.10.2 Dry Coal Shed...................................................................... 44
10.3.10.3 Coal Storage Yard Drainage ................................................ 45
10.3.10.4 Gravel Basement .................................................................. 45
10.3.10.5. Enclosing Wall ...................................................................... 45
10.3.10.6. Wind wall .............................................................................. 45
10.3.11 Cooling Water Facilities ...................................................................... 45
10.3.11.1 General .................................................................................. 45
10.3.11.2 Intake ................................................................................... 45
10.3.11.3 Intake Channel ..................................................................... 46
10.3.11.4 Pump Station ........................................................................ 47
10.3.11.5 Circulating Water Pipeline .................................................. 48
10.3.11.6 Discharge Pit (Siphon pit) .................................................... 49
10.3.11.7 Discharge Culvert ................................................................. 49
10.3.11.8 Discharge Channel ................................................................ 49
10.3.11.9 Discharge outlet .................................................................... 50
10.3.12 Tank Foundations ................................................................................ 50
10.3.12.1 Oil Storage Tank Foundations .............................................. 50
10.3.12.2 Oil Retaining Wall ................................................................ 50
10.3.12.3 Water Storage Tank Foundations ......................................... 51
10.3.13 Foundations for Water and Waste Water Treatment Systems ............... 52
10.3.13.1 Concrete Tanks .................................................................... 52
10.3.13.2 Equipment Foundations ...................................................... 52
Revision 1
Page 2 of 247

PECC3

10.3.14 Site Catchment Drainage System ........................................................ 53

10.3.15 Stack ....................................................................................................... 54
10.3.16 Roads, Internal Drainage System and Fences ..................................... 56
10.3.16.1 Internal Road ....................................................................... 56
10.3.16.4 Internal Drainage System .................................................... 57
10.3.16.5 Fences .................................................................................. 57
10.3.16.6 Gates .................................................................................... 57
10.3.17 Ancillary and Auxiliary Buildings ......................................................... 57
10.3.17.1 General Description ............................................................... 57
10.3.17.2 Architectural Features ............................................................ 59
10.3.17.3 Building Facilities .................................................................. 60
10.3.17.4 Cranes and Hoists .................................................................. 63
10.3.17.5 Communication System ......................................................... 63
10.3.17.6 Fire Protection Systems ......................................................... 63
10.3.17.7 Lightning Protection System.................................................. 63
10.3.17.8 Floor and Wall Finish ............................................................ 63
10.3.18 Auxiliary Equipment Foundation ........................................................... 65
10.3.19 Miscellaneous Facilities ......................................................................... 65
10.3.20 Others ..................................................................................................... 66
10.3.21 Furniture/Office Equipment ................................................................... 67
10.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................ 68
10.4.1 General ................................................................................................. 68
10.4.2 Quality .................................................................................................. 68
10.4.3 Inspection and Testing .......................................................................... 68
10.4.4 Approval and Certification of Materials ............................................... 68
10.4.5 Submission of Samples......................................................................... 69
10.4.6 Substitution of Materials ...................................................................... 69
10.4.7 Independent Test and Analysis ............................................................. 69
10.4.8 Workmanship ......................................................................................... 70
10.5
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................. 71
10.5.1
Earthworks ........................................................................................... 71
10.5.1.1 General ..................................................................................... 71
10.5.1.2 Site Clearance .......................................................................... 71
10.5.1.3 Removal of Organic Material .................................................. 71
10.5.1.4 Excavation................................................................................ 71
10.5.1.5 Fill and Backfill ....................................................................... 73
10.5.1.6 Cobble Stone ............................................................................ 75
10.5.1.7 Embankment ............................................................................ 75
10.5.2 Dredging ................................................................................................. 93
10.5.2.1 General ..................................................................................... 94
10.5.2.2 Method and Sequence .............................................................. 94
10.5.2.3 Depth ........................................................................................ 94
10.5.2.4 Slope Stability .......................................................................... 94
10.5.2.5 Spoil from Dredging ................................................................ 94
10.5.2.6 Setting-out and Sounding ......................................................... 94
10.5.2.7 Others ....................................................................................... 95
10.5.3 Masonry Works ...................................................................................... 95
10.5.3.1 General ..................................................................................... 95
Revision 1
Page 3 of 247

PECC3
10.5.4
10.5.5
10.5.6
10.5.7
10.5.8

10.5.3.2 Materials Requirement ............................................................. 95

10.5.3.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................... 97
10.5.3.4 Inspection ................................................................................. 98
Slope Protection Works .......................................................................... 98
10.5.4.1 General ..................................................................................... 98
10.5.4.2 Trimming of Slope ................................................................... 99
10.5.4.3 Seeding and Topsoil application .............................................. 99
10.5.4.4 Shotcrete ................................................................................. 100
10.5.4.5 Welded Wire and Chain-Link Fabric ....................................... 104
Concrete Work ....................................................................................... 105
10.5.5.1 General ..................................................................................... 105
10.5.5.2 Applicable Codes and Standards ............................................. 105
10.5.5.3 Cement ..................................................................................... 105
10.5.5.4 Aggregates ............................................................................... 106
10.5.5.5 Water for Mixing ..................................................................... 110
10.5.5.6 Admixtures ............................................................................... 110
10.5.5.7 Mix Design............................................................................... 110
10.5.5.8 Classes of Concrete .................................................................. 111
10.5.5.9 Batching and Mixing................................................................ 111
10.5.5.10 Formwork ............................................................................... 113
10.5.5.11 Steel Reinforcement ............................................................... 115
10.5.5.12 Cast-in-Place Concrete ........................................................... 116
10.5.5.13 Waterproofing and Damp-proofing ...................................... 121
10.5.5.14 Field Tests .............................................................................. 121
Foundation Piling ................................................................................... 122
10.5.6.1 General ..................................................................................... 122
10.5.6.2 Design ...................................................................................... 123
10.5.6.3 Initial Loading Tests ................................................................ 124
10.5.6.4 Piling Records ......................................................................... 124
10.5.6.5 Driven Piles .............................................................................. 125
10.5.6.6 Bored Cast-in-Place Piles ........................................................ 125
10.5.6.7 Piles Near Existing Installations .............................................. 126
10.5.6.8 Tolerances ................................................................................ 126
10.5.6.9 Inner Drilling ........................................................................... 126
Sheet Piling............................................................................................. 127
10.5.7.1 General ..................................................................................... 127
10.5.7.2 Design ...................................................................................... 127
10.5.7.3 Driven Sheet Piles and Anchor Piles ....................................... 128
10.5.7.4 Anchor Works .......................................................................... 128
Structural Steelworks ............................................................................. 129
10.5.10.1 General ................................................................................... 129
10.5.10.2 Design .................................................................................... 129
10.5.10.3 Materials ................................................................................ 130
10.5.10.4 Test and Inspections ............................................................... 131
10.5.10.5 Fabrication ............................................................................. 132
10.5.10.6 Assembly................................................................................ 133
10.5.10.7 Erection .................................................................................. 135
10.5.10.8 Tolerances .............................................................................. 136
10.5.10.9 Painting .................................................................................. 137

Revision 1
Page 4 of 247

PECC3

10.5.9 Miscellaneous Steelworks ...................................................................... 140

10.5.9.1 General ..................................................................................... 140
10.5.9.2 Shop Drawings ......................................................................... 140
10.5.9.3 Materials .................................................................................. 140
10.5.9.4 Workmanship ........................................................................... 141
10.5.9.5 Embedded Metalwork .............................................................. 141
10.5.9.6 Welding .................................................................................... 141
10.5.9.7 Painting and Galvanizing ......................................................... 142
10.5.9.8 Steel Gratings and Supports ..................................................... 142
10.5.9.9 Steel Stairs ............................................................................... 142
10.5.9.10 Access Ladders and Handrails ............................................... 143
10.5.9.11 Stop Log ................................................................................. 143
10.5.10 Condenser Cooling Water Pipelines....................................................... 145
10.5.10.1 General ................................................................................... 145
10.5.10.2 Material .................................................................................. 145
10.5.10.3 Tolerances in Measurements.................................................. 146
10.5.10.4 Fabrication ............................................................................. 146
10.5.10.5 Installation .............................................................................. 148
10.5.10.6 Test and Inspection ................................................................ 149
10.5.11 Corrosion Protection Work .................................................................... 151
10.5.11.1 General ................................................................................... 151
10.5.11.2 Cathodic Protection ................................................................ 151
10.5.11.3 Cement Mortar Lining ........................................................... 151
10.5.11.4 Polyethylene Sheathing .......................................................... 153
10.5.12 Coal Storage Yard .............................................................................. 156
10.5.12.1 General ................................................................................... 156
10.5.12.2 Rail foundation....................................................................... 156
10.5.12.3 Perforated Pipe ....................................................................... 158
10.5.12.4 Concrete Cover ..................................................................... 159
10.5.13 Tank Foundation Work .......................................................................... 159
10.5.13.1 General .................................................................................. 159
10.5.13.2 Asphalt Sand .......................................................................... 159
10.5.13.3 Oil Retaining Wall ................................................................. 161
10.5.14 Sewerage and Drainage System ............................................................. 161
10.5.14.1 General ................................................................................... 161
10.5.14.2 Materials ................................................................................ 161
10.5.14.3 Trench Excavation and Backfill .......................................... 162
10.5.14.4 Appurtenant Structures ......................................................... 162
10.5.14.5 Bedding Materials ................................................................. 162
10.5.14.6 Pipe Installation ..................................................................... 163
10.5.15 Roads ...................................................................................................... 164
10.5.15.1 General ................................................................................... 164
8.5.15.2 Materials .................................................................................. 164
10.5.15.3 Executions........................................................................... 166
10.5.15.4 Traffic Lane Stripes ............................................................... 172
10.5.15.5 Traffic Signs ........................................................................... 172
10.5.15.6 Gravel Pavement .................................................................... 172
10.5.16 Waste Water Treatment Facilities and Water Treatment Facilities ....... 173
10.5.16.1 General ................................................................................... 173
Revision 1
Page 5 of 247

PECC3

10.5.16.2 Waterproofing Mortar ............................................................ 173

10.5.16.3 Chemical-resistant Lining ...................................................... 174
10.5.17 Coal Jetty and Appurtenant Facilities ................................................. 175
10.5.17.1 General ................................................................................. 175
10.5.17.2 Bollard (Mooring Post) .......................................................... 175
10.5.17.3 Fender .................................................................................... 176
10.5.18 Chimney Stack ....................................................................................... 177
10.5.110.1 General ................................................................................. 177
10.5.110.2 Outer Shell ........................................................................... 177
10.5.110.3 Inner Flue, Platforms and Stair/Ladders .............................. 178
10.5.110.4 Insulation .............................................................................. 181
10.5.110.5 Steel Flue Lining .................................................................. 181
10.5.110.6 Acid Resisting Brickwork .................................................... 181
10.5.110.7 Painting of Outer Shell ......................................................... 182
10.5.110.8 Lightning Protection .......................................................... 182
10.5.110.9 Lighting of Chimney Stack ................................................. 182
10.5.110.10 Stack Elevator ................................................................. 184
10.5.110.11 Rainwater Drain Pipe ......................................................... 187
10.5.110.12 Soot Hopper Drain Pipe ..................................................... 187
10.5.110.13 Water Supply and Drainage system ................................... 187
10.5.19 Soil Poisoning and Termite Control ....................................................... 188
10.5.19.1 Materials ................................................................................ 188
10.5.19.2 Application ............................................................................. 188
10.5.19.3 Equipment .............................................................................. 188
10.5. 20 Concrete Masonry Work ....................................................................... 189
10.5.20.1 General ................................................................................... 189
10.5.20.2 Handling and Storage ............................................................. 189
10.5.20.3 Materials ................................................................................ 189
10.5.20.4 Installation .............................................................................. 190
10.5.20.5 Concrete Lintel ....................................................................... 190
10.5.21 Moisture Vapor Barrier .......................................................................... 190
10.5.21.1 General ................................................................................... 190
10.5.21.2 Materials ................................................................................ 191
10.5.21.3 Physical Properties ................................................................. 191
10.5.21.4 Application ............................................................................. 191
10.5.21.5 Sealing.................................................................................... 191
10.5.21.6 Moisture Vapor Barrier under Concrete Slabs-on-Ground .... 192
10.5.22 Floor and Wall Finishes ......................................................................... 192
10.5.22.1 General ................................................................................... 192
10.5.22.2 Delivery and Storage .............................................................. 193
10.5.22.3 Workmanship ......................................................................... 193
10.5.22.4 Vinyl Floor Tiles .................................................................... 193
10.5.22.5 Resilient Floor Covering ........................................................ 194
10.5.22.6 Acid-Resistant Floor .............................................................. 195
10.5.22.7 Plain Cement Floor Finish ..................................................... 196
10.5.22.8 Cement Floor with Hardener and Non-skid Finish ................ 196
10.5.22.9 Pebble Washout Floor Finish ................................................. 197
10.5.22.10 Unglazed Floor Tiles ............................................................ 198
10.5.22.11 Cement Plaster Finish .......................................................... 198
Revision 1
Page 6 of 247

PECC3

10.5.22.12 Chiseled Concrete Finish ..................................................... 200

10.5.22.13 Glazed Ceramic Tiles ........................................................... 201
10.5.22.14 Fair Face Concrete Finish .................................................... 203
10.5.23 Masonry Water Repellent ....................................................................... 204
10.5.23.1 General ................................................................................... 204
10.5.23.2 Materials ................................................................................ 204
10.5.23.3 Preparation ............................................................................. 204
10.5.23.4 Application ............................................................................. 204
10.5.23.5 Coverage ................................................................................ 205
10.5.24 Insulation Works .................................................................................... 205
10.5.24.1 General ................................................................................... 205
10.5.24.2 Materials ................................................................................ 205
10.5.24.3 Performance Characteristics .................................................. 205
10.5.24.4 Application ............................................................................. 205
10.5.25 Elevators ................................................................................................. 205
10.5.26 Fire Retardant Chemical ......................................................................... 208
10.5.26.1 General ................................................................................... 208
10.5.26.2 Materials ................................................................................ 208
10.5.26.3 Application ............................................................................. 208
10.5.26.4 Method of Application ........................................................... 208
10.5.27 Aluminum and Glass Doors ................................................................... 209
10.5.27.1 General ................................................................................... 209
10.5.27.2 Sealing and Glazing Compound ............................................ 209
10.5.27.3 Materials ................................................................................ 210
10.5.27.4 Construction, Finishes, Hardware and Accessories ............... 210
10.5.27.5 Installation .............................................................................. 211
10.5.28 Steel Doors, Windows and Louvers ....................................................... 212
10.5.210.1 General ................................................................................. 212
10.5.210.2 Materials and Workmanship ................................................ 212
10.5.210.3 Erection ................................................................................ 213
10.5.29 Steel Sheets Cladding and Accessories .................................................. 213
10.5.29.1 General ................................................................................... 213
10.5.29.2 Steel Sheets Cladding ............................................................ 214
10.5.29.3 Sheeting and Fixing Accessories ........................................... 214
10.5.30 Downpipes and Roof Drains .................................................................. 215
10.5.30.1 Downpipes ............................................................................. 215
10.5.30.2 Roof Drain ............................................................................. 215
10.5.31 Finishing Hardware ................................................................................ 215
10.5.31.1 General ................................................................................... 215
10.5.31.2 Keying .................................................................................... 216
10.5.31.3 Hardware Schedule ................................................................ 216
10.5.31.4 Installation of Hardware......................................................... 217
10.5.32 Glass and Glazing ................................................................................... 217
10.5.32.1 General ................................................................................... 217
10.5.32.2 Materials ................................................................................ 217
10.5.32.3 Installation .............................................................................. 218
10.5.32.4 Protection ............................................................................... 218
10.5.32.5 Heat Absorbing Glass ............................................................ 219
10.5.33 Glazing Sealant....................................................................................... 219
Revision 1
Page 7 of 247

PECC3

10.5.33.1 Materials ................................................................................ 219

10.5.33.2 Method of Application ........................................................... 219
10.5.33.3 Guarantee ............................................................................... 220
10.5.34 Weatherstripping .................................................................................... 220
10.5.34.1 General ................................................................................... 220
10.5.34.2 Sample.................................................................................... 220
10.5.34.3 Materials ................................................................................ 220
10.5.34.4 Fasteners ................................................................................ 220
10.5.34.5 Installation .............................................................................. 221
10.5.35 Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing .................................................. 221
10.5.35.1 Material and Roofer ............................................................... 221
10.5.35.2 Guarantee for Waterproofing ................................................. 221
10.5.35.3 Laying of Waterproof Roofing .............................................. 221
10.5.36 Painting and Varnishing ......................................................................... 222
10.5.36.1 General ................................................................................... 222
10.5.36.2 Preparation of Surfaces .......................................................... 222
10.5.36.3 Materials ................................................................................ 223
10.5.36.4 Application ............................................................................. 225
10.5.36.5 Cleaning Up ........................................................................... 225
10.5.37 Landscaping............................................................................................ 226
10.5.37.1 General ................................................................................... 226
10.5.37.2 Materials ................................................................................ 226
10.5.37.3 Work Procedure ..................................................................... 227
10.5.37.4 Planting Procedure ................................................................. 228
10.5.37.5 Maintenance ........................................................................... 230
10.5.38 Miscellaneous Items ............................................................................... 230
10.5.310.1 General ................................................................................. 230
10.5.310.2 Materials and Installation ..................................................... 231
10.5.39 Plumbing System .................................................................................... 231
10.5.39.1 General ................................................................................... 231
10.5.39.2 Specifications and Standards ................................................. 231
10.5.39.3 General Requirements ............................................................ 232
10.5.39.4 Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Pipe and Fittings ...................... 232
10.5.39.5 Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Trim...................................... 233
10.5.39.6 Types of Fixtures ................................................................... 233
10.5.39.7 Plumbing Accessories ............................................................ 233
10.5.40 Air Conditioning/Ventilation System ..................................................... 234
10.5.40.1 General and Extent of Supply ................................................ 234
10.5.40.2 Design Conditions .................................................................. 235
10.5.40.3 Standards and Regulations ..................................................... 236
10.5.40.4 Air Conditioning/Ventilation for Power House ..................... 236
10.5.40.5 Air Conditioning/Ventilation for Ancillary Buildings ........... 246
10.5.40.6 Test and Test Records ............................................................ 246
10.5.41 Settlement & Tilt Monitoring ................................................................. 246
10.5.42 Architectural Items Not Included in the Specifications ......................... 247

Revision 1
Page 8 of 247

PECC3

SECTION 10- CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
10.1
GENERAL
10.1.1
General
This section covers the detailed technical requirements for the engineering, supply,
construction and maintenance of the Civil and Architectural Works for two (2) x 300 MW
Coal-fired Thermal Power Plant and related facilities, and the provision of all labor,
materials, constructional plant, temporary works and everything whether of a temporary or
permanent nature required in and for such construction and maintenance, so far as the
necessity for providing the same is specified in or reasonably to be inferred from the
Contract.
The commercial and general technical requirements shall be covered by the Specification
of Part 3 and Part 4- Section 1.
The arrangement of structures, buildings, and facilities shall be generally as indicated on
the appropriate Bid Drawings in Part 5 Attachment 2.
10.1.2 Scope
The scope of work shall include but not limited to the following for the power plants as
specified in Sections 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 9 and related facilities provided under this Contract.
- Site investigation and clearance, excavation, filling, embankment, piling,
foundations, landscaping.
- Temporary construction facilities including temporary equipment unloading berth,
concrete mixing plant, water supply facilities and electricity supply facilities from
the terminal points, if necessary.
- All embedded parts required for anchorages, supports, trench and duct or pit curb
angles, manholes, etc.
- Buildings and structures to contain or house the specified plant.
- Cable trenches or pits including Switch Yard
- Road, drainage, fences and bridges across the cooling water intake/discharge
channel.
- Cladding, flashing, gutters, downpipes, doors, windows, glazing, ventilation
louvers, and other fittings.
- Brickwork, rendering, plastering, tiling and suspended ceilings.
- Painting, varnishing and surface treatment.
Revision 1
Page 9 of 247

PECC3

- Plumbing including septic tanks and provision of fixtures.

- Ventilation and air conditioning system for enclosed building and structures.
- Lightning protection system.
- Miscellaneous Power and Lighting.
- Stack elevator
10.1.2.1
Main Buildings/Structures
Building
Power House
01-1. Turbine House
Foundation
Pile (Bored/Steel Pipe/Prestressed concrete / Reinforced
concrete) Reinforced Concrete
01-2. Boiler House
- ditto -
01-3. Central Control

Building
- ditto -
01-4.
Superstructure
Frame: Structural Steel
Floor: Reinforced Concrete and
Steel Grating
Wall: Steel
Sheet
with
Insulation
Roof: Steel
Sheet
with
Insulation, Reinforced
Concrete
and
Bituminous Membrane
Water-proofing
Floor: Reinforced Concrete and
Steel Grating
Roof: Steel Sheet
Floor: Reinforced Concrete
Wall: Steel
Sheet
with
Insulation and Brick
Roof: Reinforced Concrete and
Bituminous Membrane
Water-proofing
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
Stack
Foundation: Pile (Bored/Steel Pipe/Prestressed concrete/Reinforced concrete) and

Reinforced Concrete
Outer shell: Reinforced Concrete
Inner Flue: Steel Plate with Lining and
Insulation

Revision 1
Page 10 of 247

PECC3
10.1.2.2

Ancillary Buildings
Building
2-1.
ESP
building
Foundation
Control
Pile (if necessary)

Reinforced Concrete
2-2.
Bulldozer Garage
Reinforced Concrete
2-3.
Fire fighting pump

station
Pile (if necessary)

Reinforced Concrete
2-4.
Air
house
compressor
Reinforced Concrete
2-5.
Ash silo aerating fan

house
Reinforced Concrete
10.1.2.3
Superstructure
Frame : Reinforced concrete
Floor : Reinforced concrete
Wall : Brick
Roof : Reinforced concrete and
Bituminous Membrane
Water-proofing
Frame : Structural Steel
Wall : Steel Sheet
Roof : Steel Sheet
Wall
: Steel Sheet with
insulation, Brick
Roof : Steel Sheet with
insulation
Wall : Steel Sheet
Roof : Steel Sheet
Wall : Steel Sheet
Roof : Steel Sheet
Fuel feed system and Coal Handling

Structure/Facility
Outline Description
3-1
Coal Conveyer Foundation
Reinforced Concrete,
Pile/Replacement (if necessary)
3-2
Coal
Transfer
Foundations
3-3
Pipe / Cable Rack Foundations Reinforced Concrete

and Trench
Pile/Replacement (if necessary)
3-4
A
B
C
Oil Handling Facilities

Oil Pipe Foundation
Oil Tank Foundation
Retaining Wall
Building
Towers - ditto -
Reinforced Concrete
Pile Supported Reinforced Concrete Slab
Reinforced Concrete
Foundation

Revision 1
Superstructure
Page 11 of 247

PECC3
Building

Foundation
3-5.
Coal
Handling
Control house
Pile (if necessary)

Reinforced Concrete
3-6.
Coal
handling
sluicing pump house
Pile (if necessary)

Reinforced Concrete
3-8.
Coal sampling house
Pile (if necessary)

Reinforced Concrete
3-9.
Coal crusher house
Pile (if necessary)

Reinforced Concrete
3-7.
Oil Pump House
Pile (if necessary)

Reinforced Concrete
10.1.2.4
Superstructure
Wall : Reinforced concrete,
Brick
Roof : Reinforced concrete
and Bituminous Membrane
Water-proofing
Wall : Brick
and Bituminous Membrane
Water-proofing
Wall : Steel Sheet
Roof : Steel Sheet
Wall : Steel Sheet
Roof : Steel Sheet
Wall : Brick
and
Bituminous
Membrane
Waterproofing
Coal Storage Yard
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
4-1.
Coal Storage Yard Foundations
Reinforced Concrete or Ballast and/or

Gravel Pavement
Pile/Replacement/Sub-soil Improvement (if
necessary)
4-2.
4-3.
Drainage basin for coal yard

Windbreak Wall
Reinforced Concrete
Foundation: Reinforced Concrete
Wind wall: steel structure
Building
Foundation

Revision 1
Superstructure
Page 12 of 247

PECC3
4-4.
Coal
Yard
Storage Shed
10.1.2.5

Dry Pile (Bored/Steel Pipe/

Pre-stressed concrete /
Reinforced concrete)
Reinforced Concrete

Wall
: Steel Sheet with
insulation
insulation
Cooling Water system
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
5-1
Intake
Dredging for Waterway,

Steel Sheet Pile / Steel Pipe Sheet Pile with
Reinforced Concrete Pile Head, Reinforced
Concrete Curtain wall with Pile Support,
Corrosion Protection, Armor Stone
5-2
Intake Channel
Open Channel,
Foundation: Pile (if necessary)
5-3
C.W. Pump Station
Foundation: Pile
5-4
Circulating Water Pipeline
Steel-lined Reinforced Concrete, Corrosion

Protection,
5-5
Discharge Pit
Foundation: Pile
5-6
Discharge box Culvert
Foundation: Pile
5-7
Discharge Channel
Open Channel,
5-8
Discharge outlet
Underwater Discharge Structure

5-9.
Building
Foundation
CW
Chlorination Pile (if necessary)
room
Reinforced Concrete

Revision 1
Superstructure
Wall
: Steel Sheet with
insulation
insulation
Page 13 of 247

PECC3
Building
5-10
C/W Pump House
10.1.2.6

Foundation
Pile (Bored/Steel Pipe/
Pre-stressed concrete /
Reinforced concrete)
Reinforced Concrete
Superstructure
Frame : Structural Steel,
Reinforced concrete
Wall
: Steel Sheet with
insulation, Brick
insulation,
Reinforced concrete
and
Bituminous
Membrane Waterproofing
Security Systems
Building
Foundation
6-1. Main Gate &

fence
Reinforced Concrete
Superstructure
-Frame : Reinforced concrete
Wall : Brick
Roof : Reinforced concrete and
Bituminous Membrane
Water-proofing
6-2 Guard House
-ditto-
-ditto-
6-3 Watch tower
-ditto-
-ditto-
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
6-4
Boundary Fence

Superstructure: Concrete Surfaced Brick
(Type A), Wire Mesh (Type B)
6-5
Gates
Steel Gate with Gate Logo
10.1.2.7
Waste Water Treatment System
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
7-1.
Waste Water Treatment System Foundation: Pile (if necessary)

Foundation
Superstructure: Reinforced Concrete
7-2
Sea water desalination system

Revision 1

Page 14 of 247

PECC3
10.1.2.8

Water Treatment System
Structure/Facility
8-1.
Water
Treatment
Foundations
Building
8-2
Outline Description
Water
Treatment
Control building
10.1.2.9
System Foundation: Pile (if necessary)

Foundation
Pile (if necessary)
Reinforced Concrete
Superstructure
Wall : Reinforced concrete,
Brick
and
Bituminous
Membrane
Waterproofing
Road& Bridge and Drainage System
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
9-1
Road
Asphalt Pavement
9-2
Drainage System
Reinforced Concrete Gutter or/and Concrete

Pipe
9-3
Bridges
Foundation: Pile
Reinforced Concrete Slab
Asphalt Pavement
10.1.2.10
Main Equipment Foundation
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
10-1.
Bottom ash silo

10-2.
Fly ash silo

10-3.
Bottom ash silo

10-4.
Fly ash silo


Revision 1
Page 15 of 247

PECC3
10.1.2.11

Auxiliary Equipment Foundation

Structure/Facility
Outline Description
11-1
F.D.Fs
Foundation: Pile (if necessary), Reinforced

Concrete
11-2
P.A.Fs
- ditto -
11-3
I.D.Fs
- ditto -
11-4
E.S.Ps
- ditto -
11-5
Mills
- ditto -
11-6
Bottom Ash Bins
- ditto -
11-7
Transmission Towers

Concrete
Steel Structures (Galvanized steel post &
lattice)
11-8
Transformers
Foundation: Pile , Reinforced Concrete

Fire Wall: Reinforced Concrete with
seclusion Fence & Gate (Galvanized steel
post & lattice)
11-9
Gas Duct
Reinforced Concrete
11-10
Coarse/Fine Ash Storage Silos
Reinforced Concrete
Foundation: Pile
11-11
E.S.P. Pits

Superstructure: - ditto -
11-12
Gravity Settler

10.1.2.12
12-1
10.1.2.13
13-1
10.1.2.14
Desulphurization System
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
Desulphurization System

Concrete
Miscellaneous Facilities
Structure/Facility
Outline Description
Landscaping
Gravel Surfacing & Planting
100'000 DWT Coal Jetty

Structure/Facility

Revision 1
Outline Description
Page 16 of 247

PECC3

14.
Coal Jetty and Related Facilities
14-1
Coal berth
Substructure: Piled Pier,

14-2
Access Bridges
- ditto -
14-3
Mooring Facilities
Rubber Fender, Bollards, etc.
14-4
Approach Navigation channel

and Turning Basin
All works, materials and services though not expressly called for in these clauses but
which are necessary for the complete and proper operation of the plant, shall be performed
and furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
10.1.3
10.1.3.1
Standards and Abbreviations

Compulsory Vietnamese National Technical Codes
The Vietnamese National Technical Codes listed in this section are statutory and
mandatory requirements for this Project and must be complied with. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to verify the completeness and the correctness of this list in order to
ensure that all related statutory requirements and compulsory standards in Vietnam will be
met.
The Contractor must be fully and exclusively liable and responsible for the design of the
Plant and all engineering work to meet statutory and mandatory requirements on
Vietnamese National Technical Codes. The following compulsory Vietnamese National
Technical Codes must take precedence over other applicable Standards from other country
listed in 10.1.3.2 of this Section.
QCXDVN 09:2005
Energy Efficiency Building Code (EEBC)
QCXDVN
01:2008/BXD
Vietnam Building Code: Regional and Urban Planning and

Rural Residential Planning
QCVN 02:2009/BXD -
Vietnam Building Code: Natural Physical & Climatic Data

for Construction
QCVN
QT- 07:2009/BCT
National Technical Codes for Installation Power Network
QCVN 06:2010/BXD -
Vietnam Building Code on Fire Safety of Buildings
QCVN
20:2010/BGTVT
National Technical Regulation on aids to Navigation
QCVN
07:2011/BKHCN
National technical regulation on steel for the reinforcement

of concrete

Revision 1
Page 17 of 247

PECC3

QCVN
1:2011/BXD
16- -
Vietnam Building Code: Products, Goods of Building

Material- Portland cement and Portland cement clinker
products
QCVN
2:2011/BXD
16- -

Material- Construction glass and relating products
QCVN
3:2011/BXD
16- -

Material- Admixture products for Portland cements and
concretes
QCVN
4:2011/BXD
16- -

Material- Products of building material containing inorganic
fibers and /or organic fibers, aluminium alloy and woodbased products
QCVN
5:2011/BXD
16- -

Material- Paints, waterproofing materials, sealants and
relating products
QCVN
6:2011/BXD
16- -

Material- Tile products for floors and walls
QCVN 03:2012/BXD -
National Technical Regulation on Rules of Classifications

and Grading of Civil and Industrial Buildings and Urban
Infrastructures
QCVN
07: 2012/BLTBXH
National technical regulation on safe work of lift appliances
10.1.3.2
Applicable Standards
Materials listed for this project and the design and construction to be done in connection
thereto, shall preferably conform to the latest applicable Standards and Specifications
issued by the Societies or Technical Organizations listed herein below, or to equivalent
applicable Standards and Specifications established and approved in the country of
manufacture of the materials and equipment. The latest edition of each Standard shall
mean the latest available as of the date of contract signing.
The Contractor, if he proposes to use equivalent Standards and Specifications shall submit
proof that such Standards and Specifications are in fact equal to or better than those
preferred.
If the Contractor follows or uses equivalent Standards and Specifications, the Contractor
shall specify the particular Standards and/or Specifications intended to be used for the
information and approval of the Owner.
The purchase and use of any material to be supplied for the Civil and Architectural Works
prior to approval by the Owner of the "equivalent" Standards and Specifications shall be at
the Contractor's risk.

Revision 1
Page 18 of 247

PECC3

The Standards, Codes and/or Specifications issued, adopted or promulgated by the

following Societies and Technical Organizations are preferred by the Owner for use in this
Project:
ACI
AIJ
AISC
AISE
AISI
AMCA
ANSI
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
BS
DIN
EN
HEI
ISO
IBC
IPC
JASS
JIS
JRA
JSCE
NEMA
NFPA
OCDI
SIS
SMACNA
SSPC
TCVN
American Concrete Institute

Architectural Institute of Japan
American Institute of Steel Construction
Association of Iron and Steel Engineers
American Iron and Steel Institute
Air Moving and Conditioning Association
American National Standards Institute
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning
Engineers
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
British Standards
German Standardization Institute
European Standards
Heat Exchange Institute
International Organization for Standardization
International Building Code
International Plumbing Code
Japanese Architectural Standard Specification
Japanese Industrial Standards
Japan Road Association
Japan Society of Civil Engineers
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
National Fire Protection Association
Overseas Coastal Area Development Institute of Japan
Swedish Standards Institute
Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors National Association,
Steel Structure Painting Council
Vietnamese Technical Standards

Revision 1
Page 19 of 247

PECC3
10.2

SITE INVESTIGATION & TEMPORARY FACILITIES
10.2.1 Site Survey and Investigation

10.2.1.1 Topographic/Bathymetric Survey
The results of surveys carried out are included in Part 5, Drawings. However, the
Contractor shall make detailed topographic/bathymetric surveys which he considers
necessary for the detailed design of the work. The topographic survey along the cooling
water facilities line (from the intake to the outfall) and the bathymetric survey of the port
facilities area shall be carried out before detailed design. The cost and the scheduled time
for execution of this surveys shall be included in the Bid.
The Contractor must carry out the topographical survey in all areas identified for locating
the Facilities before he commences detailed design and additional Site leveling work as
required. Based on field observations, the Contractor must prepare and submit for the
Owners review the survey maps of the Site on suitable scale. The survey map must show
the spot levels and contour with grid lines. Established methods of surveying like
triangulation, traversing, levelling etc. must be adopted for the survey work.
10.2.1.2 Geological Investigation
The result of the geological investigation carried out is included in Part 5 Bid Drawings. If
the Contractor requires further geotechnical information for the proper design of
Civil/Architectural structures, then he shall define such further geotechnical investigation
which he considers necessary, include the cost of such investigations and the scheduled
time for their execution in the bid.
The Contractor must carry out his own geo-technical investigation in all work areas before
he commences detailed design and working drawings for establishing the subsoil
conditions and to decide type of foundation for the structures envisaged, construction
methods, any special requirements / remedial measures / treatment, called for sub
soil / foundations. The Contractor must submit the field and laboratory testing scheme
proposed by him for the Owners review before undertaking the geo-technical
investigation work.
The field tests must include, but not be limited to, the boring, trial pits, standard
penetration test, collection of disturbed and undisturbed soil samples, in-situ permeability
test, plate load test, field vibration test, dynamic cone penetration test, static cone
penetration test, field vane shear test, seismic refraction test, electrical resistivity test,
chemical analysis of underground water samples / soil samples.
Field investigations must be done in sufficient numbers as necessary to the appropriate
depth for complete determination of subsoil conditions. The laboratory investigations must
Revision 1
Page 20 of 247

PECC3

be conducted on soil & rock samples collected during field investigations in sufficient
numbers. Geo-technical investigations must be carried out in accordance with the relevant
Vietnamese Standards and established practices.
On completion of all, field & laboratory work, the Contractor must submit geo-technical
investigation report for the Owners review. Such reports must contain the geological
information of the region, procedure adopted for investigation, field and laboratory
observations / data / records and recommendations on type of foundation for different
type of structures envisaged.
Tests must be conducted at the laboratory of the soil investigation agency and must be
witnessed by Owner, if required.
10.2.2 Temporary Facilities
The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary construction facilities, including, but
not limited to, offices, camp accommodation, temporary jetty, unloading facilities,
warehousing and materials storage, temporary services, working, fabrication, assembly and
lay-down areas, plant and equipment and shall remove them, as directed, on completion of
the works.
The costs of all temporary works shall be deemed to be included in the bid price for the
permanent works with which they are associated, or for which they are required and no
separate payment for temporary works will be made.
10.2.2.2 Temporary Construction Water
Water for construction purposes shall be supplied by Owner. The anticipated location of
terminal point for the water supply is shown in the Bid Drawing in Part 5. The tariff for
construction water supply will be in accordance with the list price given in Part 3, Section
3. The Contractor shall install a flow-meter near the terminal point, and shall report
monthly to the Owner the water consumed and will be charged for the water consumption.
If the water quantity required by the Contractor exceeds the available supply, the
Contractor shall make his own arrangements to provide the necessary excess quantity. The
water treatment system shall also be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the water system during construction to the
necessary positions in the site for the works. The equipment and piping of the construction
water supply system shall not obstruct the works and the access ways. The water supply
source shall be decided in consideration of its capacity, the necessary quantity for the
works and avoidance of adverse environmental effects at the source.
10.2.2.2 Temporary Construction Electricity
Owner shall provide 22kV power line to interface point TP-CP (refer to Part 1, Clause
1.2.45 and Part 4 Annex B). The Contractor shall carry out the necessary checks in
conjunction with Owner and Owner for the safe and efficient distribution for construction.
The Contractor shall comply with the necessary wiring requirements of Owner and to IEC
Revision 1
Page 21 of 247

PECC3

Standard 60364. Any necessary refurbishment to ensure a secure distribution shall be

provided by the Contractor. He shall also ensure that the system is maintained as any
breakdown or failure in the system will not be a reason for a claim for delays or damages
to Owner. The Contractor will be charged for the electricity consumed during construction.
The tariff for temporary electricity supply will be in accordance with the list price given in
Part 3, Section 3.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the electricity supply during construction to the
necessary positions on the site for all works including all temporary works. The Contractor
shall submit the electricity arrangement plan for construction and details of its capacity to
the Engineer for approval prior to connecting. The equipment and cabling of the
construction electric supply system shall not obstruct the works and the access ways.
The cost of all electricity used for the works, whether inside or outside of the site, must be
borne by the Contractor. The cost and scheduled time for such works shall be included in
the Bid.
10.2.2.3 Contractors Site Offices, Canteen and Welfare Facilities
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary site offices, car parks and canteen for
the duration of the works. The Contractor shall also provide and maintain the lay down
area including access roads in the site. The location shall be planed in consideration of no
obstruction or delay of all the works.
All materials, debris or obstruction for site office including all others shall be cleared from
the site to the satisfaction of the Owner when they are not necessary to be used for the
works.
The Contractor shall provide a canteen/mess-room for the use of all staff workers on the
site and shall provide for the supply, operation, maintenance and cleaning of this
canteen/mess-room and all costs involved shall be included in the Bid price.
The Contractor shall provide on the site adequate changing facilities for his workforce,
suitably equipped with lockers, changing, washing and showering, clothes drying facilities
and toilets and shall provide for adequate attendance to maintain the facility to a high
standard of cleanliness. Adequate provision shall be made for storage of personal clothes
and effects as well as personnel protective equipment.
The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient toilet facilities are provided and maintained to a
high standard in suitable locations around the site to meet the requirements of the
workforce, taking into account the varying size of workforce and work locations during the
project.
10.2.2.4
Temporary Office for the Owner/Engineer
Temporary offices and car parks must be provided for Owner/Engineer staff to
Revision 1
Page 22 of 247

PECC3

accommodate
- 50 persons from Construction Management team and
- 100 persons from Operations and Maintenance team (to be recruited 18 months
prior to Unit 1 COD).
The office must be air-conditioned with necessary electrical conduit, wiring, LAN
connection and telephone connection for each desk.
The Contractor must make provision for, and pay all charges, in connection with high
quality Site office for the Owner's project management staff within the Contractor's central
administration area.
This layout of Owners temporary office shall include, but not limited to, the following
items:
- An office for the Owner's Project Manager
- A conference room
- Offices for engineers
- Accommodation for clerical staff with filing and reprographics facilities
- Store room
- Kitchen
- Day rest room
- Office furnishings
- Photocopying and facsimile equipment
- Suitable WC facilities
- A training room for 30 trainees
- Server room of adequate size
- 70 no. car parks must be provided.
The provided Owner/Engineers temporary office must be new and of modern
construction complete with ventilation and air conditioning, and be of insulated design.
This office should be available for occupation by the Owner within 8 weeks after the Site
access date and up to the time of departure from Site of the Contractor or following
handover of all of the Plant within his scope of works.
Provision of furniture include but not limited to:- Office tables/chairs/filing cabinets/cupboards/waste bins
- Telephones
- Fax machine
- Photocopier
- Cooker/Microwave Oven
- Refrigerator
- Water Heater and Kettle
Revision 1
Page 23 of 247

PECC3

- First aid box - fully equipped and serviced.

Employers Telecom Facility
The Contractor must provide telecom or a two-line satellite facility that will permit
communications to all major cities in the country and access to the international
telecommunications system. The Facility must be maintained until completion of the
Works.
The Contractor must provide an electronic telephone exchange unit (multiple incoming and
outgoing lines) for the Owners accommodation connected to the various accommodating
rooms provided as above.
The cost of the above facilities including all services (internal/external telecom, electric,
and water), furniture and facilities must be included and Facilities must be to the
acceptance of the Owner.
10.2.2.4 Storage of materials
The size requirements and locations of storage yards at the Site shall be submitted to the
Owner for approval.
All Site storage shall be on packers so that the stored equipment is out of contact with the
ground. Hard standings shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor as required.
The Contractor shall perform all design work necessary to demonstrate the structural
bearing capacity of hard standings
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and safe storage of his equipment on
Site and shall provide and maintain any covered storage accommodation and other
facilities required for the plant, or his equipment. The Contractor is responsible for
arranging the Laydown Area on the Site. If extra off-site storage area is required, the
Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements by his own costs.
All items shall be adequately protected at all times from any cause that might result in
damage or deterioration prior to erection/installation. All materials shall be stored such that
they will be protected against loss, corrosion, weather damage and distortion, damage by
vermin, and ingress of foreign matter.
Spare parts and special maintenance tools supplied to the Owner under this Contract shall
be clearly identified and shall be provided with protection suitable for long term storage
under tropical conditions. The Contractor shall provide weather-proof store houses for
delicate instrumentation and electrical equipment.
10.2.2.1 Approval of Temporary Works
Detailed drawings and calculations of all temporary Works shall be submitted to the
Owner/Engineer in sufficient time for his approval before construction or installation.

Revision 1
Page 24 of 247

PECC3

After construction or installation of temporary Works, no portion of the permanent Works

for which they are required shall be commenced until the temporary Works have been
inspected and approved by the Owner/Engineer.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the sufficiency and safety of all temporary
Works and the approval of the Owner/Engineer. The approval of the Owner/Engineer shall
not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract.

Revision 1
Page 25 of 247

PECC3
10.3

DESIGN CRITERIA & GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
10.3.1 General
This section specifies the design criteria and general guidelines which shall be applied to
the design of all civil and architectural works, as well as general design requirements for
buildings/structures.
The Contractor shall prepare the design based on the general design requirements
described in this clause. The Contractor shall specify all particulars of the design
requirement not covered for herein and on the Bid Drawings, subject to the approval of the
Owner.
10.3.2
Dimension and Units
The system of units used in design shall be metric system. Dimensions and member
designations on plans and drawings shall be in metric units. Other units shall only be used
as an addition in parentheses to show the equivalent of the metric units.
10.3.3
10.3.3.1
Design Codes/Standards and Design Elevations

Design Codes/Standards
All design work shall be in accordance with the standards and codes listed in Part 4 Section
1 and Clause 10.1.3 of this document.
In particular, for on-shore buildings/structures:
- Design loads and forces shall comply with IBC/ASCE
- Reinforced and pre-stressed concrete design shall comply with the ACI code
- Structural steel design shall comply with the AISC code
For off-shore structures, design works shall comply with OCDIs Technical standards and
commentaries for Port and Harbor facilities.
10.3.3.2 Design Elevations
The elevation level (EL) means the level based on the Hon Dau National Altitude System
in Vietnam (Decision No. 245-TTg, 1972).
The chart datum level (CD) means;
The datum relation between two levels (EL vs. CD) is as follow:

Revision 1
Page 26 of 247

PECC3

Unless otherwise specified, The Ground floor level of all Buildings from EL +3.50m (Hon
Dau National Altitude HN72 System in Vietnam) shall be designed in consideration of the
following items, and not less than 400 mm (EL +3.90m).
- Carrying in and out case of the equipment, facilities for Construction, Operation
and Maintenance of the plant
-
The inundation risk in the floor by the drainage design of the plant
- The minimum floor bottom height by the law, regulation

10.3.4
10.3.4.1
Loads and Forces for on-shore structures/buildings

Dead Loads
Dead loads to be used in design shall be the weights of structural members and all
materials and equipment fastened thereto or supported thereby, calculated in accordance
with the requirements of the appropriate design code. Unless otherwise specified, the
following unit weights of materials shall be used in computing dead loads:
for reinforced concrete
for plain concrete
for steel
for wood
for soil
for fresh water
for sea water
10.3.4.2
2,450 kg/m3
2,300 kg/m3
7,850 kg/m3
770 kg/m3
1,800 kg/m3
1,000 kg/m3
1,030 kg/m3
Live Loads
Design live loads shall be not less than those stipulated by IBC and, in addition, shall be
not less than the minimum live loads specified hereby.
Floor and Roof Live Loads: The following imposed loadings are minimum and must be
used:
(a) General
Revision 1
Page 27 of 247

PECC3
Ground Floor

T/m2
Office, Laboratory, Pantry
0.5
T/m2
Toilet
0.2
T/m2
HVAC Area
0.5
T/m2
Inaccessible Roof
0.1
T/m2
Accessible Roof
0.15
T/m2
Stairs
0.5
T/m2
Platform for framing (including catwalks)
0.2
T/m2
Walkways
0.3
T/m2
Checkered Plate & Grating Floor
0.5
T/m2
Outdoor PCC Trench Covers
T/m2
Surcharge Loads for earth pressure
T/m2
Tunnels & Road Crossing min. wheel load
7.5
Workshop, assembly / locker room
0.75
T/m2
(b) Turbine
-
Ground Floor
T/m2
Laydown Area
T/m2
Mezzanine Floor
0.5
T/m2
Operating Floor (Turbine Bay)
T/m2
Operating Floor (Heater Bay)
T/m2
Deaerator Floor
T/m2
Roof with metal sheets
0.1
T/m2
Grating in Ground Floor
T/m2
T/m2
0.5
T/m2
0.5
T/m2
(c) Central control building

-
Ground Floor
Cable spreader / Other Area
Mezzanine
Floor/Intermediate
(switchgear room)
Operating Floor (Control room)
0.5
T/m2
Roof
0.15
T/m2
floor
(d) Other Plant Building

-
Ground Floor
T/m2
Lay-down area
T/m2
Other equipment Floors
0.75
T/m2
Storage and Maintenance area
0.75
T/m2

Revision 1
Page 28 of 247

PECC3
Water Treatment Areas
Ware house

Ground Surface Above Cooling Water Pipes

10.3.4.3
T/m2
1.25
T/m2
T/m2
Wind Loads
Every building or structure and every portion thereof shall be designed to withstand, both
during erection and after completion, Design Wind Speed of 47.2 m/s (3-second gust wind
speed, 50-year mean recurrence interval).
Passive soil pressure on the foundations and, for structures with piled foundations, the
lateral resistance of the piles, may be considered to resist the horizontal base shear due to
wind forces.
10.3.4.4 Seismic Loads
According to the data from the Earth Scientific Institute of Vietnam, the location of Vinh
Tan Thermal Power Complex should be designed to withstand stronger earthquake with
ag=0.1g (Seismic Intensity Io=VII in MSK-64).
All buildings and structures will be designed and adopt necessary earthquake design
criteria provided in the IBC/ASCE or equivalent with Peak Ground Acceleration PGA=
0.1, and site class shall be determined based on site soil properties determined during
geotechnical investigation.
For structures with piled foundations, the lateral resistance of the piles may be considered
to resist the seismic horizontal base shear but no account shall be taken of passive soil
pressure on the foundations.
10.3.4.5
Earth Pressures
Lateral earth pressures on retaining walls and other structures may be determined by the
general Wedge Theory or other generally recognized procedure. Full account shall be
taken of lateral forces due to surcharge loads on the soil surface.
10.3.4.6
Horizontal Forces on Crane Runway Beam
Crane runway beams shall be designed to resist horizontal forces due to movement of the
crane trolley as follows:
(a)
A lateral force of not less than 20% of the sum of the weights of the lifted load and
the crane trolley (excluding other parts of the crane), acting at the top of the rail in
either direction normal to the rail.

Revision 1
Page 29 of 247

PECC3
(b)

A longitudinal force not less than 10% of the sum of the maximum wheel loads of
the crane applied at the top of the rail in either direction.
10.3.4.7
Vibration Forces and Dynamic Effects
Structures and foundations for heavy vibrating equipment including, but not limited to,
reciprocating and centrifugal compressors and large pumps, shall be investigated for
response to the imposed cyclic loading and unbalanced forces and moments. Such
structures and foundations shall be analyzed by recognized dynamic methods and
proportioned to ensure safe, smooth and trouble-free behavior under operating conditions.
Tall, slender structures shall be investigated for dynamic response to wind and seismic
loading, including the effects of vortex shedding, wind-excited oscillations and ovalling.
10.3.4.8
Impact Loads
The following minimum impact loads must be used in addition to other loads
cranes, or other Equipment creating dynamic forces:
For supports of elevators:
For cab-operated traveling crane support girder and connections:
For pendant-operated traveling crane support girder and connections:
For hangers supporting floors and balconies:
10.3.4.9
for hoist,
100 %
25 %
10 %
33 %
Water Pressure
Hydrostatic pressure, buoyancy, residual water pressure, dynamic water pressure during
earthquake shall be considered in the design of marine and other structures.
10.3.4.10
Other Loads and Forces
Piping loads for main steam, boiler feed, condensate, and extraction lines must be
specifically determined and located. Piping expansion loads and dynamic load must be
considered on an individual design basis. Loads imposed on perimeter beams around pipe
chase areas must also be specifically determined. Pipe dead loads for other area must be
determined as uniform loads per square meter of floor area and must be carried to columns
and foundations as pipe dead loads.
Full account shall be taken of the effects of forces due to environmental and secondary
effects such as temperature change, creep, shrinkage and settlement.

Revision 1
Page 30 of 247

PECC3
10.3.4.11

Load Combinations
The effects of load combinations on structures and structural members shall be investigated
using the load combination factors specified in the relevant design codes listed in Clause
10.1.3 and 10.3.3 of this Section 10.
10.3.4.12
Factors of safety
For purposes of design, every structure and foundation will be designed to resist the
overturning, hydrostatic uplift, and sliding effects caused by applied forces. Stability
analyses will be performed by superimposing all appropriate loads for each of the
conditions being investigated in accordance with standard engineering practice as governed
by applicable codes and standards. Listed below are the required minimum factors of
safety for each type of stability analysis:
Overturning (wind, seismic, or other)
1.2
Sliding (wind, seismic, or other)
1.5
Uplift (wind, seismic, or hydrostatic)
1.1
Pile capacity
2.5
Soil bearing capacity
2.5
10.3.5
Loads and Forces for off-shore structures
Loads and forces on off-shore structures shall be determined based on OCDIs Technical
standards and commentaries for Port and Habour facilities.
Wind load and seismic load shall be determined from above code with input data provided
in Clauses 10.3.4.3 and 10.3.4.4 of this Section.
10.3.5.1 Self weight and surcharge
Self weight and surcharge (include static load and live load) shall be determined based on
OCDIs requirements, except that the live load on upper Surface of Jetty shall not be less
than 2T/m2
10.3.5.2 Wave Force
The design wave at a marine structure shall be established based on analyzed waves of
return period of 50 years taking diffraction, refraction, reflection, shoaling, breaking and
other transformations of wave into consideration. The wave force acting on a structure
shall be determined using an appropriate calculation method on the design wave.

Revision 1
Page 31 of 247

PECC3

10.3.5.3 Forces Produced by Ships

External force produced by a ship at the time of berthing shall be determined in
consideration of the dimension of the ship, berthing method, angle and velocity, structure
of the mooring facilities, and the effect of wind, wave and current.
10.3.6
Land Reclamation
Land reclamation for Site shall be done by other local Contractor to EL +3.5m in the Plant
Area and EL +4.5m in the Switchyard, then handed-over to the . Land reclamation of main
power plant area for Vinh Tan 4 is carried out by the Owner to EL +3.5m in the Plant Area
and EL +4.5m in the Switchyard and handed-over to the Contractor by 02 stage:
- 32 ha in the main plant area : 3 months since Effective Date
- The remaining area : 14 months since Effective Date
The site leveling level and soil compaction shall be handed-over to EPC Contractor "as is"
which documentations received from local Contractor. The Contractor shall be deemed
fully responsible for any necessary further works to the "as is" site with requirements as
follows:
- Tolerance should be not more than 50cm;
- Compressed solid coefficient (K) should be not less than 0.85
Besides, the Contractor has responsibility for checking again filling level, revetment
structure, drainage system, flood water And ensure that all of the above mentioned
system and other secondary structure shall be safe and stable during construction and
operation stage of Vinh Tan 4 power plant, if one or more than problems about design and
working shall be occurred then the Contractor should inform to leveling contractor (local
contractor) for solution. Oppositely all the responsibility shall be of the Contractor if have
any problems.
Further site leveling work must be provided by the Contractor according to the Site Level
Design and Analysis to be carried out as part of the Contract requirement.
10.3.7
Power House
10.3.7.1 General Description

Power House Building shall consist of the following Houses and Buildings which shall be
enclosed by cladding to protect the sensitive Mechanical and Electrical Equipment from
rainfall, wind, damage from salt, which could be foreseen at the Site, and to control noises;
- One (1) no. of common enclosed Turbine House for two (2) T/G units;
- One (1) no. of common enclosed Central Control Building for two (2) units;
Revision 1
Page 32 of 247

PECC3

- Two (2) nos. of Boiler Houses

(a) Turbine House
Turbine House for two (2) T/G units shall be arranged in accordance with Specification
Documents.
In the Turbine House, steam turbine and generator shall be installed on T/G Block and
condenser shall be installed under the T/G Block. Auxiliary equipment such as various
pumps shall be located on the ground floor and major piping shall be routed on the first
floor.
Two (2) nos. of erection bay shall be arranged in unit 1 & 2 for erection and maintenance
purpose. Overhead Travelling crane shall also be provided under roof structure of Turbine
area for erection and maintenance purpose.
One (1) no. of carring-in entrance for each T/G units shall be designed.
In the Heater Bay, feed water heaters and deaerators shall be arranged on respective floors.
Boiler feed pumps will be arranged on the ground floor.
The turbine hall must be steel framed structure having an external cladding system. The
external cladding system shall be considered in wall of the turbine building. Elevated
floors of the turbine hall must be made of concrete slab with welded steel grating in certain
areas. The wall and roof must not cause leakage of rainwater, which must also be
structurally strong to withstand the wind loading caused by the maximum wind speed. The
walls and roof must be of profiled metallic cladding to be reviewed and agreed by the
Owner. A walkway for Crane Girder has to be installed along one side line wall.
Interconnection walk-ways between the turbine building levels and the adjoining boiler
house must be provided on operating floor.
Exterior walls of the turbine house shall be concrete block up to one point two (1.2) meter
above the ground floor and the portion above the concrete wall shall be single skin steel
sheet.
Wall lighting panel shall be used above ground floor for daylight in turbine building.
(b) Central Control Building
Central Control Building shall be connected to Turbine House.
Floor levels for Ground, First and Second Floors of Central Control Building shall be the
same as those of Turbine House for free passage.
Indoor/outdoor staircases and walkways for two-way escape with rated fireproofness shall
be provided in Central Control Building in accordance with codes and standards referred to
Clause 10.1.3.
In the Central Control Building, various facilities for Control/Instrumentation and
Electrical equipment shall be located. The ground floor includes Repair machine room,
Shift workshop, Diesel Generator room and etc. The first (1) floor includes Switchgear
room, DC Switch room, Battery room, A/C equipment room. The second (2) floor includes
Central control room, C&I work shop, Shift manager room, Meeting room, Meal room,
Technician room etc. as shown in the Bid Drawings.

Revision 1
Page 33 of 247

PECC3

(c) Boiler House

Two (2) nos. of Boiler Houses consisting of boiler and coal bunker structure for each unit
shall be arranged adjacent to the turbine house. Each Boiler House shall have roof against
rainfall, wind.
The Boiler Houses and The Turbine House are connected by at least four (4) nos. of
accesses between each Boiler Houses and Turbine House with man doors on Ground,
Second, Third, Top Floors.
The Boiler Houses and The Central Control Building are connected by two (2) nos. of
accesses with man doors on First floor, Second floor.
Transformer bay and Hydrogen Plant Building shall be situated adjacent to the Power
House. .
The following reinforced concrete drain pits shall be constructed underground in each unit.
The effective volume of pit shall be calculated by taking into consideration with inlet flow
and the economic number of pump operations per day.
The detailed design and detail drawings shall be approved by the Owner.
Two (2) nos. of transfer pumps with 100% duty each shall be provided.
- List of reinforced concrete drain pits
Name
Application of Lining
General waste water basin (for Unit 1)
General waste water basin (for Unit 2)
AH Washing Drain Pit (for Unit1)
FRP lining
AH Washing Drain Pit (for Unit 2)
FRP lining
CPP Effluent Pit
CPP Ammonia Effluent Pit
FRP lining
Hot Water Drain Pit
Resinous mortar and FRP lining
Chemical Tank Drain Pit
FRP lining
Lubricating oil Pit
Regeneration Waste Water Pit
FRP lining
The boiler house must be a steel framed structure.

Revision 1
Page 34 of 247

PECC3

10.3.7.2 Design of Building

The Contractor shall design Power House buildings including piling, foundation, structural
steel works, all finishes, building services based on the following design conditions, unless
otherwise specified.
The design shall fully comply with codes and standards listed in Part 4 Section 1 and
Clause 10.1.3.
Design loads specified in Clause 10.2 shall be adopted for the design of structural steel,
reinforced concrete, piling and foundation, in addition to building equipment and building
services.
The type of loads, load combinations, load factors and allowable limit, which will be
adopted for design shall be approved by the Owner prior to the commencement of design
work.
If the noise level of Mechanical and Electrical Equipments at site boundary line will be
expected to exceed the value referred to Part 4 Section 1, appropriate noise control system
such as walls and/or roof insulate against noise shall be installed.
Appropriate insulations shall be installed in the room with air-conditioners.
The Contractor shall submit their proposed colour schemes which consist of base colours
and accent colours to be applied for Power House building for the Owners consideration
and approval, in early design stage.
The Contractor shall design the superstructure and foundation, and piling of Turbine
House, Central Control Building and Boiler Houses. The Contractor shall also prepare and
submit to the Owner for approval, all necessary calculations, working drawings for piling
and foundation work, steel work, cladding, concrete works, brick works, Interior/Exterior
finishing and metal works and glazing, carpentry, joinery and hardware, building services
etc. in accordance with the relevant Specification and Specification Drawings.
The Contractor shall complete the construction of wall and roof cladding and
circumferential brick / block concrete wall and water proof covering for the Power House
and the installation of relating rainwater drainage, prior to the installation of equipment, so
as to avoid the ingress of rainwater into these buildings.
10.3.7.3 Architectural Features

Exterior walls of Power House shall be reinforced concrete up to one (1) meter above the
ground floor and the portion above the concrete wall shall be steel sheet.

Revision 1
Page 35 of 247

PECC3

Pitched roof made from steel sheet shall be used for The Turbine House and The Boiler
Houses, Flat roof of concrete slab with parapet wall shall be used for Heater bay and
Central Control Building.
Interior walls shall be of light weight steel frame wall or concrete hollow blocks.
Suspended floor slab shall be of reinforced concrete construction, but steel grating floor
shall be also adopted as per mechanical/electrical requirement.
The top of surface of Turbine Operating Floor shall be covered by Plastic tile with
sufficient hardness and oil resistance.
Louvers and ventilators shall be also provided so as to secure adequate ventilation for
satisfying the indoor design conditions specified hereunder.
Size of each window shall be determined to keep good indoor condition by natural light.
In addition, the reasonable methods of cleaning and operation for unfixed windows shall be
taken into consideration.
Insect screen shall be installed on unfixed windows and louvers.
Particular kinds of floor such as access floor and antistatic floor shall be satisfied with the
bid drawings.
Finishes will be specified as below:
Central Control Building
Exterior Wall: Masonry and paint or sand-lime brick or single steel sheet cladding.
Interior Finishes:
Office etc.
Floor
: vinyl Tile
Wall: emulsion paint
Ceiling : suspended false ceiling panels
Control Rooms
Floor : false raised floor of 300mm high to facilitate cable laying beneath
Wall : emulsion paint
Ceiling : suspended sound-proof ceiling panels
Lobby, Stair and Corridor (interior)

Floor : terrazzo tile

Revision 1
Page 36 of 247

PECC3

Ceiling : emulsion paint
Storage
Floor : cement toweled finish
Changing Rooms, Showers & Toilets (ladies & gentlemen)

Floor : unglazed ceramic tile
Wall : glazed ceramic tile
Ceiling : suspended plastic stripe shaped panel
Locker
Floor : vinyl Tile
Stair (interior)
Wall : emulsion paint Ceiling : emulsion paint
Steam Turbine
Exterior Wall: Concrete block 1200mm high above ground floor and Structural Steel
from ground floor with Steel Sheet Cladding
Interior Finishes:
Turbine hall
Floor : epoxy paint
Wall : Single steel sheet Cladding
Ceiling : metal decking
Roof : Single steel sheet Cladding
10.3.7.4 Building Facilities

The following facilities shall be furnished in the Power House:
-
Misc. Power and lighting system

Air conditioning and ventilation system
Water supply and drainage system
Sanitary and sewerage system
Lightning protection system
Crane and hoists
Communication system
Fire detection and protection system

Revision 1
Page 37 of 247

PECC3

10.3.7.4.1 Misc. Power and Lighting system

Building design shall cover the Misc. Power and lighting system as specified in Part 4
section 7.
Lighting levels shall be referred to the Part 4 Section 1.
10.3.7.4.2 Air-conditioning and Ventilation System
The Contractor shall design, supply, install and commission air conditioning and
ventilation system.
Turbine House shall have air ventilation system with ventilation fans (induced fans and
exhaust fans) to regulate air condition (low temperature less than 40 and plus air
pressure level shall be less than +5 mmAq ).
Turbine House shall be designed louver for air ventilation system.
Centralized air conditioning system shall be installed to provide air conditioning to the
following rooms;
Shift workshop
Chemical dosing room
Permit to work issue room
Meeting room
Meal room
Office C & I
Shift manager room
Test & Development room
Communication room
C & I work shop
Meter room
The above system shall be designed to maintain 17-23 room temperature and 505%
relative humidity.
The ventilation system shall have required capacity to provide the following condition in
the respective room/area:
(Inside Air Design Condition)
- Turbinehouse operating floor
40 max.
- Switchgear room
40 max.
- Diesel spare room
40 max.
- Sampling rack room
40 max.

Revision 1
Page 38 of 247

PECC3

- Battery room
40 max.
- DC switch room
40 max.
- Air conditioning and ventilation equipment room 40 max.

- Coal Bunker House
40 max.
- Elevator motor room
40 max.
(Mean Air Change per Hour)

- Change room/Toilet/Shower
10times / hour
10.3.7.4.3 Water Supply and Drainage System

The said system shall be provided at the following room/area:
(The Ground Floor)
Toilet
Shift workshop
Entrance and exits
(The First Floor)
Battery room
(The Second Floor)
C&I workshop
Office C&I
Toilet & shower
Meal rooms
One set of electric water heater shall be provided in the meal rooms. Also, drinking
fountains shall be provided for the ground and second floors near the staircase.
10.3.7.4.4 Sanitary and Sewerage System
Suitable number of water closets, urinals, lavatories subject to the approval of the Owner,
shall be provided in the toilets, and a mop sink for cleaning shall be provided in each toilet.
Washing facilities shall be provided at Battery room and C&I workshop.
Sewage drainage from water closets and urinals shall be led into the septic tank located
outdoor through a separate sewage system having adequate capacity.
The capacity and structure of the septic tanks shall conform to local regulations. The tank
shall be of reinforced concrete and installed underground. Both digestion chamber and
leaching chamber shall have reinforced wall, top slab and bottom slab. Manholes shall be
provided for each chamber for periodic maintenance and inspection.

Revision 1
Page 39 of 247

PECC3

10.3.7.4.5 Lightning Protection System

The Contractor shall design, supply, install and commission the lightning protection
system including necessary Conductor rods, down conductors, joints, bonds, earth
termination and all necessary equipment.
The detailed specification for Lightning Protection System shall be referred to Part 4
Section 1 and Section 7.
10.3.7.4.6 Cranes and Hoists
Cranes and Hoists shall be provided as specified in Clause 4.2.11 of Part 4 section 2.
Power house structural design shall take into consideration the design conditions for
cranes/hoists as specified in Part section 2 to Part section 12.
10.3.7.4.7 Communication System
Building design shall cover the communication system as specified in Part 4 section 7 and
8.
10.3.7.4.8 Fire detection and Protection System
Building design shall cover the Fire detection and Protection System as specified in Part 4
section 2.
10.3.7.4.9 T/G Block
The T/G Block shall be constructed monolithically with its foundation and independent
from the Power House. Study shall be done to prevent harmful vibrations during normal
operation and start-up and shutdown of the equipment on the superstructure of the building
and other equipment and facilities in the power house.
10.3.8 Coal Jetty
10.3.8.1
Coal Berth and related facilities
The capacity of the coal berth shall be a 100,000 DWT-class coal vessel. The standard
dimensions of 100,000 DWT-class coal vessels are as follows.
Vessel Type / Size

Revision 1
Coal Vessel / 100,000 DWT
Page 40 of 247

PECC3

Overall Length Lt
250.0 m
Molded Breadth Bt
43.0 m
Molded Depth Ht
20.3 m
Full Load Draft Tt
14.5 m
The structure of coal berth shall be piled jetty. Cross sections, setting depths and other
parameters of piles shall be determined ensuring sufficient vertical and horizontal bearing
capacity. The superstructure of coal berth shall be reinforced concrete beams and slabs or
equivalent.
The coal berth shall not be less than 310 m long, and shall have appropriate width of not
less than 29 m for coal unloading operations by two (2) unloaders including traveling rail,
mooring operations, parking space for unloaders, parking space for bulldozers, fresh water
supply piping, electric power line including step-down transformer and power distribution
board, and other equipment.
The top level of the berth shall be CD +6.70 m, and the top level of concrete foundations
for unloader rail and belt conveyor of coal transportation and other machines shall not be
less than CD +6.90 m.
The top level of the berth shall be checked to avoid water breaking over or inundating the
deck. Historical data of wave heights and high water levels must be used to establish the
top of concrete elevation. When the waves reach or flood the deck, the very high lateral
and vertical loads shall not affect the mechanical equipment on the deck. Suitable nominal
air gap must be provided between the crest of the design wave and the underside of the
deck.
The berth must satisfy the following conditions of deck operations:
- Two continuous un-loaders are operating; and
- When one of the un-loaders is under maintenance, coal unloading can be carried
out by the other un-loader without shifting the coal vessel.
The berthing shall be designed to absorb the wind impingement forces of a ship anchored
and unloading during a design defined storm. It must also be designed to resist the impact
of a fully loaded coal vessel moving perpendicular to the berth.
The berth surface must have areas for equipment component laydown during repairs and
maintenance, and for parking a few personnel cars and maintenance equipment.

Revision 1
Page 41 of 247

PECC3

There must be vertical piles that support the weight of the deck and equipment and batter
(inclined) piles that will resist lateral and horizontal loads.
The anticorrosive measures shall be taken if steel pipe piles are employed to the
substructure, with details provided in Clause 10.5.11 in this Section. For other type of
piles, adequate anticorrosive measures for steel portion shall be carried out.
The superstructure of the berth shall be of such a structure to prevent coal powder or
rainwater containing coal powder from seeping through the joints in the concrete slab and
falling into the sea.
Two (2) pits for collecting rain water shall be provided on the berth at adequate intervals
and each pit shall have a capacity of not less than 2.0 m3. Collected rainwater shall be
collected into coal/oil separation pits and then discharged into the sea through drain ditch
or pipes. Grating which can easily be put on and taken off shall be provided with the pits.
The structure must be equipped with high efficiency dissipating rubber fender units with
rubbing panels consisting of a steel frame and low friction facing material. Each fender
must be reinforced with a backing frame, and restrained with tension and shear chains or
cables. The mooring dolphins must be equipped with mooring bollards capable to
accommodate up to three ships hawsers.
Fenders and Bollards shall be installed taking into consideration of the above standard
dimensions of coal vessel. Materials of such equipment shall meet the specification in
Clause 10.5.17. Fenders shall be designed and selected for berthing velocity of 15 cm/s,
and shall be installed at spacing of not more than 18 m. Bollards shall be designed enough
tolerable for the pulling force by 100,000 DWT class coal vessels. Bollards shall be fixed
at spacing of not more than 26 m.
The berth must be provided with stainless ladders to low water level at the both ends of
jetty and mooring dolphins.
10.3.8.2 Access bridge
The Coal jetty must be connected to the shore by an access bridge. The access bridge as
well as the jetty must be designed such as not to impede small boat navigation (special
openings must be provided between rows of piles) and allow marine life free travel access
across and along the access bridge.
The access bridge must meet the following requirements:
- Provide access for trucks and cars to service the equipment.
- Provide at some distances vehicle pass-by areas.
- Provide support for the conveyors that transport coal from wharf platform to the
shore.
- Provide access by car for personnel for crane operation, maintenance, ship mooring
assistance, etc.
Revision 1
Page 42 of 247

PECC3

Catwalk must be provided between the main deck and the mooring dolphin.
Access bridge between the jetty and the main plant shall be 14 m in effective width.
The access bridge must consist of a concrete deck, supported on piles. Handrails shall be
installed on the both sides of the bridge conforming to the general specifications of the Part
4 Section 1.
The access bridge must be provided with stainless ladders to low water level at regular
intervals along the access trestle.
The precast concrete decking must be provided to minimize the use of cast-in-place
concrete because of the great length of the access bridge and the difficulty of transporting
and pouring concrete in deep water away from the shore.
10.3.8.3 Approach Navigation channel and Turning Basin

Approach navigation channel to power plant port and its turning basin shall be dredged by
the Contractor. The profile of the approach navigation channel and turning basin is shown
in the Bid Drawing in Part 5 Attachment 2.
Navigation aids must include flashing yellow lights, breasting dolphins, mooring dolphins,
day beacons, and transit lights.
The required Jetty depth at low water level must be calculated by adding the maximum
draft of the design coal vessel to the needed under keel clearance. The minimum under keel
clearance must be at least 15% of the maximum design ships draft. Consideration must be
given to potential silting and the cost of dredging versus moving the unloading pier further
into deeper water.
The berthing location at the jetty and turn around basin must be deep enough to allow free
maneuver of a loaded vessel.
For berthing and de-berthing tugboats will be available. Some ships may be able to steer
and dock with their own gear, but will need tugboat assistance during stormy weather or
when there are high waves, high underwater currents or high winds. There must be a small
breakwater and a sheltered area near the shore for keeping the tugboats during stormy
weather or when not in service.
10.3.9
10.3.9.1
Foundations for Coal Handling System & Pipe/Cable Rack

Foundations of Coal Conveyor, Transfer Tower
Coal conveyor foundations shall be reinforced concrete footing type, unless otherwise
specified. Special care of the foundations shall be taken to prevent settlement and lateral
displacement to the upper structure. Piled foundations, replacement of soil or compacted
soil foundations shall be employed if necessary.

Revision 1
Page 43 of 247

PECC3
10.3.9.2

Pipe/Cable Rack Foundations and Trenches
The specifications in this Clause shall apply to pipe/cable rack foundations. Trenches shall
be of reinforced concrete. Piling and replacement of soil or other necessary measures shall
be adapted to foundations for the stability of the structures.
At the point that road crosses the trench, the trench shall be designed in consideration of
the machinery load.
10.3.9.3
Buildings of Coal Conveyor, Transfer Tower
Buildings of Coal Conveyor, Transfer Towers shall be designed as specified Part 4 section
4, and shall have be enclosed by wall, roof, floor against rainfall, wind, damage from salt,
noises and to provide dust suppression. Buildings of Coal Conveyor, Transfer Towers shall
be provided with ventilation system to ensure the inside is kept at acceptable temperature
level for equipment, facilities, etc.
All multi-storey buildings and platform arrangements shall be provided with stairways and
landings, with handrailing, either in reinforced concrete or structural steel with open steel
gratings such that access is provided to all levels.
10.3.10
10.3.10.1
Coal Storage Yard and Foundations

Coal Storage Yard Foundations
The foundations of the stacker/reclaimer rails shall be sufficiently stable against the
equipment loads during operations, during storms, and earthquakes, and effects of coal pile
load, and shall not cause settlement or displacement detrimental to stacker/reclaimer
operations. Piled foundations and/or subsoil improvement shall be employed. Coal stock
pile area must be sufficiently stable against coal pile load, and shall be provided with
drainage facilities. Subsoil improvement shall be carried out at places where circular slide
failure and/or long term consolidation settlement would be caused for future operations.
The slope shall be placed on the Coal Storage Yard for the access of the bulldozer.
10.3.10.2
Dry Coal Shed
Coal yard storage shed shall be constructed as large spanned steel frame structure(s) with
single steel sheet cladding having pile foundations (if necessary) as shown in the Bid
Drawings.

Revision 1
Page 44 of 247

PECC3
10.3.10.3

Coal Storage Yard Drainage
Any water contaminated by coal lumps in coal storage yard shall not be discharged directly
to outside the power plant area. The contaminated water shall be once collected to
sedimentation basin, and the supernatant shall be pumped out to the waste water treatment
facilities. The deposited sludge shall be removed to the outside in operation phase. The
drainage system shall be designed in consideration of all the functions and profiles of the
coal storage yard facilities including coal storage yard shed for any possible contaminated
water not to be discharged to outside the power plant area.
The contaminated water will be once collected to drainage gutter and then conveyed to the
sedimentation basin by gravity or pumps through centrifugal reinforced concrete drain
pipes from the gutters.
The coal storage yard sedimentation basin shall have a capacity for holding runoff of 12
hours rainfall of return period of 1 year to be determined by the Contractor. Adequate
system and/or facility to remove the deposited sludge in the sedimentation basin shall be
installed.
10.3.10.4
Gravel Basement
The Contractor shall carry out gravel basement in the coal storage yard area. Specifications
of gravel basement shall comply with Clause 10.5.15.6.
10.3.10.5. Enclosing Wall
Enclosing wall of 1m high above ground shall be installed along the periphery of the coal
storage yard. The wall shall be a structure of adequate strength to sustain loads imposed by
any collapse of the coal piles.
10.3.10.6. Wind wall
The wind wall shall be installed along the periphery of the coal storage yard to windproof.
The wind wall shall be a structure of adequate strength to sustain loads imposed by wind
pressure.
10.3.11
Cooling Water Facilities
10.3.11.1 General
Cooling water facilities specified in Clause 10.3.11 include intake, intake channel, pump
station, circulating water pipeline, discharge pit, discharge culvert, discharge channel, and
outfall discharge outlet.
10.3.11.2
Intake

Revision 1
Page 45 of 247

PECC3

The Contractor shall be liable for breaking down the structure of the revetment for Vinh
Tan PGC handed over by the Local Contractor (for land reclamation) in order to construct
the intake head and intake channel . After completing this work, the Contractor shall be
responsible for safety of the revetment structure at the place of demolition.
The intake is a structure which takes the condenser cooling water from the sea and conveys
the water into intake channel.
The intake shall have a culvert structure to prevent floating objects such as drifting wood,
debris, etc. from being taken into the intake. The bottom elevation of the culvert shall be
EL -6.10 m. The bottom elevation of the waterway in front of the intake shall be EL -6.60
m. The intake water flow velocity at the location of curtain-wall shall not be more than 20
cm/s. In designing cross-section of intake at the location of curtain-wall, 10 cm allowance
of thickness for adhesion of seashells to the structure shall be considered.
The front area of intake shall be dredged as a waterway for intake by the Contractor. The
dredged area shall be ample to prevent scouring the sea bed by intake flow. The dredged
slope of the waterway shall not be more than 1/5. The dredged bottom in front of the intake
for 15 m from the face-line of the intake shall be covered with rubble stone with average
weight of approximate 50-150 kg. The thickness of the rubble stone shall not be less than 1
m for protection against washout. The lower of the rubble stone shall be replaced with sand
with thickness of 0.5 m.
The outside of the box culvert for 15 m from the concrete of the box culvert shall be
covered with rubble stone with average weight of approximate 10-100 kg. The thickness of
the rubble stone shall not be less than 1 m for protection against washout. The lower of the
rubble stone shall be replaced with sand with thickness of 0.5 m.
The intake shall be a structure safe against settlement, overturn and other possible troubles.
For the slope of soil works for the intake channel, adequate slope protection specified in
Clause 10.5.4 shall be conducted.
10.3.11.3
Intake Channel
the intake channel. After completing this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for
safety of the revetment structure at the place of demolition.
Following requirements will be applied in case Contractor proposed to relocated CW Pump
Station toward main plant area:
The intake channel is an open channel structure which conveys the cooling water from the
intake to cooling water pump station.
The Contractor shall design the structure and cross-section of intake channel considering:
the reduction of wave effects reaching to cooling water pump station; the flow velocity in
which adhesion of seashells is inhibited; and maintenance method of the intake channel.
The flow velocity in standard section of intake channel shall be below approximate 2.0
m/s, and the maximum flow velocity in intake channel shall not be over 3.5 m/s.
Revision 1
Page 46 of 247

PECC3

The intake channel shall be a structure safe against settlement, and adequate foundation
shall be employed depending on the structure of intake channel.
As for the crossing point of intake channel with the access road, the Contractor shall design
and construct crossing bridge(s) in compliance with relevant AASHTO standards.
Stainless steel ladders down to the lowest design level of water for intake channel shall be
installed at the same location of the above bridges but alternately on the both insides of the
channel.
For the slope of soil works for the intake channel, adequate slope protection specified in
Clause 10.5.4 shall be conducted.
10.3.11.4
Pump Station
Location of the Pump Station is provided in Part 5 Attachment 2. Contractor can

recommended their own optimized location with clear value engineering for the Owners
consideration.
The pump station is a pit structure which accommodates four (4) sets of condenser cooling
water pumps and bar screens and travelling screens.
The pit of pump station shall be of reinforced concrete structure with pile foundation.
The pit shall be designed conforming to pump performance so that the pump does not suck
air due to vortices and to prevent flow-induced pump vibration and cavitations. In addition,
the pump pit shall be designed in the condition that the water-flow velocity approaching to
bar screen and travelling screen is in the range of 0.2 to 0.5 m/s under the rated output
condition. Abrupt changes of cross-section from intake channel to pump station shall not
be allowed to prevent disturbance of water flow, and gradual expanding with not more than
15 degrees angle shall be adopted.
The dimensions of pump pit shall be determined taking into account fluctuations in water
level and surging by tripping of pumps. In designing the inside dimensions, 10 cm
allowance of thickness for adhesion of seashells inside the pit shall be considered.
The pump station shall be of such structure to empty the pit by stop logs.
The stop log requirements are specified in Clause 10.5.9.11.
The pump pit shall be divided into four (4) compartments, and each compartment shall
contain at least two (2) steel ladders before the bar screen and behind the travelling screen
in water flow direction.
All openings shall be covered with galvanized grating of I shape beam.
The pump station shall be a structure safe against settlement. Adequate foundation shall be
employed depending on the ground conditions.

Revision 1
Page 47 of 247

PECC3
10.3.11.5

Circulating Water Pipeline
Circulating Water Pipeline. After completing this work, the Contractor shall be responsible
for safety of the revetment structure at the place of demolition.
The circulating water pipeline is a water conduit which conveys the cooling water from the
cooling water pump station to condenser, and from the condenser to discharge pit.
For the section of circulating water pipeline in turbine house, additional or alternative
requirements are specified in Section 4, and thus, the Contractor shall design the whole
section of circulating water pipeline in accordance with not only this Clause but also the
specification in Section 4.
The water flow velocity in the pipeline shall be in the range of 2.5 m/s to 3.0 m/s. Under
the condition, cross-section of pipeline shall be designed to minimize the annual cost by
taking into consideration the relation between initial construction cost and operation cost of
cooling water pumps. In designing cross-section of pipeline, 5 cm allowance of adhesion
of seashells inside the pipe shall be considered.
The pipeline from cooling water pump station to the inlet of turbine house and from the
outlet of turbine house to discharge pit shall be installed underground, and the structure of
the underground section shall be of steel-lined reinforced concrete with pile support.
The steel pipe (lining) shall conform to ASTM 36 specifications. The bifurcations and
branches shall be fabricated by suitably shaped plates which shall be stiffened and ribbed
as necessary. The pipes and accessories shall be designed under the worst load conditions.
The outer surface of the steel pipe (lining) except the portion lined with reinforced concrete
and all inner surface of steel pipe (lining) shall be coated with adequate paint specified in
Clause 10.5.10.9.
Appropriate reinforcement of pipe and concrete lining shall be carried out so that inner
steel pipe would not suffer deformations due to concrete lining loads during construction.
Corrosion allowance for pipeline shall be 2 mm for inner surfaces and 2 mm for outer
surfaces except the portion covered with concrete.
Manholes for inspection of underground pipeline shall be installed at intervals of not more
than 100 m. The manhole diameter shall not be less than 90 cm.
At road-crossing points, traffic of 20 tons gross weight vehicle shall be taken into account
as normal load.

Revision 1
Page 48 of 247

PECC3

10.3.11.6 Discharge Pit (Siphon pit)

The discharge pit shall be prepared at the connection of circulating water pipeline and
discharge box culvert. The discharge pit shall be separate for each unit, and it shall be of
reinforced concrete with adequate pile foundation.
Discharge pit shall be such structure to empty the pit by partition wall or by stop logs. Stop
log requirements are specified in Clause 10.5.9.11.
The dimensions of the discharge pit shall be determined taking into consideration the
syphon effect of cooling water pipeline and surging which would occur when the
circulation pump is suddenly stopped. In designing inside dimensions of discharge pit, 5
cm allowance of thickness for possible adhesion of seashells on the surface of the structure
shall be considered.
The discharge pit shall have two (2) stainless steel ladder at two the wall.
A steel stand shall be installed at the outlet of each discharge pipeline to prevent vibrations.
Specifications of these steel stands shall comply with Clause 10.5.9.
10.3.11.7 Discharge Culvert
the outfall. After completing this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for safety of the
revetment structure at the place of demolition.
Discharge culvert shall be a reinforced concrete structure which conveys the cooling water
from the discharge pit to outfall.
Discharge culvert shall be designed considering 20 tons gross weight vehicle as normal
load at the crossing point with internal road.
10.3.11.8 Discharge Channel
discharge channel. After completing this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for
safety of the revetment structure at the place of demolition.
The discharge channel is an open channel structure which conveys the cooling water from
the end of discharge culvert to Discharge Outlet (Outfall).
Discharge channel shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of intake channel
specified in Clause 10.3.11.3.

Revision 1
Page 49 of 247

PECC3

As for the crossing point of intake channel with the access roads, the Contractor shall
design and construct crossing bridges in compliance with relevant AASHTO standards.
Stainless steel ladders down to the lowest design level of water for discharge channel shall
be installed at the same location of the above bridges but alternately on the both insides of
the channel.
For the slope of soil works for the discharge channel, adequate slope protection specified
in Clause 10.5.4 shall be conducted.
10.3.11.9 Discharge outlet
discharge outlet. After completing this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for safety
of the revetment structure at the place of demolition.
The discharge outlet is a structure prepared at the end of the cooling water facilities and
discharges the cooling water into the sea.
The flow velocity of discharged water to the sea shall not be less than 2 m/s, and the
elevation of center line of the discharged water-flow to the sea shall not be higher than EL
-5.00 m.
The bottom elevation of the front area of the outfall shall be determined to keep the vertical
distance from the bottom of the discharged water-flow not less than 2 m. The bottom of the
front area shall be protected by armor stones. The amour stones shall have enough weight
tolerable to the wave force, weight each stones from 50-150 kg and armor stone 1 m. The
Contractor shall design the whole structure of outfall enough stable for the design wave
force specified in Clause 10.3.5.2.
10.3.12
Tank Foundations
10.3.12.1 Oil Storage Tank Foundations

Foundations for two (2) 3,500 kl heavy oil tanks shall be prepared. Foundations shall be
of structure which is sufficiently stable under tank loads. Foundation shall be of pile
supported reinforced concrete structure.
Asphalt sand or equivalent material shall be used to protect the bottom plate of tank from
corrosion. A drainage gutter shall be constructed around the tank.
10.3.12.2 Oil Retaining Wall

Revision 1
Page 50 of 247

PECC3

An oil retaining wall shall be constructed around the oil tank yard to prevent oil spill.
The space between the oil retaining wall and the tank, and the space between adjacent
tanks, shall be followed by the Vietnams standard: TCVN-5307 Petroleum Storages and
Petroleum Products Design Standard.
The oil retaining wall shall be reinforced concrete and its height shall be determined so that
the effective internal volume of the oil retaining wall is not less than 110% of the
maximum tank capacity.
In the design of oil retaining wall, the pressure of spilled oil applied on the wall surface
shall be considered as permanent load among various loads acting on the wall. Pressures
acting on the wall at the time of an oil spill are transient loads. Taking into account the
effects of impact, in the design of the wall such loads shall be treated as equally distributed
load of 2 t/m2 acting on the above-ground surface of the oil retaining wall. Seismic forces
and wind pressures shall also be considered.
Detailed wall construction:
(a) The wall thickness shall not be less than 0.25m.
(b) The reinforcing steel shall have minimum diameter of 13 mm for main
reinforcement.
(c) The oil retaining wall shall have an expansion joint inserted with a metallic oilstop at
about every 15-20 m. Adjacent concrete walls shall be connected with slip bars, etc.
In addition, a dummy joint inserted with a metallic oilstop shall be constructed
between the expansion joints.
(d) The foundation shall be provided with oil-stopping sheet piles or other means for
preventing oil spills if opening are anticipated between the foundation and ground
surface by settlement.
Gutters for draining rain water and a pit for collecting such rain water shall be constructed
on the inside the oil retaining wall. A drain pipe shall be installed between the collecting
pit and the outside of the retaining wall to discharge the rain water. A valve for opening
and closing the drain pipe shall be provided outside the retaining wall.
The oil retaining wall shall be provided with steps at every 30 m to permit passage on the
top of the oil retaining wall for patrolling, inspection and fire-fighting. Steps shall be
provided with handrails.
10.3.12.3 Water Storage Tank Foundations

Water Storage Tank foundations for the following water tanks shall be constructed:
- Raw Water Storage Tanks (10,000 m3) 2
- Raw Filtered Water Storage Tanks (5,000 m3) 2

Revision 1
Page 51 of 247

PECC3

De-mineralized Water Storage Tanks (2,000 m3) 2

Condensate Water Storage Tanks (300 m3) 2
Potable Water Head Tank (200 m3) 1
Other tanks
Water Storage Tank foundations shall be of pile supported reinforced concrete structure or
adequate soil improvement foundation for reinforced concrete.
10.3.13 Foundations for Water and Waste Water Treatment Systems

10.3.13.1
Concrete Tanks
Concrete Tanks listed in the following table shall be installed. Each concrete tank shall be
designed taking into account the external earth pressure, seismic load, internal and external
hydraulic pressures, thermal stresses due to hot waste water and loads of equipment
attached to the tank.
Inner surfaces of tank shall be coated with adequate material according to pH, temperature,
etc. of the waste water to protect concrete and to prevent corrosion of inner reinforcement.
The coating shall conform to the specifications given in Cause 10.5.16.
For areas above tanks which are used for passing or working, covers or galvanized grating
and handrails shall be provided.
10.3.13.2
Equipment Foundations
Foundations of waste water treatment equipments shall be constructed in accordance with

the Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
Whole area of waste water treatment system shall be paved with concrete and enclosed
wall to prevent waste water from leaking out.
List of Concrete Tank

Name
Number
Location
Air heater & ESP wash drain pit
ESP yard
Oily water pit
Power House
General waste water basin
- ditto -
Regeneration waste water pit
Waste Water Treatment Plant

Revision 1
Page 52 of 247

PECC3

Pre-retention tank
- ditto -
Retention tank
- ditto -
PH adjustment tank
- ditto -
Coagulation tank
- ditto -
Clarifier tank
- ditto -
Filter supply tank
- ditto -
Backwash waste water sump
- ditto -
Neutralization tank
- ditto -
Back wash water sump
- ditto -
Treated water tank
- ditto -
Sludge thickener
- ditto -
Oil separating basin
- ditto -
CPI outlet basin
- ditto -
Oil collecting pit
- ditto -
Sedimentation basin
Coal Storage Yard
PH adjustment tank
- ditto -
Coagulation tank
- ditto -
Clarifier tank
- ditto -
Treated water tank
- ditto -
Other necessary pits/tanks

(as may be required)
Number
Filtered Water Tank
Other necessary pits/tanks
Location
Water Tank Yard
(as may be required)
Note: Capacities of the above facilities shall be determined by the Contractor according to
Part 4 Section 5.
10.3.14 Site Catchment Drainage System
The project Site is located at foothill of nearby mountains in the south, and partly at
cultivated field. The plant areas comprise of 50.18 ha within the plant boundary, however
the leveling area is about 17.99 ha (included 6.19ha onshore area and 11.8ha polder area)
because a part of was leveled by other Party in other project. Details are referred to the
related drawing in this RFP. As the site topography gently slopes towards the sea at the
port side, drainage trench system shall be constructed of concrete storm water drainage
Revision 1
Page 53 of 247

PECC3

channel design, with the adequate slope along the plant boundary and discharged directly
to the sea. The drainage trench at the north collects water and route to the sea. It should be
designed to prevent direct sea waves from damaging the drainage trench at peak tidal
condition.
Waste, Drain and Vent Pipe and Fittings within buildings shall be uPVC pipe to advantage
for ease installation work, reducing of pipe load, and resistance of corrosion.
PE pipe shall be used for potable water line.
10.3.15
Stack
The Stack shall consist of the following structures/facilities:

- Reinforced concrete foundation and piles
- Reinforced concrete outer shell
- Steel inner flues with lining and insulation
- Aviation obstruction lights
- Elevator
- Lightning protection system
- Miscellaneous steel works such as platform, stair, ladder etc.
- Interior lighting system
- Water supply and drainage system
The chimney wind-shield must be designed to the applicable Vietnamese laws, codes,
standards and regulations. A dynamic analysis and design for wind vortex excitation,
period and resonant response must be performed and a dynamic analysis of the chimney
for seismic excitation must be submitted for Owners review.
Concrete chimney must comply with CICIND Model Code for Concrete Chimneys or
equivalent and ACI 307 Cast-in-place concrete chimneys or equivalent.
The design must take account of any special dynamic loading or movement effects, such as
vortex shedding and wake buffeting, arising from the proximity of other chimneys or
nearby tall structures.
Individual steel flue stack must be provided inside the chimney wind-shield for each Unit.
The chimney (wind-shield and the two steel flue stacks) must include thermal and
corrosion protection to ensure that no maintenance is required over the operational life of
the Plant. The flue gas emission point must be at least 190 metres above the Plant grade
level.
Lightning protection must be provided appropriate to the configuration and location of the
Plant. Lighting for aircraft warning shall also be provided.
Both the wind-shield and the steel flue stacks must have a design life of not less than 30
years performing their duties under all working environment.
Platforms and provisions for sampling and monitoring flue gases must be provided. Other
provisions must include access staircases to various platform levels, aircraft warning lights,
aviation safety painting, lightning protection, reference monitoring the long-term

Revision 1
Page 54 of 247

PECC3

inclination changes and settlements. Provision of power and lighting services must be
provided.
The steel flue liner may be top or bottom supported and shall be supported horizontally at
the top and intermediate levels This transition ducting must be suitably profiled from a
rectangular shape at the chimney inlet to a circular shape up inside the chimney where it
must be connected to the suspended circular steel liners through suitable (non-metallic)
fluro elastomeric fabric expansion joints. These joints must be a single component or
multi-layered construction capable of withstanding the worst flue gas conditions. One such
spare joint must also be supplied. Transition ducting must also be thermally insulated.
Platform must be of structural steel construction.
The chimney roof must however, comprise of a reinforced concrete slab supported over a
grid of structural steel beams.
The Contractor shall provide ladder from ground floor to roof floor along with an elevator.
Suitable embedments must be retained in the shell wall for this purpose.
The flooring panels of the platforms and risers of the hanger must be of grating
construction. Handrails of platforms and hanger must be of tubular construction.
Welding on handrails must be minimized. Where this is necessary, they must be smoothed
to avoid personnel injury.
The top external portion of the wind shield must be painted from 50m to top in band of
signal red and white color. And the top 10m of the shell shall be painted with acid resistant
paint and meet the aviation safety requirement. The mini-shell and the top few metres of
the internal surface of the windshield must be painted for acid and heat protection with
bituminous paint.
Normal and emergency AC power supply for chimney must be derived from main plant
power supply system. Emergency supply must feed 20% of platform lighting, 50% of
staircase lighting, aviation obstruction lighting and elevator load. All other loads must be
connected on normal power supply.
Ambient temperature for design of all equipment must be considered as 60 deg. C which is
likely to be encountered inside the chimney.
Aviation obstruction lighting system must conform to the requirements of the latest
applicable rules of Vietnamese regulations or approved equipvalent. The type of
obstruction lighting system must be of high intensity aviation obstruction lights. The lights
must be of automatic rotary type; each set of lights consists of at least 6 lamp bulbs. Upon
failure of one lamp bulb, the second lamp bulb must rotate to the position and take over the
duty of the failed lamp bulb. During construction stage, temporary lighting must be
provided.
Suitable lightning protection system must be all along chimney height and connected
to the main Plant earthing system. Above ground level, earthing and lightning protection
system must comprise of galvanised steel strips. These materials provided at top 12
metres must have additional coating of 2 mm thick seamless lead cover or it must be of
stainless steel to take care of corrosion.
Communication system comprising of telephone socket at every internal platform level
and at grade level, necessary wiring installation, a telephone hand set, junction
boxes, etc. must also be provided.

Revision 1
Page 55 of 247

PECC3

The detailed specification for the stack shall be referred to Clause 10.5.18 of this
document.
10.3.16 Roads, Internal Drainage System and Fences
10.3.16.1 Internal Road
The materials selected for road construction must not be deleterious and must be of
adequate strength and durability to meet the design requirements for the whole of the
design life.
The road pavements must be designed for a maintenance-free life and must provide a level
of service which must be free from significant cracking or rutting. Roads and access ways
must be designed to carry a minimum level of traffic of 150 of the heaviest laden
commercial vehicles per day and must also be capable of carrying all abnormal
construction traffic, operational traffic and heavy maintenance traffic.
Road alignment must allow for any construction, equipment delivery and abnormal loads
or heavy maintenance requirements and must be designed to acceptable standards as stated
in the basis of design. At the point that road crosses the trench, the trench must be designed
in consideration of the maximum vehicle load using the road.
All areas which may be used for chemical, oil or other unloading must have a pavement
material capable of withstanding the likely exposure to chemicals or oil without significant
deterioration during operational life.
Car and vehicle parking areas must be laid to falls and be kept well drained.
Depending on the ease of access and equipment transportation, roads must be designed to
minimum sizes as follows:
Main road: 7m width;
Minor road: 4m width;
Side walk: 1m width
The designed load must not be less than HL93 load level of Vietnamese standard or
AASHTO HS-20 semi-truck loading with impact added.
The plant roads must connect and reach to every functional area. In addition, there are ring
roads arranged surrounding the station boundary, the main power house, the coal storage
yard, the oil tank area etc.
There must be a large hardening field arranged in front of both the production services
building and the central control building which can act as temporary parking lots.
The Contractor can propose concrete pavement as a solution for road. The surfacing
concrete shall be mixed, transported, placed& reinforced in accordance with relevant
specification. The concrete pavement shall have finished thickness of not less than 150
mm and the surface shall be screened and finished to the specified falls and grades. The
gravel pavement shall be spread, leveled and compacted to a finished thickness of not less
than 150 mm.
The design load, radius of curvature, gradient and other criteria for roads to transport heavy
equipment, including generators, power transformers and pressure vessels, shall be
determined by taking into consideration the methods of transportation and weight of
equipment.

Revision 1
Page 56 of 247

PECC3

10.3.16.4 Internal Drainage System

Storm water collection sumps and associated piping must be provided along the roads for
drainage services.
The Contractor shall design drainage system of main power plant area taking into
consideration of the treatment of rainfall.
The rainwater possibly contaminated with oil by operation & maintenance, based on the
structure/function of the power plant facilities designed by the Contractor, shall be
collected into oil separation pits and then discharged into the sea or discharge channel,
through drain ditch or pipes. Other rainwater can be discharged into discharge channel or
sea directly through drain ditch or pipes
Design intensity of rainfall shall be maximum rainfall rate per day provided in Part 4
Section 1.
10.3.16.5
Fences
Site Boundary fences shall be constructed of 2.7 m high brick with an extension on top
which shall be 0.6m high with galvanized tubular posts, bent outwards at 45deg. at the top
and to which four lines of bent over barbed wires are fixed.
These fences shall be designed as man-proof fences and shall be able to withstand the
design wind forces and others. The brick fence shall be built on reinforced concrete
footings and in the design of the fence and footing, joints shall be provided to allow the
differential settlement and thermal movement.
The brick portion of the fence shall be mortar finished with paint. The bricks shall have
lateral ties to joint the brick leaves together. The tubular post shall be embedded in
concrete cast on the brick wall. The exposed end of the posts shall be capped. Bent over
barbed wire shall be 2.5 mm diameter aluminum or galvanized steel.
Site Boundary fences shall include two kinds:
Type 1: boundary fences between VT3 and VT4 shall be made of galvanized steel
frame with B40 wire meshing.
Type 2: remaining boundary fences shall be constructed of reinforced concrete
frame, brick wall from ground to 0.6m and galvanized tubular posts from 0.6m to
3.0m, at the top of column shall be bent outwards at 45deg.
10.3.16.6 Gates
Gates shall be provided at entrances to the site and shall be constructed of stainless tubular
pipe framework, suitable braced and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. The gates shall be
2.6 m high and electrical automatic operation type. Width of gates shall be as required with
two sections used for wider openings. The fences and gates shall be plumb, true to lines
and levels and complete in all details.
10.3.17
Ancillary and Auxiliary Buildings
10.3.17.1 General Description

Revision 1
Page 57 of 247

PECC3

Refer to the appropriate Bid drawings as follows:

- Main Gate House & fence
- Guard House
- Watch tower
- Ash silo aerating fan house
- ESP Control building
- Control building for water treatment plan;
- Coal Handling Control House
- Coal Handling sluicing pump house
- Coal Yard Dry Storage Shed
- Coal sampling house
- Coal crusher house
- CW chlorination room
- Cooling water pump station
- Oil Pump House
- Bulldozer Garage
- Fire fighting pump station
- Air compressor house
Ancillary and auxiliary buildings shall be designed in accordance with local regulations
and design requirements and shall subject to the approval of the Owner.
Except noted otherwise, all superstructures shall also be the Contractor's standard design.
In case additional buildings other than those listed in the tables will be required for the
proper and efficient operation and maintenance of the power plant, such buildings shall be
designed and constructed by the Contractor without any additional cost to the Purchaser.
Ancillary and auxiliary buildings are to be designed in accordance with the Specification
drawings. The Contractor shall, however, provide buildings which, while preserving the
same general standards, are adapted to suit plant and machinery to be installed, their
operation and maintenance, and spaces for staff and labour envisaged for the type of plant
proposed.
The dimensions of all buildings shall be such as to provide space for access to all parts,
together with adequate circulation areas consistent with the optimum efficiency of
operation. The minimum clearance for undisturbed passage shall be H/W = 2.0/0.8 m.
The buildings must be designed and constructed so that there are safe means of personnel
escape during emergency e.g. fire to a place of safety at all times. Equipment location and
arrangement must ensure that not less than two escape routes are available for personnel in
case of fire or other hazard during operation and maintenance.
The maximum travel distance for personnel where there is a normal fire risk must comply
with Vietnamese regulations.
Revision 1
Page 58 of 247

PECC3

All floors, walls or other structural elements which provide a fire compartment or barrier
function must have an appropriate design fire resistance. The Contractor must ensure that
all services ducts, cables etc. which are required to penetrate such fire protection walls
must be sealed with appropriate fire barriers, dampers etc. after installation as to give an
equivalent fire rating not less that of the wall.
10.3.17.2 Architectural Features
Architectural features of all ancillary and auxiliary buildings such as finishing schedule,
colors, shape of roof, etc. shall be standardized. Reference shall be made to those
indicated relevant Specification Drawings.
All multi-storey buildings and platform arrangements shall be provided with stairways and
landings, with handrailing, either in reinforced concrete or structural steel with open steel
gratings such that access is provided to all levels. The type of construction chosen shall be
as specified where particular requirements are given, or that type which is consistent with
the building construction medium and type of access required for the efficient operation
and maintenance of the plant.
All enclosed areas shall be provided with adequate doors giving access to stairways and
platforms. Unless otherwise specified, the doors and frames shall be of galvanised mild
steel and shall be dimensioned so as to allow the passage of plant and machinery or
personnel as appropriate to their particular location. It must be possible to obtain clear
access for the extraction of the largest indivisible component of the equipment housed in
any buildings. Doors for electrical rooms and transformer cells shall enable unhindered
escape and be in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Roofed building shall have water-proof roofs either in reinforced concrete with an effective
water-proofing treatment or rendering asphalt or similar, or, in the case of steel structures,
in metal roof cladding. The roof design shall allow for appropriate provision (overlaps,
fittings and the like) against the local weather stress by rain and wind and damage from
salt. The inclination of roofs shall be such that weatherproofing is obtained.
Concrete roofs shall have kerbs at the edges with drainage outlets and discharge pipes or
channels projecting outside the building line and so arranged that the water run-off is
directed away from structural foundations. Bitumen asphalt water-proof layers shall be
placed on the kerbs.
The number of rows in any particular building shall be such that all floors are adequately
daylighted. Buildings enclosed in reinforced concrete or hollow concrete brickwork shall
be daylighting by metal framed windows or glass blocks.
Unless otherwise specified, buildings which are enclosed shall be provided with natural
ventilation by fixed metal louvers at eaves level and at floor levels to provide adequate
ventilation, considering also the arrangement of intermediate floors. Combination

Revision 1
Page 59 of 247

PECC3

ventilation/day lighting louvers in the form of adjustable glass louvers for the plant
building shall not be permitted.
All reinforced concrete structures and slabs shall have adequate provision for thermal
expansion. The materials used have to be in conformity with the environmental conditions
and have to guarantee good function and durability of the joints.
Throughout the project, all necessary structural steel or reinforced concrete supporting
structures for Mechanical and Electrical Equipments, and all necessary cable trays and
supports, pipe hangers, cleats, and the like shall be provided together with ducts in
concrete structures for individual cable and pipe runs.
10.3.17.3 Building Facilities

10.3.17.3.1
Miscellaneous Power and Lighting system
Building design shall cover the Miscellaneous Power and Lighting system as specified in
Part 4 Section 1 and Section 7. Lighting levels shall be referred to Part 4 Section 1.

Revision 1
Page 60 of 247

PECC3
10.3.17.3.2

Air Conditioning and Ventilation System
The said system shall be provided at the following rooms.
Building Name
Fire
fighting
station
Air-conditioning
pump -
Pressurized
Ventilation
Ventilation
Pump room
Water
supply
Watch tower
Guard House
Office
Bed room
Meal room
Changing room
Toilet
ESP Control building
Office
Control room
Toilet
Electrical
Equip. room
Control building for Control room

water treatment plan;
Toilet
Electrical
Switch room
Coal Handling Control Office

Tools room
House
Control room
Toilet
Control equip.
room
Waiting room
Equipment
inspection and
repair room
Electrical
Switch room
Coal Handling sluicing pump house
Pump room
Electrical
Equip. room
Coal Yard Dry Storage Shed
Air compressor house
Control room
Electrical
Equip. room
CW chlorination room
Pump room
Electrical
Equip. room
Cooling
station
water
pump Control room

Revision 1
Page 61 of 247

PECC3

Coal crusher house
Control room
Toilet
Electrical
Equip. room
Coal sampling house
Control room
Electrical
Equip. room
Oil Pump House
Pump room
Bulldozer Garage
Waiting room Oil room

and observation
room
Ash silo aerating fan Control room

house
-
Machine room
Electrical
Equip. room
Electrical
Equip. room
Water supply; If marked , water supply and drainage system equipment and all
fittings shall be installed.
Centralized air-conditioning system shall be furnished for the Coal Handling Control
Building. Individual packaged systems shall be furnished for each room of remaining
areas requiring air conditioning. The above system shall be designed to maintain 17-23C
room temperature and 50 5% relative humidity.
The ventilation system shall be provided adequately to above each room to ensure the
room is kept acceptable temperature level for the equipment, facilities, etc and not exceed
40 C.
The pressurized ventilation system shall be provided with filtered and pressurized level
shall be not less than + 10 mmAq.
10.3.17.3.3
Water Supply and Drainage System
Water supply and drainage system including fixtures shall be provided at all necessary
places. Hot water supply using electric heater for meal room and shower must also be
provided.
10.3.17.3.4
Sanitary and Sewage System
Adequate number of water closets, urinals lavatories shall be provided in the toilets.
Sewage from water closets and urinals shall flow through separate sewage system having
adequate capacity and shall be led into the septic tank installed outdoor.
The capacity and structure of the septic tanks shall conform to local regulations, The tank
shall be of reinforced concrete and installed underground. Both digestion chamber and
Revision 1
Page 62 of 247

PECC3

leaching chamber shall have reinforced concrete wall, top slab and bottom slab. Manholes
shall be provided for each chamber for periodic maintenance and inspection
10.3.17.4 Cranes and Hoists

The said facilities shall be provided as specified in Clause 4.2.11of Part 4 section 2.
Building structural design shall take into consideration design conditions for cranes/hoists
as specified in Part 4 section 2 to Part 4 section 12.
10.3.17.5 Communication System

Building design shall cover the communication System as specified in Part 4 section 7.
10.3.17.6 Fire Protection Systems

Building design shall cover the fire Protection System as specified in Part 4 section 2.
10.3.17.7 Lightning Protection System
Building design shall cover the lightning Protection System as specified in Part 4 section 1
and Part 4 section 7.
10.3.17.8 Floor and Wall Finish
Floor finishes in industrial areas must be designed to withstand vehicular and pedestrian
traffic, wash down and/or chemical exposure without flaking, dusting or excessive
cracking.
Electrical Buildings
Exterior Wall: Masonry and paint orsand-lime brick

Interior Finishes:
Cable Spread room

Floor : chipping Paving
Wall : chain link Fence
Ceiling : Injection type insulation w/protective coating
MV/LV SWGR room

Floor : epoxy paint

Revision 1
Page 63 of 247

PECC3

TR room
Floor : epoxy paint
Stair(exterior)
Floor : epoxy paint
Ceiling : Acrylic paint
Stair(interior)
Corridor(interior)
Safe AC & DC system room

Floor : epoxy paint
Protection relay room

Floor : epoxy paint
HVAC room
Floor : epoxy paint
Battery room
Floor : chemical resistant paint
Wall : chemical resistant paint
Toilet
Office
Floor : vinyl Tile
Ceiling : suspended false ceiling
Gate House
Revision 1
Page 64 of 247

PECC3

Exterior Wall: Masonry paint or sand-lime brick with Owners logo and name
Interior Finishes:
Office
Floor : vinyl Tile
Ceiling : suspended false ceiling panels
Toilet
10.3.18
Auxiliary Equipment Foundation
These foundations consist of auxiliary equipment foundations such as boiler, switchyard,

transformer, F.D.F, P.A.F, I.D.F, E.S.P, bottom ash hopper, ash storage silo, etc. as
enumerated in Clause 10.1.2 of this document.
All foundations and auxiliaries shall be designed as per mechanical/electrical requirement.
Pits shall be provided for each unit, and the capacity of the pit shall be calculated by taking
into consideration with inlet flow and the economic number of pump operations per day.
Adequate lining material shall be provided at internal surface of the pit according to quality
of water. The detailed design and drawing shall be approved by the Owner.
Gravity settler shall be provided for each unit, and the capacity/specification shall be
determined in accordance with the requirements specified in Part section 3.
10.3.19
Miscellaneous Facilities
(a)Pipe/Cable Rack Foundations

Pipe/cable rack foundations shall be designed based on the loading of superstructure. Piled
foundation may be required depending on soil condition, to prevent from differential
settlements between supports.
(b) Fence and firewall to electrical equipment
Fences to transformer compounds and other electrical areas must be galvanised steel
palisade type of minimum height 2.4 metres.
Fire walls as per NFPA850 or equivalent standard must be provided for generator
transformer and start up transformer.
(c)Landscaping
Revision 1
Page 65 of 247

PECC3

The Contractor must reserve sufficient space in the Site and provide the landscaping.
Minimum maintenance approach must be adopted. The concept must be to create an
environment within the Facility that is easily sustainable with a minimum of maintenance
(i.e. requiring minimum application of fertilizers, watering etc.)
Landscaping (grasses, shrubs, plants and trees) areas shall be not less than 10% total area
of Vinh Tan 4 power plant.
The Contractor must provide suitable hydrant systems for watering.
10.3.20
Others
(a) Cable and Pipe Trench

All cable trench, pipe trench and pits shall be provided with drainage facility to keep them
free from water. Trenches and ducts shall be sloped to permit gravity drainage, where
possible, into the normal site drains. Where drainage by gravity is not possible, the
particular trench, duct or pit shall be provided with drainage sump(s) and sump pumps.
Sump pumps shall be complete in all aspects including discharge piping which shall
terminate at a location approved by the Owner. Two (2) nos. sump pumps with 100% duty
each shall be permanently installed at each sump location and each pump designed to
empty the trench. The sump pump operation shall be controlled automatically from the
water level in the sump.
At the Point that road crosses the trench, the trench shall be designed in consideration of
the machinery load.
(b) Lighting for external facilities

Lighting system for external facilities shall be provided, but not limited to transformer
compound, EHV switchyard, site roads and jetty, etc. Illumination levels shall be satisfied
the requirements specified in Part 4 Section 1.
(c) Footbathes
Footbaths shall be installed in Power House, Coal Unloading Control Building, Coal
Handling Control Building. Each footbath shall be provided with feed water, drainage
equipment and air spray to washing shoes.
(d) Stationary flagstaffs
The Contractor shall construct three stationary flagstaffs including foundations, ropes,
handle and other all fittings for ceremony. The flagstaffs shall be SUS304 and its height
shall be 6.0m or more.
(e) Signs
The Contractor shall provide three (3) nos. of signs on which the Plant Name and the
Owner's name are printed and establish them in main gate, Power House. And the
Contractor shall provide information sign of Plant layout. The information sign shall be
fixed on the stationary structure.
Revision 1
Page 66 of 247

PECC3

The Contractor shall prepare and submit the documents and drawings of all signs to the
Owner for approval.
(f) Blinds
The Contractor shall provide blinds which include blind boxes and rails for all windows,
which person can reach, in the rooms.
(g) Room name tag
The Contractor shall provide aluminum room name tags for all rooms.
(h) Station Point for Surveying
The Contractor shall install at least three (3) station points for surveying inside the main
power plant area which have the information of coordinates (National coordinates in
Vietnam, VN2000) and elevation (Hon Dau National altitudes, HN-72). The Contractor
shall prepare the station points at the beginning of the whole construction of the power
plant facilities. The station points will be used by the Contractor for construction and by
the Owner for his acceptance inspection. The station points shall be adequately stable for
the purposes.
10.3.21
Furniture/Office Equipment
Furniture and office equipment shall be provided as specified in Part 4 Section 12.

Revision 1
Page 67 of 247

PECC3
10.4
10.4.1

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

General
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor,
tools and equipment necessary for the execution of the Facilities. The Contractor shall not
employ anyone unfit or anyone not skilled in the Facilities assigned to him. The
employment of labor much be conform to Labors Law of RSV.
10.4.2
Quality
All materials used in the Facilities shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds as
specified herein, obtained from sources and/or suppliers approved by the Owner, and shall
comply strictly with the tests prescribed hereinafter, or where tests are not laid down in
these Specifications, with the requirements of the latest issue of the relevant Standards
specified herein or other Standards approved by the Owner.
The strength, quality and suitability of all materials shall meet the Technical Specifications
and/or be to the satisfaction of the Owner. Any material rejected by the Owner shall be
removed immediately from the Site and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost.
10.4.3
Inspection and Testing
All materials used in the Facilities shall be subject to inspection and testing as provided in
the Contract and elsewhere in these Specifications. Unless otherwise stated, the costs of all
tests required in these Specifications or approved Standards shall be deemed to be included
in his bid.
10.4.4
Approval and Certification of Materials
No materials shall be used in the Facilities unless they have first been approved by the
Owner.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner signed certificates from manufacturer or sole
distributor of equipment and materials to be furnished and installed by the Contractor,
certifying as to the kind, quality, rated capacity, quantity, performance and other
descriptions of the equipment and materials delivered under a receipt number and date.
No equipment or materials shall be erected, installed or applied such as electrical fixtures
and accessories, paint and varnish, equipment and accessories, cement and reinforcing
steel, concrete, G.I. and C.I. pipes, valves and fittings, plumbing and sanitary fixtures,
building materials and finishes, paint and waterproofing, etc., without the required
Revision 1
Page 68 of 247

PECC3

certificates.
10.4.5 Submission of Samples

As to the materials enumerated in Clause 10.4.4, "Approval and Certification of
Materials", The Contractor shall identify the proposed manufacturer complete with detailed
information and submit reasonable size of samples of same with detailed information to the
Owner for approval at least two (2) weeks before their actual installation or application.
He shall arrange for a visit by the Owner for inspection of the manufacturing facilities and
to obtain samples as deemed necessary by the Owner/ during the visits.
For materials other than those agreed, certificates and manufacturer catalogues will be
considered acceptable.
Failure to approve in time by the Owner due to failure of the Contractor to submit as herein
above stipulated shall not entitle the Contractor any extension of time nor any claim
whatsoever for any delay in the work.
To avoid unnecessary delay, it is suggested that orders and/or purchase of imported or
local materials shall be made within a sufficient period in order that adequate supply is
available at any time when needed.
10.4.6
Substitution of Materials
The Contractor shall submit a written request for substitution of materials in lieu of those
specified when deemed very necessary and urgent. Such request shall indicate the reasons
for substitution. No substitute material shall be used without written authorization from
the Owner.
In case of approved substitution of an inferior kind of material, a reduction in the contract
price equal to the difference in cost of the two kinds of materials shall be made. Market
prices at the provincial capital or at a commercial center agreed upon by the Owner and the
Contractor on the date upon which authority for substitution is granted shall be the basis of
said price reduction. Price differentials shall be determined and agreed upon immediately
by both parties and incorporated in the approved letter of substitution.
The Contractor shall submit written request for substitution at least one (1) month before
such materials are actually needed. Such request shall be accompanied by samples to be
substituted and corresponding certification as required in Clause 10.4.4 "Approval and
Certification of Materials".
10.4.7
Independent Test and Analysis
Notwithstanding the production of manufacturer's test certificates, independent tests and

analysis on representative samples of materials may be made from time to time by a
Revision 1
Page 69 of 247

PECC3

Testing House, Laboratory or Analyst approved by the Owner in order to check the
reliability of the manufacturer's works test data. Materials found to be unsatisfactory shall
be rejected. The cost of such tests and analysis, made at Site or elsewhere, on materials
which are subsequently found to be unsatisfactory shall be borne by the Contractor.
10.4.8
Workmanship
The quality and suitability of the workmanship provided by the Contractor shall be in
accordance with first class practice and to the entire satisfaction of the Owner. Owner's
inspection of the workmanship shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation with
respect to the sufficiency of the workmanship by reason of no objection having been made
during the construction. Any work not entirely conforming to the requirements of the Bid
Drawings and Specifications will be rejected. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for
the demolition and reconstruction of any rejected works, including the provision of all
necessary materials at his own expense.

Revision 1
Page 70 of 247

PECC3
10.5
10.5.1

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
Earthworks
10.5.1.1 General
The Contractor shall carry out all earthworks, including site clearance, topsoil stripping,
grading, excavation, reclamation, storage of selected material for re-use, disposal of spoil
material, backfill to foundation excavations, fill for roadways, fill and excavation with the
Specifications, Bid Drawings and Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
10.5.1.2 Site Clearance

Before the commencement of any excavation or placing of fill material, the Contractor
shall remove all unnecessary existing structures, trees, shrubs and other obstacles from the
site of the works and dispose them by incinerating or by other adequate measures approved
by the Owner at a location or by the measures directed by the Owner.
10.5.1.3 Removal of Organic Material

After the site has been cleared as specified in Clause 10.5.1.2, all topsoil and organic
material shall be removed from the surface to a depth of 0.30 m and disposed of, or stored
for re-use, as directed by the Owner.
10.5.1.4 Excavation
10.5.1.4.1 General
Before the commencement of any excavation, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and
the existing ground profile shall be measured and agreed with the Owner.
All excavations shall be made in accordance with the lines and levels shown on the Bid
Drawings and the Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner to suit the actual
soil conditions encountered.
10.5.1.4.2 Classification of Excavated Material
Rock: Rock shall be considered as a solid block of material having a resistance and
structure which cannot be removed, demolished and crushed without using explosives and
breaking hammers.
Revision 1
Page 71 of 247

PECC3

Common: Common shall be considered any material except rock as specified in the
preceding paragraph, including earth, sand, gravel, conglomerates, loose pieces of solid
rock and soft or disintegrated rocks.
The Contractor shall apply to all excavated materials, regardless of their nature, and must
take into account in his Bid.
10.5.1.4.3 Side Slopes and Working Space
The lines and levels specified on the drawings are related solely to the requirements of the
permanent works. The Contractor must make all necessary allowance for such additional
excavation as he may be required for working space and for side slopes which are
sufficiently shallow to ensure the stability of the excavations.
10.5.1.4.4 Over-Excavation
All over-excavation performed by the Contractor, for whatever reason, shall be refilled
with selected backfill materials as specified, subject to the approval of the Owner at the
Contractor's own expense.
10.5.1.4.5 Drainage and Dewatering
The Contractor shall keep all excavations free from water. The Contractor shall provide
and maintain, at all times during construction, ample means and devices with which to
promptly remove and dispose of all water from whatever source entering the excavations
or other parts of the works and shall dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations
and the preservation of the final lines and grades of bottoms and slopes of excavations.
The Contractor shall provide the temporary cut off wall using steel sheet piles to avoid the
large volume ground water seepage to the excavated area.
10.5.1.4.6
Foundation Level
The foundation levels indicated on the drawings are subject to modification, where
necessary and as directed by the Owner, to suit the actual soil conditions encountered and
the Contractor shall make due allowance for this in his bid price for excavation.
The Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately on completion of every excavation and
obtain his approval of the foundation layer before any concrete or other material is placed
thereon. If any portion of an approved foundation is subsequently disturbed or loosened by
careless operations of the Contractor, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, remove all
defective material until a sound level is reached and shall replace it with concrete, or other
approved compacted material, to the previously approved foundation level.

Revision 1
Page 72 of 247

PECC3

10.5.1.4.7 Temporary Supports

The Contractor may, at his discretion and at his own cost, elect to use temporary supports
such as timber shoring or sheet piling for the sides of excavations instead of natural slopes.
In this event, he shall submit detailed calculations and drawings for the prior approval of
the Owner, but such approval shall not relieve him from full responsibility for the
adequacy of the temporary supports.
Where the use of natural slopes to excavations would endanger existing structures or other
installations, or would interfere with the operations of other contractor or encroach on his
working area, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide temporary supports to the sides
of his excavation as specified above. Should the Owner consider the removal of these
temporary supports to be impractical, he may direct that they be left permanently in place,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
10.5.1.4.8 Stockpiling of Excavated Material for Re-Use
Where, in the opinion of the Owner, excavated material is suitable for use elsewhere as fill
or backfill, the Contractor shall segregate, transport and stockpile such material at a
location approved by the Owner.
10.5.1.4.9 Disposal of Spoil Materials
Unless specified or directed otherwise, all excavated material shall be transported and
deposited to spoil areas in the locations designated by the Owner. No spoil material shall
be dumped in the river or the sea.
Spoil materials shall be deposited and compacted and the slopes shall be trimmed with
gradient of not more than 1:2, so as to ensure that spoil heaps are stable.
10.5.1.5 Fill and Backfill

10.5.1.5.1 General
This specification covers the performance of all fill and backfill works.
No filling or backfilling shall commence until the Owner has inspected and approved the
surface upon which it is to be placed.
Where the sub-grade has been softened, eroded or otherwise damaged, all damaged areas
shall be removed and replaced.

Revision 1
Page 73 of 247

PECC3

10.5.1.5.2 Materials
Fill material and backfill material for foundation excavations shall consist of well graded
soil, free of loam, roots, organic matter or other deleterious material and shall be selected
from the excavations or from approved soil collection area, as directed by the Owner.
Backfill along pipe trenches and embedded pipes shall be selected well compactable soil
materials, free from roots, stones or debris.
10.5.1.5.3 Placing
Fill materials shall be placed and spread in uniform horizontal layers across the full area of
the foundation without segregation. The thickness of each layer before compaction shall
not exceed 150 mm.
Fill in areas not intended to receive concrete foundations shall be placed and spread in
uniform layers not exceeding 300 mm before compaction.
10.5.1.5.4 Compaction
The type, size and efficiency of compaction equipment shall be subject to the Owner's
approval and shall be capable of achieving the specified degree of compaction.
The type, size and efficiency of compaction equipment shall be subject to the
Employer/Engineers approval and shall be capable of achieving the specified degree of
compaction. Minimum fill compaction will be as follows
Area to be Compacted
(%)
Structural Fills
90
Upper 3m of fills supporting structures
95 (See Note 1)
Roads
95-100
Notes :
1)Structures include items such as plant equipment, buildings, switchyard equipment,
tanks, walls, retaining walls, and any other structures or equipment that are sensitive to
settlement.
Extreme care shall be taken when compacting material for the foundations of structures
and around the structures, pipes and other installations and, in such cases, the Owner may
direct the use of special methods and equipment.
10.5.1.5.5 Moisture Control

Revision 1
Page 74 of 247

PECC3

Adjustment of moisture content of fill or backfill by the addition of water after it has been
spread shall be done by a sprinkling method subject to the approval of the Owner, when it
is required.
10.5.1.5.6 Quality Control
The Owner will select samples of un-compacted materials and samples of compacted fill
and backfill for field and laboratory tests to determine whether they meet the specified
requirements. Such samples shall be provided and cost of tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Tests for un-compacted materials shall be in accordance with JIS A1210 or equivalent
method and tests for compacted materials shall be in accordance with JIS A1214 or
equivalent method. Each test shall be executed every 10,000 m3 according to the
instruction of the Owner.
Where fill or backfill does not have the specified density, the Owner may direct remedial
measures including additional compaction and the adjustment of moisture content or the
reduction of thickness of layers of material.
10.5.1.6 Cobble Stone
Cobble stones shall be hard, dense, durable natural stones or crushed stones of diameter not
less than 8 cm, and not more than 15 cm or not more than one-half the cobble stone
foundation thickness. Cobble stones shall be suitably mixed with various sizes according
to the above.
Filling-up stones shall be of the same material as the cobble stones but of diameter not
more than 4 cm.
The Contractor shall add filling-up stones to cobble stones and thoroughly compact the
material with equipment such as rammers finishing to the thickness in accordance with the
Construction Drawings.
10.5.1.7 Embankment
10.5.1.7.1 Scope
This section covers the performance of all works in connection with construction of the
embankment.
10.5.1.7.2 General

Revision 1
Page 75 of 247

PECC3

(1)
Works covered by this Section

The works covered by this section will include, but not be limited to, the excavation,
processing, stockpiling, transport, foundation preparation, spreading, moisture
conditioning, compaction, testing and maintenance of all fill materials.
(2)
Definitions of Embankment Materials

For the purpose of these Specifications, materials of embankment construction are
defined as follows:
Clay
Plastic soil which passes a United States Standard No. 200 sieve;
Sand
Natural occurring granular material which passes a United States
Standard No. 4 sieve and is retained on a No. 200 sieve;
Gravel
Natural occurring granular material not greater than 75 mm (3") in
maximum dimensions, and retained on a United States Standard
No.4 sieve;
Crushed Rock Pieces of rock which are not greater than 75 mm (3") in maximum
dimension, and are retained on a United States Standard No.4
sieve.
10.5.1.7.3 Construction Equipment

The Contractor shall prepare and submit for the approval of the Owner the detailed method
of embankment construction including the equipment, the construction sequences, the
outputs and any other data of the equipment required, at least thirty (30) days before
beginning filling operations of each section of work.
10.5.1.7.4 Embankment
(1)
Lines, Grades and Dimensions

Embankment shall be constructed in accordance with the alignments, slopes and
cross sections shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
The term "embankment" as used in this subclause is defined as the earthfill portion.
Compacted embankment included all fill deposited in layers and consolidated by
rolling or tamping.
The embankments shall be carried out so that some variations in dimension,
alignment and grades of any finished surface from the dimensions locations and
grades as shown on the Drawings, or directed by the Owner shall be within the
tolerances specified in the following table.
Description
a. Top level of the embankment

Revision 1
Tolerance in centimeters
+5
-0
Page 76 of 247

PECC3
b. Embankment slope
(perpendicular to slope)

+2
-5
The Owner may require that the Contractor remedy or remove at his own expense,
any material that exceeds the limits above specified.
The Contractor shall remove embankment material placed outside the prescribed
profiles if so directed by the Owner.
The Contractor shall remove from the embankment any material which in the
opinion of the Owner is unsuitable, and shall transport it to a prescribed disposal area
as instructed.
(2)
Material
Material for embankment can be clay, silt, sand, sand and gravel and rock fragment
with reasonably well graded or mixture. The material shall be free from mud, roots
or any other unsuitable organic material.
10.5.1.7.5
Sources of Fill Material
Material for compacted fill in the embankment shall be obtained from the excavation
surplus and/or from material collection areas and borrow areas where shall be approved by
the Owner.
Prior to commencing embankment work, the Contractor shall submit detail information for
candidate borrow areas and material collection area, material collecting method,
transportation method, quantity and quality of material, etc. to the Owner for approval.
10.5.1.7.6 Excavating, Processing and Moisture Conditioning of Fill Materials
(1)
General
The Contractor shall excavate, process and moisture condition embankment fill
materials so that, prior to hauling to placement areas, they meet the requirement set
forth in subclauses in this clause.
Fill material which has become segregated to the judgement of the Owner shall not
be incorporated into the permanent works.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner for approval a method
statement about preparation, protection and exploitation of material collecting areas,
borrow area, quarries and other source areas as well as methods for processing and
stockpiling of materials before starting borrow operations.

Revision 1
Page 77 of 247

PECC3

The Contractor shall submit full details of the equipment for the approval of the
Owner in advance of bringing them to site. The details shall give the plant
arrangement, site installation, the method of operation, flow charts, sizes of the units,
capacities, etc.
The plant shall include provisions and devices to facilitate the inspection of all
operations and sampling of materials at all times.
(2)
Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping

The Contractor shall clear and grub the surface of material collecting area, all borrow
areas, quarries and other source areas designated on the Drawings, in accordance
with Clause 10.5.1.2 and 10.5.1.3 prior to excavating or dumping fill of waste
materials.
The Contractor shall also clear all waste-pile sites, where in the opinion of the Owner
clearing of these is necessary.
The Contractor shall carefully strip the material collecting area, all borrow pit sites
and stockpile sites of topsoil, trees, roots, bushes, boulders, sod, loam, and other
materials which are unsuited for the purposes for which the material collecting area,
borrow pits are to be excavated. The Contractor shall maintain the stripped surfaces
of the material collecting area and all borrow pits free of vegetation until excavating
operations in the area are completed. Materials from stripping and/or excavation
which are not suited for use as fill materials shall be disposed of in disposal areas, in
accordance with the instructions given by the Owner.
If materials unsuitable, or not required for permanent construction purposes, are
found in material collecting area or any borrow pit prior to excavation, such
materials may be left in place, or excavated and wasted, at the option of the
Contractor.
All topsoil stripped from the material colleting area, borrow areas and quarries, etc.
shall be separately stockpiled in areas approved by the Owner and shall be used for
rehabilitation of these spoil disposal, stockpile, material collecting area and borrow
areas or quarries.
(3)
Excavating
(a) General
The Contractor shall employ, in the excavation of fill materials for the
embankment, equipment and procedures which will produce the maximum
quantity of uniformly blended materials fulfilling the requirements specified
for each material in subclause 10.5.1.7.4 -(2) hereof. Variations in gradation of
each material shall be kept to a minimum by excavating for each material over
as wide an area as practicable, and by excavating across the dip of the bedding
of different soils strata occurring in the material collecting area and the borrow
pits.

Revision 1
Page 78 of 247

PECC3

If the quantity of fill material should, by reason of a large quantity of

unnecessary wastage during excavation operations, proving insufficient for the
construction of the embankment, the Contractor shall supply suitable material
from other sources at his cost.
(b)
Borrow Operations
The Contractor shall excavate and load the material mainly during the dry
seasons. The Contractor shall provide all measures necessary to dry out the
material collecting area and borrow area by drainage or prevent run-off from
the surrounding ground entering it, and for protection of prepared material, to
prevent it from becoming wetter.
Exploitation of the borrow area will be selective. The Contractor shall set out
and systematically exploit the borrow area by dividing it into sections, so that
one part may be loaded while other parts are being prepared.
In areas with homogeneous material, the excavation may proceed in layers or
over faces and the Contractor may use type of equipment.
In areas with stratified material the Contractor shall excavate across the soil
strata over the maximum attainable height of faces by means of front loaders,
wheel excavators, bulldozers or other similar equipment. Such faces shall,
wherever practicable, be at least 3 m in vertical height, with slopes not flatter
than 1 vertical on 3 horizontal. Should the material be too wet before loading
operation, it shall be spread in layers and left to dry. To facilitate this
operation, the material shall be worked by a heavy duty pulvi-mixer, harrows,
rollers and other suitable equipment so as to obtain the finest material possible
before loading operation.
Materials shall be hauled in equipment which will not unduly damage public
roads and which will not cause segregation of the materials being hauled.
(4)
Processing
Materials excavated for placement in the embankment shall where necessary, be
processed prior to delivery to the embankment, to remove such rock and soil
fractions as necessary to produce fill materials of the specified gradation.
It shall be the Contractor's entire responsibility to devise, furnish and operate such
processing equipment as is necessary to produce the required quantities of materials,
complying with subclause 10.5.1.7.4-(2) hereof, from within the material collecting
area, borrow areas, quarries and other source areas designated on the Drawings or
these Specifications.

Revision 1
Page 79 of 247

PECC3

When, in the opinion of the Owner, the processing equipment and/or procedures
being employed by the Contractor are producing unacceptable gradation or
segregation of the different fractions within any material, the Contractor shall replace
or modify such equipment and procedures to eliminate such unsatisfactory operation,
to the satisfaction of the Owner.
Waste water from processing plant shall not be permitted to pollute any water course.
(5)
Stockpiles
In the event that excavation of suitable fill materials from borrow areas and quarries
proceeds at a faster rate than placing of the fill material in the embankment, the
excavated materials may be stockpiled in areas approved by the Owner.
In particular, the Contractor will care the stockpiling of fill material, in order to
utilize it during rainy seasons. Once filled to capacity, the fill material stockpile will
be protected against drying or wetting with plastic sheeting or other suitable
covering. Construction of such stockpile shall not take place in unfavorable weather
conditions. The stockpile of the fill material will have a volume for supplying the
embankment over the construction in the wet season.
10.5.1.7.7
Preparation of Foundation Surfaces
(1)
General
No fill materials shall be placed by the Contractor on any part of the foundation
ground, until the foundation ground surfaces in that part have been inspected,
surveyed and approved by the Owner as ready for fill placement.
(2)
Unwatering
Unwatered foundations shall be kept free from water until the embankment has
reached the levels as shown in the drawings.
The surface of each portion of the foundation, immediately prior to placing the fill
shall be properly cleaned or where necessary moistened to obtain a good bond with
the fill.
(3)
Filling of Existing Excavations

All portions of excavations made for test pits, other subsurface investigations, and all
other cavities, existing within the area to be covered by the embankment, which
extend below the surface designated for the embankment foundation shall be filled
with material fulfilling the requirements of what specified in subclause 10.5.1.7.4 (2)
hereof for the zone located above the part of the foundation in which the excavation
or cavity occurs, or with other fill materials, such as concrete or shotcrete, selected
by the Owner and prepared and placed in accordance with the applicable provisions
of these Specifications.

Revision 1
Page 80 of 247

PECC3
(4)

Preparation of Foundation Surface for Embankment

After clearing, grubbing and stripping in accordance with subclause 10.5.1.7.6 (2),
ground surface shall be scarified, plowed broken up, pulverized, moistened or
aerated as necessary, and thoroughly mixed and compacted with the top 15 cm
having a dry density of ninety five percent (95%) of the maximum dry density
determined by Modified Proctor Compaction Test Designated ASTM D 1557.
If, during compaction of the first layer of fill, local unstable soil below foundation
level, this area shall be excavated to remove the loose material and backfilled with
sand or fill similar to adjacent natural soils, and compacted in layers not exceeding
20 cm. Removal, backfilling and compaction of visually observed soft spots shall be
also performed.
10.5.1.7.8
(1)
Placement of Materials
General
Fill materials specifically defined in subclause 10.5.1.7.4 (2) hereof, shall be placed
on the embankment as shown on the Drawings or otherwise directed by the Owner
and according to the lines and levels specified.
No brush, roots, topsoil, or other perishable or unsuitable materials shall be dumped
within the embankment.
No fill material shall be placed before the foundation or underlying layer of fill has
been approved by the Owner.
(2)
Equipment
The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the design, provision and
operation of all facilities and equipment necessary for the transporting of fill
materials from material collection area, borrow pits, quarry, excavations and
stockpiles to the final point of placement within the embankment and for the placing
of the same materials.
It is anticipated, however, that:
Spreading of fill materials will be carried out by bulldozers, motor graders or
other equipment at the Contractor's convenience.
The Contractor shall design, provide and operate such facilities and equipment in
such a manner that fill materials, when placed in the embankment, completely fulfill
the applicable requirements of subclause 10.5.1.7.4-(2). Where, in the opinion of the
Owner, the design or method of operation of the facilities and equipment provided by
the Contractor for the transport and placing of fill materials are producing, or will
produce, unacceptable segregation, wetting, drying, or other undesirable effects on
the fill materials, the Contractor shall modify such facilities and equipment, or
change the methods of operation, to the satisfaction of the Owner.

Revision 1
Page 81 of 247

PECC3
(3)

Material Distribution and Spreading

The distribution of the materials placed within the embankment shall be such that
these fills are free from lenses, pockets, streaks and layers of materials differing
substantially in texture or gradation from the surrounding material.
Therefore the combined dumping and spreading operations shall be such that the
materials of the embankment when compacted in the fills will be blended sufficiently
to secure the most homogeneous fill. Successive loads of material shall be dumped
in their respective zones or portions so as to produce the best practicable distribution
of the material.
Segregated fill material shall either be removed from the embankment or remixed by
disc harrow, grader, ripper or other approved similar equipment according to the
Owners instructions.
The Contractor shall employ special means for placing fill materials at locations
where it is impracticable to use the equipment and procedures specified for
placement of the bulk of the fill in the embankment.
Such locations shall include:
(a) Portions of the embankment adjacent to structures and embankment
foundations
(b) Earthfill placed to refill additional excavation for structure foundations
(c) Other areas directed by the Owner
(4)
Restriction due to Weather

(a) Rainy Weather Working
The Contractor shall not place fill material in the embankment, during times of
rain, of an intensity which interferes with the moisture conditioning specified
in clause 10.5.1.7.9 hereof.
Rain shall not be considered detrimental to the continuance of placement and
compaction in other Zones. During fill placing operations in periods of possible
heavy rainfall, the Contractor shall build the embankment with the surfaces
graded sufficient to drain the water and shall take all necessary measures to
control the flow of this run-off.
Before work is resumed the surface shall be scarified and moisture conditioned
as specified in clause 10.5.1.7.10 hereof.
(b)
Hot Weather Working

During hot and dry weather the surface of dumped embankment material shall
be prevented from drying out by spraying with water.

Revision 1
Page 82 of 247

PECC3

(5)
Haulage on Embankment
Dumping and spreading of cohesive material for embankment material, shall
generally be performed with the haulage and spreading units travelling
approximately parallel to their axis and in such a manner that there are no spaces left
on the fill between successively dumped loads. Material of different characteristics
shall be placed in such manner the contamination is avoided. However, in particular
areas, the Contractor shall, wherever in the opinion of the Owner this is practicable,
dump and spread fill materials in directions approximately perpendicular to their
axis.
(6)
Differential Elevations
The whole of an embankment under construction shall be kept at the same level
along its length during the entire construction time. Material shall be placed in such
a way that free and easy drainage of surface water will be possible.
Sufficient embankment width shall be maintained adjoining the contacts between
adjacent zones to provide at least one roller lane width for the proper compaction of
the fills at the contact lines.
All proposed differential elevation shall be submitted to the Owner for approval
before their implementation.
(7)
Protection of Embankment
The Contractor shall carry out normal protection and maintenance work necessary to
keep the embankment in a satisfactory condition until completion.
In the case of impending rain the surface of the fill shall be smoothened, compacted
and when applicable sealed by the passage of rubber tired equipment.
In order to reduce the effect of rain, the surface of embankment shall have a slope of
approximately 1%. In case of work interruption, the surface of the embankment shall
be sealed to protect it from the effects of rain, by transit of pneumatic tired rollers.
(8)
Trimming of Outer Slopes

The finished exposed face of embankment shall be trimmed to present a uniform
profile and appearance.
(9)
Specific Requirements
In addition to satisfying the general requirements given in this clause, the Contractor
shall place fill materials according to the following specific requirements:
During construction of fill, a smooth grade having an adequate crown shall be
maintained to provide drainage. Fill shall be placed in layers not more than 20 cm in
thickness before compaction unless permission by the Owner.

Revision 1
Page 83 of 247

PECC3

10.5.1.7.9 Moisture Conditioning

(1)
General
The Contractor shall condition the embankment fill material so that its moisture
content on the embankment immediately prior to compaction is with in the
applicable limits, specified in subclause 10.5.1.7.9 -(4) hereof.
The Contractor shall be completely responsible for achieving and maintaining the
specified moisture content of embankment fill materials in accordance with the
requirements specified.
The quantity of water to be added to spread fill material shall be calculated from
moisture content tests and applied in a number of passes of the sprinkler tank unit
over the area.
(2)
Sprinkler Tank Units

Addition of water to fill materials, for the performance of the supplemental moisture
conditioning specified, hall be carried out by water tankers of semi-trailer type or
truck type sufficiently powerful to travel easily on loose materials.
The units shall have tanks equipped with spray bars, pressure distributors and such
other suitable equipment designed to apply water to fill materials uniformly and in
controlled quantities to variable widths of surface.
The water shall be applied in continuous spray which can be adjusted from microjet
to heavy precipitation or turned off.
The Contractor shall ensure full-time availability of water tankers.
(3)
Moisture Conditioning Operations

The Contractor shall condition the moisture content of the embankment fill material,
prior to delivery of these materials on the embankment and shall keep supplemental
moisture conditioning on the embankment to a minimum as stated in subclause
10.5.1.7.6-(5).
However, the Contractor shall perform such supplemental moisture conditioning of
the fill material on the embankment as is necessary to ensure their compaction at the
specified moisture content.
Supplemental moisture conditioning performed on the embankment shall consist of
such measures as are necessary for final correction of the moisture content of the
embankment fill material prior to its compaction. Such measures shall include
controlled sprinkling followed by such mixing as is necessary to obtain uniform

Revision 1
Page 84 of 247

PECC3

moisture content increase throughout the material; working with harrows, or other
suitable equipment and allowing to dry; removing, spreading and blending wet
material with selected dry material; complete removal of wet or dry material from the
embankment; and such other suitable methods which may be necessary and are
approved by the Owner.
Supplemental moisture conditioning on the embankment shall be carried out only by
sprinkler tank units of the type specified in subclause 10.5.1.7.9-(2) hereof.
The amount of water to be added to each layer of the fill shall be carefully controlled
to avoid the formation of pools on the surface during or after compaction.
(4)
Moisture Content
Embankment material shall have moisture content within the limits of two percent
(2%) below to two percent (2%) above the designated moisture content immediately
prior to compaction.
The "optimum" moisture content for embankment are that which permits the
achievement of the maximum dry density in the Modified Proctor Compaction Test
D 1557 T and Standard Proctor Compaction Test D 698 of the ASTM standards.
Material for drains and filters has no limitations for the moisture content.
Between each pass of sprinkler tank unit the fill material shall be turned over by disc
harrow, rotary cultivator or plough to uniformly distribute the added water
throughout the depth being treated.
10.5.1.7.10
(1)
Compacting
General
After each layer of fill materials has been dumped and spread and if necessary finally
conditioned to the correct moisture content, it shall immediately be compacted by the
applicable number of passes, specified in subclause 10.5.1.7.10-(5) hereof.
Compaction of spread fill material shall not commence until the water content and
the thickness of the layer have been checked by the Contractor, approved by the
Owner, and are within the specified range.
Adjustment in compaction passes to that specified in subclause 10.5.1.7.10-(5)
hereof.

Revision 1
Page 85 of 247

PECC3
(2)

Definitions
Pass or Full Pass
Pass or full pass is defined as the action achieved when all portions of the surface of
a layer have been traversed at least once by the compacting surfaces of the
compactor.
Single Pass
Single pass is defined as the continuous motion of the compactor in one direction
only.
For vibratory rollers, one pass (full pass) shall consist of one single pass of each
roller; that is one single pass of two rollers coupled one directly behind the other
shall constitute two passes. During compaction with pneumatic rollers one pass (full
pass) shall be deemed to be two or more single passes of the equipment until the
whole surface is completed. On the second or third pass, the tires of the pneumatic
roller shall pass over the areas between the previous tire tracks which were not
compacted.
(3)
Equipment
(a) General
The Contractor shall compact fill materials with the equipment hereinafter
specified.
Such equipment shall be designed and constructed in accordance with general
practice for such equipment, and each machine or unit shall be operated by a
man experienced in handling the particular make of machine or unit.
When compacting rollers are operated in sets or tandem, or sets of rollers are
operated one behind the other in the same track, all rollers operated in this
manner shall be of the same general dimensions, same widths, essentially the
same weights, and having the same weights, and having the same operating
characteristics.
The Contractor shall, prior to shipping compacting equipment to the Site,
submit to the Owner manufacturer's data giving all dimensions, weights, and
complete technical data, including descriptions of applied forces.
(b)
Vibrating Rollers
(i) General
Vibrating rollers shall be equipped with a device to vary the frequency and
amplitude of vibrations and which measures the frequency of vibration.
The power of the engine driving the vibrators shall be adequate to maintain
the specified frequency and centrifugal force under the most adverse

Revision 1
Page 86 of 247

PECC3

conditions which may be encountered. Roller drums shall be equipped

with suitable cleaning devices.
The roller shall be outfitted with a locked meter specifically designed to
record the distance covered both in forward and backward.
Tractor used to pull rollers shall be of types, and of sufficient power, to
operate these units at full capacity and maximum efficiency under the most
adverse conditions to be encountered.
(ii) Smooth Double Drum Type - Light Weight Type
This type of roller shall comply with the following requirements:
Total static load (on each drum)
1 t, min
Linear static load on drum width
10 kg/cm, min
Diameter of drum
60 cm, min
Centrifugal force (on each drum)
2 t, min
Operating vibration frequency range
2000 - 3000 V./minute
Type of traction
self-propelled
(iii) Smooth Drum Type - Heavy Weight

Total static load on drum
10 t, min
Linear static load on drum width
45 kg/cm, min
Diameter of drum
60 cm, min
Centrifugal force
20 t, min
Operating vibration frequency range
1300 - 1800 V./minute
Amplitude
1.5 - 1.8 mm
Type of traction
Self-propelled or tractor-drawn
(iv) Padfoot Drum Type

Total static load on drum
6 t, min
Linear static load on drum
28 kg/cm, min
Diameter of drum
150 cm, min
Centrifugal force
16 t, min

Revision 1
Page 87 of 247

PECC3
vibration

Operating
range
frequency 1300 - 1800 V./minute
Amplitude
1.5 - 1.8 mm
Number of feet
1 No. per 700 cm2 approximately
Length of feet
10 - 15 cm
Face area of feet
100 -200 cm
Type of traction
self - propelled
The feet shall be staggered and uniformly spaced on the drum. The roller
shall be well maintained so that the face area of the feet is always greater
than the minimum specified and the cleaning bars at their maximum length.
(c)
Pneumatic Type Roller

This roller shall be of self propelled or tractor-drawn type with pneumatic tires,
and a body suitable for ballast loading such that the load per wheel may be
varied from 15 t to 30 t. The tires shall be of such size and ply as can be
maintained during rolling operations, at tire pressures between 4 kg/cm2 and
8 kg/cm2. The roller wheels shall be located abreast, and each wheel and tire
assembly shall be mounted on an independently oscillating weight box so that
all wheels exert approximately equal loads when traversing uneven ground.
The spacing of the wheels shall be such that the distance between the nearest
edges of adjacent tires at the tire imprint will not be greater than fifty percent
(50%) of the width of a single tire at the maximum operating tire pressure.
(d)
Sheep-foot or Tamping Foot Roller

The rollers of the sheep-foot or tamping foot type shall consist of drums 1.50 m
in diameter and at least 1.50 m in length. The drums shall be so ballasted as to
reach a weight not less than 10 t.
The rollers shall be provided with cleaning bars designed and placed so as to
prevent the accumulation of material between the tampers. The tampers shall
have a net length of approximately 20 cm and their net head area shall be
between 100 and 200 cm2.
The roller shall be self propelled or towed by a prime mover of sufficient
capacity to tow the roller at a speed of approximately 2.5 km/h.
The Contractor may submit to the Owner's approval other types of rollers.
(e)
Minor Compactors
Minor compactors to be used for working in areas not accessible to large
rollers and for finishing works shall consist of small vibrating rollers, plate

Revision 1
Page 88 of 247

PECC3

vibrators, heavy duty power driven rammers and tampers and light pneumatic
rollers.
These minor compactors shall be capable of producing densities at least equal
to those produced by the vibratory rollers specified. All such special
compactors may be subject to disapproval by the Owner. Special compactors
which do not obtain the required densities with reasonable numbers of passes
of each layer, and at a production rate consistent with the adjacent
embankment, shall not be used in the works.
Cost of compaction by minor compactors will be included in the unit prices
stipulated for the various embankment fills.
(f)
Alternative Equipment
The Contractor may request, in writing, permission from the Owner to use
equipment of a different size and type in place of the equipment specified
herein. However, the Owner, before considering or granting such request, shall
require the Contractor to furnish evidence satisfactory to the Owner that the
equipment proposed for use by the Contractor is capable of producing results
equal, to or better than, those which can be produced by the equipment
specified herein.
The evidence will include compaction of test fills outside the limits of
embankments.
(4)
Compaction Procedures
After spreading, and when moisture content is within the allowable limits, the fill
material shall be compacted.
Compaction of each layer of fill material shall proceed in a systematic, orderly, and
continuous manner so as to ensure the specified layer thickness and pass by the
compactors. Rolling shall in general be performed parallel to the direction of fill
placement.
Before spreading a new layer on a compacted one, the compacted layer shall be
scarified by approved means in order to achieve layer adherence.
The Contractor shall employ special means of compacting fill materials at locations
where it is impracticable to use the equipment and procedures specified for
compacting of the bulk of the fill in the embankment. Such locations shall be those
listed in subclause 10.5.1.7.8-(3) for the special means of placing.
Fill materials compacted by special compactors, because of the location of such
materials, shall achieve at least the densities equal to those obtained with the
specified roller.

Revision 1
Page 89 of 247

PECC3

Each layer of fill material in roller turning areas shall be rolled perpendicular to the
normal rolling pattern, to obtain compaction equal to the remainder of the fill in the
zone. The Contractor shall take care when operating compacting equipment adjacent
to structures and abutment compacts, and any damage to structures, or shattering of
abutment or foundation materials, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
Roller shall be operated in parallel strips with each strip overlapping the pervious one
by not less than 40 cm.
(5)
Specific Requirements
In addition to satisfying the general requirements given in the previous subclause the
Contractor shall compact fill materials according to the following requirements:
All layers shall be compacted before the next layer is spread, the area of compaction
during construction shall be maintained at a uniform level. The material shall be
spread and compacted in layers covering as great an area as possible.
The fill material shall be normally spread in layers 20 cm thick in order to obtain a
uniform density throughout the full depth of the compacted fill. Compaction of
layers more than 20 cm thick, and not exceeding 30 cm, shall be subject to the
approval of the Owner.
The dry density of the compacted material shall be tested by means of samples
obtained from each layer 100% of the samples shall equal or exceed 95% of the
maximum dry density for modified Proctor Compaction Test ASTM D 1557.
10.5.1.7.11
(1)
Quality Control
General
All testing works necessary for controlling at the Site, the quality of fill materials and
the fills placed in the embankment shall be carried out by the Contractor in
accordance with the Owner's directions.
The Owner will check and analyze all the works performed by the Contractor in
order of ensuring that the Contractor is complying with the quality requirements and
perform all such supplementary sampling and testing, independently of the
Contractor, to ascertain that the quality of fill materials are fully in compliance with
the Specifications.
The performance of such supplementary tests by the Owner shall not constitute
grounds for claims by the Contractor for additional compensation or an extension of
time.

Revision 1
Page 90 of 247

PECC3

(2)
Laboratory
The Contractor shall provide all necessary qualified staff and a fully equipped
laboratory capable of performing all tests necessary to fulfill his obligations for the
supply, placement and compaction of fill which meets the Specifications.
(3)
Testing Standards
Testing procedures for fill materials and earthworks shall be as designated below or
the latest revision thereof.
Type of Test
Standard
In situ density for soil less than 50.8 mm (2")
ASTM D 1556,JIS A1214
Density water content relationship
ASTM D 698,JIS A 1210
Density water content relationship
Density/water content relationship for soil USBR Earth Manual

containing gravel
Relative density of cohesion less soil
USBR
Earth
Manual
Particle size analysis of soil
ASTM D 422, C 136,JIS A1204
Liquid limit
Plastic limit
Specific gravity
ASTM C 127/128,ASTM D 854

JIS A1202
Los
Angeles
Soundness of aggregate
(4)
abrasion
test ASTM
C
ASTM C 88
131,JIS
A1211
Control of Fill Materials

The Contractor shall take samples from material collection areas, borrow areas,
quarries, stockpiles, plants or any other source and carry out tests in sufficient
number to properly control materials to be used as fill material either directly or after
treatment and mixing so that, after spreading and compaction in the embankment, the
placed fill meets the specified requirements.
The results of these tests shall be submitted to the Owner when submitting a section
of fill for approval. No section of fill shall be submitted to the Owner for approval
unless at least three results are available, no matter the volume placed.
The frequency of testing shall be increased by two times during placing of the first
5% of the volume of fill and when the characteristics of the fill material change.
The minimum frequency of tests for checking that characteristics and composition of
placed fills meets the specified requirements shall be as follows:

Revision 1
Page 91 of 247

PECC3

The test necessary to determine the optimum dry density shall be the case of the
Contractor, and will be carried out in his laboratory. The Contractor shall obtain
sample along the center line at intervals not greater than 200 m, and in any case
wherever is apparent in the soil characteristics. As the height of the embankment
varied, the Contractor shall obtain a first sample at a depth from 0.5 to 1.0 m below
the surface of the embankment and a second one at a depth from 1.0 to 0.5 m above
the embankment. In the case of shallow embankment the first sample will suffice.
Where the majority of the fill material will be obtained from material collection area,
borrow pits, the tests will be carried on the actual area where the pit will be opened.
The samples will be obtained at a depth from 0.75 to 1.5 m below natural ground
level.
(5)
Control of Compaction Water Content

The Contractor shall take a sufficient number of samples (which shall not be less
than four no matter the volume placed) of the spread fill material of embankment
immediately before compaction to check that the fill material is in the specified
compaction water content range. These samples shall be taken at different locations
from those for the subsequent determination of the in situ density of the fill.
When the test is to be performed in the laboratory, the water content samples shall be
placed within moisture proof containers such as glass fruit jars with airtight covers
which shall be filled completely.
The test results obtained shall be submitted when the section of fill is submitted for
approval to satisfy the Owner that the specified compaction requirements have been
met.
(6)
Control of Compaction
The Contractor shall take samples and perform tests on foundation and sections of
compacted fill at the frequency set out below and where directed by the Owner to
check that the relative compaction and water content or relative density have been
achieved, before submitting the area and results to the Owner for approval. The test
results shall be submitted to the Owner.
No section of fill shall be submitted to the Owner for approval unless at least three
results are available, no matter the volume placed.
Control of compaction of canal embankment shall take at lease two samples for each
day of work and for each layer compacted in the day.
10.5.1.7.12
Maintenance, Clean-up and Rehabilitation of Work Areas

Revision 1
Page 92 of 247

PECC3

(1)
Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain the embankment, during and after construction, in a
manner satisfactory to the Owner, until the final completion and acceptance of the
Facilities.
(2)
Clean-up
During placement of fill materials, the Contractor shall at all times keep the surfaces
and slopes of the embankment free from accumulations of rubbish, and rejected or
unsuitable fill or waste materials, to the satisfaction of the Owner. On completion of
the Facilities, the Contractor shall remove from within the limits of the embankment
all constructional plant, surplus materials, waste materials and rubbish and shall
leave the embankment, in a neat, clean and presentable condition, all to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
(3)
Rehabilitation of Work Areas

On completion of the Facilities also the sites of borrow areas, quarries and disposal
areas shall be rehabilitated as required by the Owner. In general such areas shall be
left in a well drained and tidy state with all slopes in a stable condition cut to
maintain the stability of the ground around them, all to the approval of the Owner.
Static lighting shall be the main source of illumination and the use of earthmoving
plant headlights only shall not be considered satisfactory illumination of working
areas.
The quality of lighting in the working areas shall be subject to the approval of the
Owner.
10.5.1.7.13
Test Fills
The Contractor shall construct test fills for the embankment fill material at the Site prior to
starting the placement of fill in the embankment.
The test fills embankment shall be constructed at the designated area by the Owner,, and
shall be started at two (2) weeks prior to the Contractor's start of fill placement.
The objectives of these test fills and experimental placement operations will be to check
the suitability of the layer thicknesses and numbers of roller passes specified in subclause
10.5.1.7.10 -(5) hereof; to determine the most suitable vibratory roller frequencies; and to
determine the roller optimum moisture contents. It is anticipated that this work will
involve the placement of materials from different borrow areas or points of the same
borrow area, in different layer thicknesses, at different moisture contents, and in separate
lanes for compaction by different speed, frequencies, and numbers of passes.
10.5.2
Dredging

Revision 1
Page 93 of 247

PECC3

10.5.2.1 General
The Contractor shall carry out dredging works for the area in front of the cooling water
intake and outfall.
10.5.2.2 Method and Sequence

(a)
(b)
Before commencing dredging works, the Contractor shall submit details of the
dredging method to the Owner for his approval.
The sequence of dredging works shall be in accordance with the approved
construction method.
10.5.2.3 Depth
(a)
(b)
Dredging shall be carried out to the depth specified in the specifications and on the
Bid/Construction drawings.
The Contractor shall perform the dredging work in a manner not to disturb sand and
silt at a place close to a structure, not to unnecessarily loosen the rock base or not to
result in over-dredging.
If over-dredging occurs at the foundation of a structure, the Contractor shall fill the
over-dredged area with granular material as approved by the Owner.
10.5.2.4 Slope Stability

(a)
The Contractor shall carry out trimmings as necessary to produce stable slopes
throughout.
10.5.2.5 Spoil from Dredging

All dredged material shall be dumped at the designated spoil ocean area (North Latitude:
191786, East Longitude: 1055368) about 6 km far from the dredging area. No spoil
shall be dumped in any overland area without approval/designation by the Owner.
10.5.2.6 Setting-out and Sounding

(a)
The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting out and carrying out of soundings
and shall afford all facilities for checking as required by the Owner.

Revision 1
Page 94 of 247

PECC3
(b)

The Contractor shall carry out pre and post dredging soundings at dredging area and
all necessary interim soundings. The Contractor shall demonstrate by means of
sounding and sweeping that all the dredged area have been satisfactorily dredged
prior to final acceptance by the Owner.
10.5.2.7 Others
The Contractor shall perform the dredging works making efforts not to pollute the sea area
and not to damage the existing facilities such as outfall of drainage channel for rainwater
from mountain area to be constructed by the Owner prior to the commencement of
dredging for cooling water intake construction, and shall take care for safe navigation of
other ships and barges including compensation for existing navigation aids if necessary.
10.5.3
Masonry Works
10.5.3.1 General
This section is for all masonry work necessary for the power plant facilities in accordance
with the Bid/Construction Drawings including but not limited to the supply and placing of
armor stones, rubble stones and quarry-run rock for the intake, outfall of the cooling water,
and others.
10.5.3.2 Materials Requirement

(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit sample stones to the Owner for his approval prior to the
commencement of works.
The various stones shall be tested for their properties.
Property
Standard of Testing
Specific Gravity (dry)
ASTM, C127-81
Water Absorption
Specific Gravity and Absorption of coarse aggregate
Uni-axial Compression
ASTM C170-50
Abrasion
ASTM C131-81
Weathering Soundness
ASTM C88-76
Petrological examination shall be carried out. The Contractor shall furnish test
certificates from an approved Testing Laboratory and a qualified petrologist in
respect to the rock proposed to be used.

Revision 1
Page 95 of 247

PECC3
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

The procedures in items above shall be repeated if the Contractor proposes to change
the source of material or if the material at an approved quarry differs from the
samples previously submitted and approved.
Armor and rubble stone shall not be flat, spherical, tubular, or slender. The stones
shall be free of incipient fractures and seams, solid, hard and able to withstand
weathering and impact of wave action. The stones shall be free of foreign matters to
insure proper interlocking with the least voids.
The Contractor shall submit the proposed range of stone sizes to the Owner for
approval.
Armor stones shall be as near cubical as possible. The maximum dimension of each
stone shall be less than 2.5 times the minimum dimension.
The shape must be angular stone or broken stone in angular shape or quarried rock
such as blasted rock.
The weight of stones used for armor layer shall be within 20% of the approved
weight.
The average weight of armor stones shall not be less than the weight approved by the
Owner.
The following are the limits of tolerance for the properties:
Specific gravity
- min. 2.50
Water absorption
- min. 2.0
Compressive strength
- min. 850kgf/cm2
Abrasion loss
- max. 40%
Soundness
- max. 12%
(g)
Rubble stones shall be angular stone or broken stone in angular shape or quarried
rock such as blasted stone.
Each stone shall be heavier than approved minimum weight and the distribution of
the sizes must be reasonably spread over the range permitted.
The following are the limits of tolerance for the properties:
Specific gravity
- min. 2.4
Water absorption
- min. 5.0
(h)
Quarry run shall be run of rock or run of broken stone or pit run but shall not be
cobble shaped.
Not less than 85% of the material shall consist of hard, angular stone durable in
water with a specific gravity not less than 2.4 and weighing between 0.5 kg and 15
kg.

Revision 1
Page 96 of 247

PECC3

Weathered, soft or small stones less than 0.5 kg shall not be more than 15 % of the
material.
(i)
The wash quarry run may be used as sub-base for the roads subject to the
requirements of Clause 10.5.15 of the Specification.
Sand proof sheet placed on the slope of revetment shall be woven synthetic fiber
with the following minimum requirements:
(i) Tensile strength
- min. 250 kg/ cm2
(ii) Permeability
- min. 1 x 10-3 cm/sec
(iii) Mesh size
- max. 200 x 100 microns
(iv) Resistance to oil and coal polluted sea water
(v) Resistant to ultra violet light for up to four (4) weeks exposure during
construction
Prior to the commencement of work, samples and table of quality shall be submitted to the
Owner for approval.
10.5.3.3 Construction Requirements

(a)
The method and sequence of placing stones shall be submitted to the Owner for his
approval before the work proceeds.
(b)
Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall establish buoys or other

markers to show the limit of the rock armoring and to facilitate checking of the work
during construction.
(c)
The placing of stones shall be directly carried out by crane, grab and dragline
equipment which may also be used for trimming and re-working the deposited
stones.
The placing of stones underwater shall be supervised by divers and the alignment
checked with sounding equipment.
(d)
The finished slope surface of armor stone and rubble stone shall be constructed using
templates or other approved methods so that the specified slopes will be obtained and
so that the thickness of the layers will be at least those shown on the
Bid/Construction Drawings.
(e)
Random fill armor stones shall be placed and set in accordance with the instruction
of divers so that they are not segregated and interlocked effectively.
(f)
Placing of armor stone shall commence at the toe of the slope and progress towards
the crest.

Revision 1
Page 97 of 247

PECC3
(g)
(h)
(i)

Care shall be taken during the placing of stone adjacent to the cooling water intake
wall sheet piles to ensure that the pile heads are not displaced from their as-driven
position.
Armor stone which will be placed in the Outfall shall be specially selected so that the
profile as indicated in the Bid/Construction Drawings shall be correctly formed.
Sand proof sheets shall be securely anchored in position prior to placing rubble
stone. The sheets shall run from top to bottom of the slope and the minimum lap
between sheets shall be 50 cm.
Care shall be taken during the placing of the rubble stone to ensure that the sheeting
is not displaced or torn. Damaged or displaced sheeting shall be removed and relaid.
10.5.3.4 Inspection
(a)
Inspection will be made to confirm that the inter-mediate and final works have been
completed to the specified cross sections and lengths.
(b)
The survey for inspection shall be in accordance with the approved method.
The tolerance of the finished surface shall be as follows for the crest and slope shown
on the Drawings.
Riprap Armor Layer
Same range in weight
0.8 1.1 ton
+20cm 10cm
1.5 3.5 ton
+30cm 15cm
Uniform placed armour layer
10cm
General covering layer
+ 20cm. - 10cm
Bedding layer in front

cooling water intake, outfall
10.5.4
of + 0cm. - 10cm
Slope Protection Works
10.5.4.1 General
The Contractor shall perform slope protection work for excavated and banked locations in
accordance with the Specifications and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the
Owner.
Revision 1
Page 98 of 247

PECC3

10.5.4.2 Trimming of Slope

The Contractor shall finish slopes to the gradients shown on the Construction Drawings
and trim the surfaces to remove extreme irregularities.
10.5.4.3 Seeding and Topsoil application

Seeding shall be executed using the pump which has pump head of not less than 30 m and
the mixture of the materials shall be done in mixer tank putting the materials in order of
water, water-retaining agent, protection materials against erosion, fertilizer and seeds and
shall be mixed into uniform slurry.
The Contractor shall propose and submit mix proportion of seeding for approval of the
Owner.
During seeding, suitable stabilization treatments shall be provided to prevent peeling of the
sown surface and washing away of seed by rainfall. Water sprinkling and fertilization
shall be performed until complete sprouting and growth have occurred. Protection shall
also be provided to prevent patchings.
Vegetation covering percentage shall not be less than 80% after 60 days from completion
of seeding.
The Contractor shall place topsoil on the excavated slope of the bedrock.
Topsoil to be sprayed for slope protection shall be a mixture comprising of seeds,
vegetation base materials, fertilizers and protection material against erosion.
The Contractor shall propose and submit mix proportion of topsoil application for approval
of the Owner.
Before placing topsoil, the Contractor shall remove loose rocks and remaining soil from
the surface to be sprayed with topsoil and lay the wire net. The application method shall be
by strips along the entire surface to be sprayed. The average thickness of the topsoil shall
be not less than 7 cm with the minimum thickness being not less than 5 cm.
After completion of topsoil application, the Contractor shall exercise care to ensure
protection against irregularity by water spray and fertilization until complete germination
and growth are achieved.
Vegetation covering percent shall not be less than 80% after 60 days from completion of
topsoil application.

Revision 1
Page 99 of 247

PECC3

10.5.4.4 Shotcrete
10.5.4.4.1
General
Shotcrete shall be composed of a admixture of cement, sand, aggregates and accelerating

mixture.
Unless specifically modified by the following specifications or otherwise approved, the
shotcrete shall conform to and be applied in accordance with the recommendations
contained in the American Concrete Institute " Recommended Practice for Shotcreting"
(ACI 506).
Where required, the shotcrete shall be reinforced with welded wire fabric.
10.5.4.4.2 Materials
(1)
Cement
Cement shall comply with the provisions set forth in Clause 10.5.5.
(2)
Sand and Aggregates

The quality of sand and aggregates shall comply with the requirements set forth in
Clause 10.5.5, while the combined aggregate grading shall be as follows:
Sieve size square mesh
25.4 mm
(1 inch)
Percent Passing by weight

100
19.1 mm (3/4 inch)
90 - 100
9.5mm (3/8 inch)
65 - 90
4.8 mm
(No.4)
45 - 75
2.4 mm
(No.8)
30 - 55
1.2 mm
(No.16)
20 - 40
0.149 mm (No.100)
0 - 10
(3)
Water
Water shall comply with the requirements set forth in Clause 10.5.5.
(4)
Admixture
Accelerating admixture shall be a fast setting and water resistant agent specifically
designed for pneumatically applied mortar. The admixture may be either liquid or in
powder, but must be in compliance with QCVN 16-3:2011/BXD.

Revision 1
Page 100 of 247

PECC3
10.5.4.4.3
(a)

Proportioning and Testing
Proportioning
The Contractor shall proportion the mixture for shotcrete so that the combination of
the ingredients develop the following minimum compressive strengths:
Compressive Strength (kg/ cm2)
Time
Class A
Class B
At 8 hours
30
At 72 hours
140
At 7 days
180
At 28 days
300
300
The test shall be carried out at site laboratory.

The laboratory mixes shall be prepared considering 350 - 450 kg of cement per cubic
meter of mix, 0.40 water - cement ratio by weight and accelerator in quantity
necessary to obtain the required compressive strengths, but in any case not exceeding
6 % by weight of the cement.
The mixture shall be submitted to the approval of the Owner at least sixty (60) days
prior to the shotcrete application.
(b)
Pre-construction Tests
Test cylinders shall be prepared by the Contractor prior to work begins, in the
amount requested by the Owner, by shooting concrete vertically downwards into
molds of hardware fabric 19 mm (3/4 ") metal mesh to make cylinders 15 cm ( 6") in
diameter and 30 cm ( 12") high. Excess materials shall be moved for at least eight (8)
hours after being shot, during which time they shall be protected and treated in a
manner satisfactory to the Owner.
These cylinders shall be manufactured so as to represent as closely as possible the
quality of concrete to be placed in the works. Test cylinder shall be shot with the
same equipment, air pressure, nozzle tip, and water content as the concrete to be used
in the works.
Other preconstruction tests will be carried out shotcreting an inclined rock surface
and then obtaining core sample, as specified in the next subclause.
On the basis of the results obtained by the preconstruction tests, the Owner will
accept or refuse the mixtures prepared by the Contractor.

Revision 1
Page 101 of 247

PECC3

Unacceptable mixtures cannot be utilized in permanent works and shall be

substituted with new mix proportions.
(c)
Field Tests
Field tests shall normally be executed as described for preconstruction tests.
At the request of the Owner, test specimens shall be obtained by core drilling from
the lining. Core samples shall be 7.5 cm (3") in diameter and obtained by diamond
core bit according to ASTM designation C42 "Method of Obtaining and Testing
Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete".
The compressive strength of an individual Class of shotcrete placed shall be
considered satisfactory if both the following requirements are met:
* The average of three consecutive strength tests (tests composed of 2 cylinders)
equals or exceeds the required compressive strength;
* No individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more
than 50 kg/cm2 at 28 days.
10.5.4.4.4
Preparation of Surfaces
The surfaces in contract with the shotcrete shall be cleaned before laying operations, so as
to free them from unstable material or materials on which the shotcrete cannot stick such
as mud or shattered and rebound materials. If necessary, the surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned with water and compressed air; remaining water shall be blown away with
compressed air.
Where concentrated or scattered water inflows occur, the Contractor will trap and convey
this water to drains by suitable means. Under no circumstances shall shotcrete be placed on
a surface covered with standing or ruining water; water shall be withheld from the fresh
shotcrete until it has sufficiently set.
10.5.4.4.5
Equipment
All equipment required to perform shotcreting operations shall be subject to the approval
of the Owner.
The equipment used for measuring and batching concrete ingredients, for mixing, and for
placing of the shotcrete shall be of a recognized and proven type and of sufficient capacity
to maintain placing continuity.
10.5.4.4.6 Batching and Mixing

Revision 1
Page 102 of 247

PECC3

Batching equipment shall be capable of performing accurate measurement to provide

uniformity of concrete produced.
Batching by weight shall be used unless otherwise approved.
The components of the shotcrete shall be thoroughly mixed in approved mixers.
Mixed concrete materials, excluding the admixture, which are not used within one (1) hour
of mixing, shall be wasted.
The class of shotcrete shall be instructed by the Owner according to the conditions of the
work to be performed.
10.5.4.4.7
Placing
The shotcrete shall be placed in one or more layers to the thickness as directed by the
Owner so that at no time does sloughing of the placed concrete take place. If the
application of a succeeding layer has to be delayed such that the underlying layer has
started to take its initial set, the application of that succeeding layer shall be delayed until
its application will not disturb the initial setting process.
The placing of the shotcrete shall be performed by experienced personnel in a
workmanlike and efficient manner, using proper air pressure, water pressure, and hose
length. In addition to the equipment operator and nozzle-man one or more men shall be
present during the spraying operations to remove the rebounded material which under no
circumstances shall be used again as spray materials.
The Contractor shall furnish and install approved measuring pins to the surface for the
purpose of indicating the thickness of the required shotcrete layer. Pins shall be so
designed as not to cause infiltration of water through the shotcrete and shall be installed at
1.5 m centers in two transverse directions and at other locations as required by the Owner.
Pins shall be strong enough to withstand the application of the shotcrete.
The thickness in place shall be in any point not less than the required values
10.5.4.4.8
Curing
The curing of the shotcrete shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
clause 10.5.5.
10.5.4.4.9
Drainage Holes

Revision 1
Page 103 of 247

PECC3

Where water seepage may cause hydrostatic pressure between the rock and the shotcrete
layer, the Contractor shall execute drainage holes penetrating into the rock to not less than
50 cm depth. The pattern of such holes shall be fixed by the Owner.
10.5.4.5 Welded Wire and Chain-Link Fabric

10.5.4.5.1
General
This clause deals with the supply and installation of welded wire and chain-link fabric to
cover ground surfaces in such a way as to provide protection from falling rock/soil
fragments or to reinforce the shotcrete, for open works, where required on the drawings or
directed by the Owner.
10.5.4.5.2
Material
Welded wire fabric shall be of square mesh type and shall comply with ASTM A185
standard specification.
Wire spacing and wire diameter shall range from 100 to 140 mm and from 4 to 6 mm
respectively.
Chain-link fabric shall comply with ASTM A 392, Class 2 zinc coating.
10.5.4.5.3
Installation
Prior to the installation work, the welded mesh and chain-link fabric shall be cleaned from
possible scale, intensive rust, mud, grease, oil, wax or other foreign matter. The placing on
rock surfaces shall be carried out by means of anchor bars, so that the fabric remains
stretched and steady.
When the fabric is used for protection, it shall be fixed as close as possible to the surfaces,
where as when it is used for shotcrete it shall be placed at about half thickness of the layer
to be applied.
The joints of the fabric shall be reduced to the least number possible, according to the work
necessities, and shall be performed overlapping one mesh.
When the fabric is used for protective purposes, the Contractor shall immediately, prior to
placing concrete against it, satisfactorily remove any loose debris trapped between the
ground surface and the mesh.

Revision 1
Page 104 of 247

PECC3
10.5.5

Concrete Work
10.5.5.1 General
This specification covers the performance of all concrete work for the permanent structures
in accordance with the drawings and specifications contained herein, including, but not
limited to, the supply of concrete materials, the supply, erection and removal of formwork,
the supply, fabrication and erection of steel reinforcement and embedded parts, mix design,
sampling and testing, batching, transportation, placing and compaction of plastic concrete
and curing and protection of the in-situ concrete.
10.5.5.2 Applicable Codes and Standards

Work to be executed in this section shall comply with applicable codes and standards listed
in Part 4 Section 1 of these specifications and, in particular, with the relevant ACI, ASTM,
AIJ, JSCE, JASS and JIS codes and all local building codes or regulations.
10.5.5.3 Cement
10.5.5.3.1 General
Cement shall be either ordinary Portland cement (OPC), or blended Portland cement, or
sulfate-resistant Portland cement, compliant with QCVN 16-1:2011/BXD or equivalent
standards and shall be obtained from a source approved by the Owner/Engineer.
Sulfate-resistant cement or PBC with mineral admixtures shall be applied for all
foundations, sub-structures which is submerged or in contact with seawater/groundwater.
Based on the results of water/soil test results, the Contractor shall submit to the
Owner/Engineer for approval details of Sulfate-resistant cement or PBC with mineral
admixtures for concrete works for all foundations, sub-structures submerged in
groundwater or seawater.
10.5.5.3.2 Storage
Cement shall be stored clear of the ground in a dry, weathertight, ventilated structure with
adequate provision for the prevention of absorption of moisture and easy access for
inspection and identification. Cement shall be used in the order in which it is delivered to
site and cement stored for more than 30 days shall not be used. Bagged cement shall not
be stacked higher than 14 bags.

Revision 1
Page 105 of 247

PECC3

10.5.5.3.3 Sampling and Testing

Cement shall be sampled in accordance with requirements in QCVN 16-1:20011 or
equivalent and tested by a recognized laboratory or testing agency approved by the Owner.
All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Owner and at the expense of the
Contractor. No cement shall be shipped until notice has been given by the Owner that the
test results are satisfactory.
10.5.5.4 Aggregates
10.5.5.4.1 General
The term "fine aggregate" shall mean that portion of aggregate with maximum size of
4.8 mm, which consists of natural or manufactured sands from a source approved by the
Owner. Fine aggregate shall be delivered to the batching plant in a state of uniform and
constant moisture content.
The term "coarse aggregate" refers to that portion of aggregate having minimum size of
4.8 mm and maximum size of 3.8 cm and any size, or range of sizes, within such limits.
Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel or rock, or a combination of both
from a source approved by the Owner. Coarse aggregate shall be delivered to the batching
plant in a state of uniform and constant moisture content.
10.5.5.4.2 Fine Aggregate
The fine aggregate shall be composed of fragments of clean, hard compact rock, and sand
with flaky elements shall not be accepted.
The maximum quantity of deleterious substances in the fine aggregate shall not exceed the
following limits:
% by weight
Material passing No. 200 sieve (ASTM C-117)
3.0
Coal and lignite (ASTM C-123)
1.0
Clay lumps (ASTM C-142)
1.0
Total of other substances such as alkali, mica, grains and

loam
1.0
The sum of the percentages of all deleterious substances shall not exceed 5 per cent by
weight.
Revision 1
Page 106 of 247

PECC3

Fine aggregate failing to meet the following requirements shall be rejected:

(a) The saturated, surface-dry specific gravity, determined according to ASTM C-128,
shall be not less than 2.60 or absolute dry density shall be not less than 2.5.
(b) Organic impurities shall not be present in amounts producing a color darker than
ASTM C-40 test standard for organic impurities.
(c) Chemical and/or physical soundness of the aggregate shall be confirmed not to cause
any harmful effects based on the results of chemical and/or physical soundness tests
according to ASTM C 289 and/or ASTM C 227 and/or JIS A 5308 attachment7,8
(alkali-aggregate reaction test)or equivalent.
(d) Absorbing water rate is equal to or less than 3.5%.
The grading and uniformity of the fine aggregate shall conform to the following
requirements as delivered to the mixer:
Sieve Designation
(mm)
U.S.
% by Weight
Passing
9.5
3/8
100
4.76
No. 4
95 100
1.2
No. 16
50 85
0.297
No. 50
10 30
0.15
No. 100
2 - 10
In addition to the grading limits shown above, the fine aggregate, as delivered to the
mixer, shall have a fineness modulus of not less than 2.30 but not more than 2.80.
The grading of the fine aggregate shall be controlled so that the fineness moduli of at
least nine of ten test samples, as delivered to the mixer, shall not vary by more than
ten per cent from the average fineness module of all previous samples.
At the option of the Contractor, the fine aggregate may be a combination of two or
more classifications or sizes, but the resulting combination shall be of uniform
grading within the limits specified above.
10.5.5.4.3 Coarse Aggregate
The coarse aggregate shall be composed of hard, clean, compact, durable rock fragments
conforming to the requirements of ASTM C-33.
The maximum quantity of deleterious substances in the coarse aggregate shall not exceed
the following limits:

Revision 1
Page 107 of 247

PECC3

% by weight
Material passing No. 200 sieve(relevant ASTM code)
1.0
Soft particles
2.0
Coal and lignite (ASTM C-123)
1.0
Clay lumps (ASTM C-142)
0.25
Other deleterious substances
1.0
The sum of the percentages of deleterious substances in each fraction discharged to the
mixer shall not exceed 3 per cent by weight:
Coarse aggregate failing to meet the following requirements shall be rejected:
(a) In abrasion tests using a Los Angeles machine, the percentage of wear shall not
exceed 40% after 500 revolutions (ASTM C-131)
(b) Specific gravity shall be not less than 2.60 (ASTM C-127).
(c) Chemical and/or physical soundness of the aggregate shall be confirmed not to cause
any harmful effects based on the results of chemical and/or physical soundness test
according to ASTM C 289 and/or ASTM C 227 and/or JIS A 5308 attachment
7,8(alkali-aggregate reaction test) or equivalent.
(d) Absolute dry density shall be not less than 2.5g/cm3
(e) Absorbing water rate is equal to or less than 3.0%
The coarse aggregate shall be well graded from fine to coarse. It shall be separated into the
following two size groups and graded as indicated :
Sieve Size
U.S. Standard
Square Mesh
50.8 mm
310.1 mm
25.4 mm
19.1 mm
9.5 mm (3/8)
4.76 mm (No. 4)
2.38 mm (No. 8)
By Weight Passing for

Each Size
19 mm
38 mm
100
90 - 100
100
20 - 55
90 - 100
0 - 10
20 - 55
0-5
0 - 10
0-5
Unless otherwise directed, the maximum sizes of coarse aggregate to be used in the various
parts of the works shall be as follows:

Revision 1
Page 108 of 247

PECC3
10.5.5.4.4

Maximum Size
General Use
38 mm
Heavy
concrete
Heavy walls and slabs
Walls slabs and beams from
0.3 to 0.75 m thick
19 mm
Thin walls, slabs and beams

less than 0.3 m thick
Storage of Aggregates
Aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent the inclusion of any foreign
material in the concrete, intermixing of the separate sizes prior to batching, segregation or
excessive breakage. No muddy traction equipment shall be operated on storage piles and
the stockpiling areas shall be provided with suitable drainage facilities.
10.5.5.4.5
Moisture Control
The free moisture content of the fine aggregate and the smallest size group of coarse
aggregate, as delivered to the mixer, shall be controlled so as not to exceed 4% and 2%
respectively, expressed as percentages by weight of the saturated surface-dry aggregate. In
addition, the amounts of free moisture in the fine aggregate and the smallest size of coarse
aggregate shall be not more than 0.5% during any one hour of mixing plant operation and
the variation in moisture content shall be not more than 2% during any 80 hours period of
mixing plant operation. The moisture contents of other sizes of aggregate shall be
controlled so that the aggregates are delivered to the mixers with the least possible amount
of free moisture and variation in moisture content. The Contractor shall accomplish the
required moisture control by free drainage of storage areas, mechanical dewatering devices
or such other methods as are approved by the Owner.
10.5.5.4.6 Sampling and Testing
Prior to approval of an aggregate source proposed by the Contractor, he shall provide
representative samples to the Owner, who will make such tests to determine whether
aggregates from such source will meet the requirements specified in Clause 10.5.5.4.2 and
10.5.5.4.3, but such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the specifications. The costs of supplying, delivering and testing these
samples shall be borne by the Contractor..
During construction, the Contractor shall provide aggregate samples, taken in accordance
with ASTM sampling procedure, and shall perform the required tests at the frequency
shown in the following table.
Item

Revision 1
Frequency
Page 109 of 247

PECC3

Fine aggregate
(1) Sieve analysis
(2) Surface moisture test
(3) Organic impurities
(4) Chemical and/or physical soundness test
(5) Clay lumps test
once a day
twice a day
once a month
once a source
once a month
Coarse aggregate
(1) Sieve analysis
(2) Specific gravity test
(3) Clay lumps test
(4) Abrasion test
(5) Chemical and/or physical soundness test
once a month
once a month
once a month
twice a year
once a source
Surface moisture content of the aggregates shall be determined in accordance with relevant
ASTM code and used for regulation of the amount of water used for mixing.
10.5.5.5 Water for Mixing

Mixing water shall be reasonably clean and free from objectionable quantities of silt,
organic matter, alkali, salts or other impurities.
A turbidity limit of 2,000 parts per million is specified for mixing water. The turbidity
measurement shall be made in accordance with designation 34 of the United States Bureau
of Reclamation (USBR) Concrete Manual, VII edition, or equivalent.
10.5.5.6 Admixtures
Except the admixtures specified in the Specification, Admixtures shall be only applied
with the prior written approval of the Owner.
All admixtures shall be in compliance with requirements in QCVN 16-3:2011/BXD.
When the use of an admixture is directed or approved, it shall be added separately to the
mix and, whenever possible, shall be supplied by the manufacturer in ready-to-use liquid
form.
10.5.5.7 Mix Design

The Contractor shall design the mix of each class of concrete taking into consideration the
required strength, durability and workability.
Revision 1
Page 110 of 247

PECC3

The Contractor shall engage an independent, recognized laboratory to carry out trial
concrete mix design tests and determine optimum mix proportions in accordance with ACI
377 using a recognized method. Subject to the approval of the Owner, the results of these
tests shall establish the mix proportions of the ingredients specified for each class of
concrete.
10.5.5.8 Classes of Concrete

The quality of concrete will comply with the requirements specified in ACI 301
Specification for structural concrete for buildings or equivalent shall be used.
The class of concrete to be used in each structure shall be as specified on the Construction
Drawings or as directed by the Owner.
Structure Type
28-day Cylinder Compressive

Strength
Lean concrete and plain concrete for thrust

blocks, duct bank
13 MPa
Structural concrete for foundation, building

and CW structures
30 MPa
Concrete pavement
24 MPa
If the Contractor intends to use concrete which has different property from specified
property, the Contractor shall submit the class of concrete showing compressive strength,
maximum size of aggregate, maximum water cement ratio and slump to the Owner for his
approval.
10.5.5.9 Batching and Mixing

10.5.5.9.1
Equipment
The Contractor shall provide a modern and dependable wet batch-type mixing plant having
sufficient capacity to complete the work within the established progress schedule. Dry
batch-type mixing plant shall not be used. Separate bins shall be provided in the plant for
the fine aggregate, the different sizes of coarse aggregate and for bulk cement when used.
Aggregates shall be weighed in separate weight batchers with individual scales, or
cumulatively in one weight batcher with a single scale. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a
separate weight batcher. Water may be measured by weight or by volume.

Revision 1
Page 111 of 247

PECC3

The concrete mixing equipment shall be capable of combining the materials into a uniform
mixture and of discharging this mixture without segregation. The mixer performance shall
be tested in accordance with designation 26 of USBR Concrete Manual, VII edition.
Adequate facilities shall be provided for accurate measurement and control of each of the
materials entering each batch of concrete.
Prior to the installation of the batching and mixing plant, aggregate handling facilities and
concrete conveying and placing equipment, the Contractor shall submit drawings showing
the general arrangement and details of plant and equipment for the approval of the Owner.
Cost for the above plant and equipment shall be included in permanent work cost.
Materials delivered to the batching plant shall be within the following limits of accuracy:
Material
10.5.5.9.2
% By Weight
Cement
1.0
Water
1.0
Aggregate
2.0
Air-entraining admixture
3.0
Mixing
The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain sufficient excess of
cement, sand and water to coat the inside of the drum without reducing the required mortar
content of the mix.
The concrete mix shall be air-entrained by an approved air-entraining agent which shall be
separately batched in solution by an accurate mechanical dispenser and distributed
uniformly throughout the mix.
The Contractor submit specifications of concrete mixing plant (included mixing times), at
least 30 days before the erection of concrete mixing plant for the approval of EVN
The mixing periods specified are based on the control of the speed of rotation of the mixer
and on the introduction of all of the mixing water before 1/4 of the mixing time has
elapsed. The mixing time shall be increased if, and when, in the opinion of the Owner, the
charging and mixing operation fails to produce the required uniformity of composition and
consistency.
The mixer shall rotate at a uniform speed for a minimum of 12 revolutions after all
materials have been placed inside and shall not be charged or operated in excess of the

Revision 1
Page 112 of 247

PECC3

capacity and speed recommended by the manufacturer. Excessive overmixing requiring

the addition of water to preserve the required concrete consistency shall not be permitted.
10.5.5.10 Formwork
10.5.5.10.1
General
The Contractor shall design, supply, erect and remove all formwork and falsework,
including all materials, equipment and labor necessary to form the cast-in-place concrete
structures and surfaces specified herein and on the drawings. Formwork shall be designed
in accordance with ACI 347.
All formwork shall be classed as temporary works of this specification shall apply.
Formwork shall be strong enough to withstand, without distortion, all pressures resulting
from placing and vibration of the concrete and shall be rigidly and accurately fixed in
position.
Formwork shall be securely fastened to prevent loss of mortar and surfaces in contact with
concrete shall be uniformly smooth and true with no local defects.
Provision shall be made for all required openings, offsets, recesses, and embedded parts
and all exposed concrete edges or corners shall have 25mm x 25mm chamfers unless
otherwise specified or directed by the Owner.
10.5.5.10.2
Form Ties
Form ties shall be metal rods or bolts to the approval of the Owner. Form ties shall not
leave irregular holes or lead to repair marks that would detract from the specified finishes.
After removal of the forms, embedded form ties shall be cut not less than 3 cm below the
formed face of the concrete, except where finish class F1 is permitted, in which case form
ties may be cut at the formed face.
10.5.5.10.3
Cleaning and Oiling of Forms
When the concrete is placed in the forms, the inside surfaces of the forms shall be free
from incrustations of mortar or other foreign materials. Before placing, the formwork
surfaces shall be oiled with a formwork oil of a proprietary brand approved by the Owner.
Oiling of forms shall not produce chemical deterioration or stains on the concrete surfaces.

Revision 1
Page 113 of 247

PECC3
10.5.5.10.4

Removal of Forms
Formwork shall not be disturbed until the concrete has hardened adequately. The
minimum time prior to removal of formwork shall be as specified in ACI 347, or as
directed by the Owner on the basis of site records and test results.
The Contractor shall give advance notice of intention to remove formwork and obtain the
approval of the Owner before proceeding.
10.5.5.10.5
Formed Finishes
Materials and methods for formwork shall be capable of achieving the following finishes
to formed surfaces, as defined in Clause 10.5.5.12.7.
Class of
Finish
Maximum Local Tolerances (mm)

Abrupt
Gradual
F1
-6, +6
-12, +12
F2
None
-6, +6
Finish F1 is a basic rough finish suitable for hidden or buried surfaces and shall apply to
formed surfaces for which no other finish is specified.
Finish F2 shall be suitable for surfaces permanently exposed to view. Formwork surfaces
shall impart a dense, even surface to the concrete with a regular pattern of horizontal and
vertical joints not less than 600 mm apart unless otherwise specified or directed.
10.5.5.10.6
Re-Use of Formwork
Re use of formwork shall be subject to the inspection of EVN and the following
requirements:
(a) Prior to re-use, formwork shall be carefully examined to assess requirements for
cleaning and repair necessary to achieve the specified concrete finishes. Holes from
bolts and ties shall be carefully plugged smoothly and flush with the form surface.
(b) Re-use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule for concrete placement
from the schedule obtainable if all forms were new and re-use of forms shall not
impart less structural stability to the formwork nor less acceptable finish or
appearance to the formed surface.

Revision 1
Page 114 of 247

PECC3

10.5.5.11 Steel Reinforcement

10.5.5.11.1
General
This section specifies requirements for the supply, fabrication and installation of steel bar
reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete, including all materials and measures necessary to
complete the reinforcement as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
10.5.5.11.2
Materials
The following reinforcing steel qualities in accordance with QCVN 07:2011/BKHCN or

equivalent shall be used.
Round Bars : Min. Yield Strength 300 MPa (TCVN 1651-1:2008 Grade CB300-T,
or JIS 3112 grade SD295)
Deformed Bars : Min. Yield Strength 400 MPa (TCVN 1651-2:2008 Grade CB400V, or JIS 3112 grade SD390)
Mesh Reinforcement: Min. Yield Strength 500 MPa (TCVN 1651-2:2008 grade
CB500-V, or JIS 3112 grade SD490 )
Wire for tying reinforcement shall be annealed iron wire of No. 16 gauge or heavier.
Bar supports, chairs and spacers shall be selected by the Contractor to maintain specified
concrete cover and avoid corrosion, subject to the Owner's approval.
10.5.5.11.3
Delivery and Storage
Reinforcement bars shall be delivered to the site properly color coded or tagged according
to size and length. When tagged, means shall be provided to maintain identification after
bundles are broken.
Reinforcement bars shall be stored clear of the ground and segregated by size, length and
type.
10.5.5.11.4
Fabrication
Prior to fabrication of steel reinforcement, the Contractor shall submit detailed construction
drawings, prepared in accordance with the ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Concrete Structures, for the approval of the Owner. Prior to installation of steel
reinforcement, the Contractor shall submit bar bending schedules for the inspection of the
Owner.
All fabrication shall be in strict accordance with the approved drawings and bending
schedules and shall meet the following fabrication tolerances:

Revision 1
Page 115 of 247

PECC3
Sheared length
Depth of truss bars
Stirrups, ties and spirals
Location of all other bends
10.5.5.11.5

25 mm
- 12 mm
12 mm
12 mm
Installation
Prior to installation, all loose mill scale, rust, oil, paint and any other coating which would
destroy or reduce bond between steel and concrete shall be removed.
All steel reinforcement shall be installed, positively secured and supported in strict
accordance with the approved drawings and bending schedules. Placing tolerances for
reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 117.
On completion of installation of steel reinforcement the Contractor shall notify the Owner
that it is ready for inspection. No reinforcement shall be covered up without the prior
10.5.5.12 Cast-in-Place Concrete

10.5.5.12.1
Preparation for Placing
All water, wood scraps, and other debris shall be removed from areas where concrete is to
be placed and the areas thoroughly cleaned to ensure proper placement and bonding of the
concrete. Forms shall be oiled and sub-grades damp, but not wet, when concrete is placed.
When fresh concrete is to be placed on set concrete, a 1.0 cm thick layer of mortar shall be
applied by brush on the dry surface before the fresh concrete is placed. The mortar shall
contain the same proportions of sand and cement as the concrete mix.
At construction joints, the concrete surface shall be roughened by air-water jet, after it has
reached its final set but not more than 12 hours after its placing was completed, so as to
expose the aggregate.
All equipment and materials required for the proper placing, vibrating, finishing and curing
of the concrete shall be at hand prior to the placing of concrete.
The Contractor shall notify the Owner when all preparations, as specified above, have been
completed and are ready for inspection. No concrete shall be placed without the prior

Revision 1
Page 116 of 247

PECC3
10.5.5.12.2

Transportation of Concrete
The Contractor shall provide equipment for conveying concrete from the mixer to the
forms without segregation or loss of ingredients and in an acceptable condition of
workability. The conveying equipment shall have sufficient capacity to complete the work
within the established schedule.
Transportation by truck mixers shall be permitted only when the mixers and their operation
are such that the concrete is uniform in consistency and grading throughout the mixing
batch. Any concrete retained in truck mixers requiring additional water to permit
satisfactory placing shall not be used.
In principle, transportation time of fresh concrete, which include the mixing time and
placing, shall be less than 1.5 hours..
10.5.5.12.3
Placing of Concrete
Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible to its final position and shall be placed in
layers not more than 30 cm thick. Concrete shall be placed at such a rate that it is at all
times plastic and will flow readily around reinforcement and embedded parts. Once
placing is started, it shall be a continuous operation until the lift is completed. The area of
placement shall not be more than that which can be completed in one pour in compliance
with this specification.
The time between placing of successive layers forming a lift shall be short enough to
permit a vibrator to penetrate the lower layer while the upper layer is being compacted.
The minimum time between completion of a lift and the commencement of placing of a
succeeding lift shall be 72 hours.
Pneumatic placing and pumping of concrete may only be used with the approval of the
Owner. In such a case, discharge lines shall be horizontal or inclined upwards. The
discharge end shall not be more than 3m from the point of placement and shall supply a
continuous stream of concrete without air pockets. Aluminum piping shall not be used.
During hot weather, special precautions, as directed or approved by the Owner, shall be
taken to ensure that the temperature of the concrete when it is placed does not exceed 30
degrees Centigrade. These may include, but shall not be limited to, the use of chilled
mixing water, cooling of aggregate or working at night.
Concrete shall not be placed in exposed areas during rain and, should it rain while placing
is in progress, the placed concrete shall be covered with vinyl or other impervious sheets.
Placing may be resumed only when rain stops well before initial set of the placed concrete
occurs. Otherwise, placing operations shall cease and the boundaries of the pour shall be
prepared as specified for construction joints.
Concrete shall not be placed under water except when specifically directed and authorized
in writing by the Owner. In such a case, placing shall be done from a bottom-discharging
watertight bucket or by termite pipe penetrating the previously placed concrete so that
Revision 1
Page 117 of 247

PECC3

fresh concrete is always deposited below the surface and the operation is continuous until
completion of the pour.
10.5.5.12.4
Compaction
Concrete shall be compacted by mechanical vibrators electrically or pneumatically driven.

The Contractor shall submit for approval of the Owner, specifications of compaction
vibrators, at least 30 days before the first concrete casting. They shall be slowly immersed
and withdrawn vertically at spacing of 30 cm to 50 cm, with vibration periods of 10 to 15
seconds for each penetration, and shall penetrate into the layer below. Vibrators shall not
come into contact with reinforcement or embedded parts.
Where immersion vibrators cannot be used, the concrete shall be compacted by form
vibrators, rigidly attached to the outside of the form, operating at not less than 8,000
impulses per minute.
10.5.5.12.5
Curing
Concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously moist for at least 7 days after placing. Initial
curing of exposed surfaces shall be performed by atomized water spray positioned so that
all surfaces to be cured are constantly moist, or by a continuous layer of burlap kept
constantly wet. Hand sprinkling shall not be used except in conjunction with the burlap
alternative.
Forms capable of moisture loss, such as plywood forms, shall be regularly sprinkled with
water to avoid loss of moisture from formed surfaces of the concrete.
When approved in writing by the Owner prior to application, a curing compound
complying with ASTM C309 may be used and shall be applied in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. The use of curing compounds may be disallowed
where tiling, painting or other special finishing operations are required, or for concrete
exposed to view where appearance is important.
10.5.5.12.6
Joints
Where shown on the drawings, or directed by the Owner, construction joints shall be
provided and preparation for these shall be in accordance with Clause 10.5.5.12.1 of this
specification. Where the Contractor proposes additional construction joints, he shall first
submit drawings and obtain the approval of the Owner.
Expansion joints shall be constructed only at the locations and in accordance with the
details shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Owner. The faces of the joint shall be
treated with two coats of asphaltic bitumen and the clearance between them shall not be
less than 50 mm. Expansion joints in slabs and beams shall be fitted with metal angles at

Revision 1
Page 118 of 247

PECC3

all corners and a top cover plate and, where specified or directed, shall be filled with
approved compressible joint filler and sealing compound.
Waterstop shall be extruded PVC of the sizes shown on the drawings, including all
necessary manufactured corner and junction pieces necessary to provide a continuous
system.
10.5.5.12.7
Finishes
Finishes for formed surfaces shall be class F1 or F2, as specified in Clause 10.5.5.10.5,
where abrupt irregularities shall mean offsets or fins caused by displaced forms and
gradual irregularities shall be deviations from a plane surface measured with a template 1.5
m long.
Finishes for unformed surfaces shall be class U1 or U3, for which irregularities shall be
defined as above except that gradual irregularities shall be measured with a template 3.0 m
long.
Finish U1 shall be achieved by screeding concrete surfaces to the required slopes and
grades and removing gradual irregularities exceeding 10 mm.
Finish U3 shall be achieved by screeding, mechanical floating and trowelling concrete
surfaces to the required slopes and grades, removing gradual irregularities exceeding 6
mm and finishing edges and joints with edging tools.
Where shown on the drawings, or directed by the Owner, special architectural concrete
finishes shall be provided as specified in Architectural Works, Technical Specifications of
this document.
10.5.5.12.8
Tolerances
The lines and levels for concrete structures shown on the Bid/Construction Drawings or
directed by the Owner shall be achieved to within the following tolerances:

Revision 1
Page 119 of 247

PECC3
Criterion

Height or Length
Maximum Tolerance (cm)
up to 3 m
0.5
3 m to 6 m
1.0
6 m to 15 m
2.0
15 m to 22 m
2.5
up to 3 m
0.5
3 m to 6 m
1.0
6 m to 15 m
2.0
6m
1.0
15 m
2.5
d) Thickness
All
0.5
e) T/G Pedestal (all criteria)
All
0.5
a) Vertical
b) Elevation
c) Lines in Plan
Any concrete structure which does not comply with the above tolerances shall be repaired
as specified, or removed and reconstructed if so directed by the Owner.
10.5.5.12.9
Repair of Defects
The Contractor shall submit proposals for the repair of defects, the extent of which shall be
clearly marked on the concrete surface, in accordance with the USBR Concrete Manual.
All materials and procedures shall be subject to approval by the Owner on a step-by-step
basis.
All abrupt and gradual irregularities outside the specified tolerances shall be corrected by
rubbing with carborundum stone or grinding and this shall be performed before the
unformed finishing procedures specified in Clause 10.5.5.12.7.
Honeycombed areas shall be cut back to sound concrete and, where necessary, the depth of
cutting shall be increased but shall not result in partial exposure of reinforcement. Edges
of repaired areas shall be undercut and all friable materials removed using a sharp chipping
tool.
Wherever possible, repairs shall be carried out while the concrete is still green and curing
shall be interrupted for the shortest time and smallest area practicable. Materials and
procedures specified or directed for repairs may include use of proprietary non-shrink
grout, epoxy or latex based bonding agents, epoxy compounds and cementious grout,
mortar and concrete.

Revision 1
Page 120 of 247

PECC3

10.5.5.13 Waterproofing and Damp-proofing

All concrete floor slabs in direct contact with the ground shall be provided with a moisture
vapor barrier of polyethylene sheet laid over the entire foundation prior to placing the
reinforcement with adequate overlaps and taped joints so as to provide a continuous,
moisture-proof membrane.
All buried reinforcement concrete surfaces in contact with soil, which are not required to
be water-tight, shall be protected with three coats of asphalt emulsion, in accordance with
ASTM specifications, to a total thickness of not less than 3 mm.
Waterproofing membrane or waterproofing crystalline concrete admixture treatment shall
be applied to exterior surfaces of all concrete structure below underground water level
which are required to be water-tight, and roof surfaces, or directed by the Owner.
Special care shall be taken when waterproofing or damp-proofing around openings, joints,
ducts and embedded parts and backfilling to underground structures shall not commence
until at least three days after the final waterproofing coat has been applied.
Prior to acceptance, all waterproofed floor and roof surfaces shall be given a 24 hour
flooding test by plugging all drains and building temporary dams to maintain a minimum
water depth of 25 mm at the highest point. After acceptance, a 12.5 mm mortar screed
shall be applied to the waterproof membrane, followed by a minimum of 50 mm of
concrete topping with filled and sealed joints at not more than 3.0 m centers.
Where specified or directed, and subject to the requirements of Clause 10.5.5.6, integral
waterproofing shall be applied by the addition of silicon paste to the concrete mix at the
rate of 5 liters of paste per cubic meter of concrete.
10.5.5.14 Field Tests

10.5.5.14.1
General
The Contractor shall perform tests, under the supervision and approval of the Owner, on
samples of concrete materials and fresh concrete ; and except as otherwise specified, such
tests shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide all equipment
and facilities such as a testing house, a compression testing machine, a constant
temperature water bath, molds for testing cylinders, etc. which are necessary for the
Contractor to perform the field tests specified hereto. Those equipment and facilities shall
be at the expense of the Contractor.
If any concrete materials or concrete work do not meet the specified requirements, the
Owner may immediately reject such materials or work, or may direct to carry out
additional tests before deciding whether to reject them.

Revision 1
Page 121 of 247

PECC3
10.5.5.14.2

Compression Tests
At least six (6) 150mm h 300mm test cylinders shall be made and tested for each
150 m3, or portion thereof, of each class of concrete placed in any one day. A compression
test shall be performed on each set of six (6) cylinders from one mixer batch and three (3)
cylinders will be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days. The compression test result shall be
the average of the strengths of the three 28 day specimens.
Each class of concrete shall be represented by at least five compression tests and shall meet
the following requirements:
(1) the average strength of any five consecutive tests shall be equal to, or greater than,
the specified strength.
(2) the strength of not more than one in any ten consecutive tests shall be less than the
specified strength.
10.5.5.14.3
Core Tests
When core tests are performed, they shall be tested saturated surface dry if the concrete
they represent shall be wet at any time in the completed structure and air dry if the concrete
they represent will be dry at all times. At least three representative cores shall be taken
from each member or area that is considered to be potentially deficient.
Concrete in the area represented by core tests shall be considered to be structurally
adequate if the average strength of each set of three cores is equal to at least 85% of the
specified strength and if no single core has a strength less than 75% of the specified
strength.
10.5.5.14.4
Other Tests
The Contractor shall perform the following tests for fresh concrete for each 150 cubic
meters, or portion thereof; of each class of concrete placed in any one day.
(a) Slump test (JIS A1101 or equivalent)
(b) Air content test (JIS A1128 or equivalent)
10.5.6 Foundation Piling

10.5.6.1 General
This clause covers the design, supply and transportation, fabrication, installation,
construction and testing of all piles required for foundations.
The Contractor shall, subject to the restrictions herein and the approval of the Owner,
select the type of pile which he considers to be most appropriate for the location and
Revision 1
Page 122 of 247

PECC3

ground conditions on the basis of technical suitability, economy, availability of materials

and equipment, ease of installation, rate of progress of construction and his experience in
the performance of similar works.
10.5.6.2 Design
10.5.6.2.1 General
The Contractor shall design all piles basically in accordance with the geotechnical data
shown on the Bid Drawings. Further detailed information of above mentioned geotechnical
investigations, as detailed borehole logs, the results of the geotechnical laboratory tests,
etc. will be supplied by the request of the Contractor.
If the Contractor is not confident that this geotechnical information is fully representative
of the ground conditions and entirely adequate for the detailed design of the piles for the
permanent works, he shall include an explicit statement to this effect in his bid. In that
event, the Contractor shall define such further geotechnical investigation which he
considers to be necessary, include the cost of such investigations and the scheduled time
for their execution in his Bid.
10.5.6.2.2 Codes and Standards
All piles shall be designed in accordance with relevant standards acceptable to the Owner,
shall also comply with all requirements of this section.
10.5.6.2.3 Design Calculations and Drawings
At least one (1) month for the following structures (Boiler Foundation, Turbine Building
including TG Foundation, Control Building, Main Transformer, CW Pump Station, Stack,
Jettys) and two (2) months for other structures prior to the commencement of piling, the
Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Owner detailed design calculations and
drawings together with a complete piling schedule showing the type, location, design
bearing capacity and proposed sequence of installation of all piles to be incorporated in the
permanent works.
He shall also submit for approval full details of the proposed method of installation, the
equipment to be used and the sources of supply of any pre-cast concrete or prefabricated
steel pipe material.
Approval of the Owner shall be subject to satisfactory pile loading tests, as specified
below. The Contractor shall revise and update the drawings and pile schedule, as and
when required by the Owner throughout the duration of the works.
10.5.6.2.4 Minimum Pile Spacing
The minimum spacing in plan between centers of adjacent piles shall be one meter or three
Revision 1
Page 123 of 247

PECC3

pile diameters, whichever is the greater.

10.5.6.2.5 Pile Group Action
Full allowance shall be made in the design for the action of closely spaced piles as a group
and the design capacity of individual piles in the group shall be reduced accordingly.
10.5.6.3 Initial Loading Tests

(a)
Initial pile load test
The design loading capacity of piles shall be confirmed by pile loading tests, as directed
by, and to the approval of the Owner. Minimum two(2) tests must be carried out each for
vertical and lateral modes and minimum one test must be carried out for uplift mode
separately for each capacity of pile proposed by the Contractor.
The type of loading test shall conform to ASTM specifications or equivalent, and the
number and locations of actual piles to be tested shall be designated by the Owner.
(b)
Routine pile load tests
The Contractor shall carry out the pile loading tests on routine piles by NDT (NonDestruction Test) methods in accordance with ASTM or approved equivalent standards
with a quantity of piles to be tested as required of applied standards but not less than 1% of
total piles, or 2 piles for each major building whichever is greater (applied for all type of
piles).
The location for testing shall be designated by Owner. All pile test and the recording of
readings shall take place under the supervision of Owner.
Failure of a test pile shall result in the testing of additional piles, the removal and
replacement of failed piles, the installation of additional piles, or such other measures as
Owner may required, all at the expense of the Contractor.
Test pile shall be loaded to at least twice the design load capacity of the pile. Deflection
readings shall be taken immediately before and after the addition of each increment of load
and at hourly intervals thereafter.
10.5.6.4 Piling Records
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of all pile installation, copies of which shall
be submitted to the Owner daily.
For all piles, these records shall include:
- pile type, size, and length
- pile number and location in the works
- final pile tip and top elevations

Revision 1
Page 124 of 247

PECC3

For driven piles the records shall also include:

- date and times of driving
- full details of driving and handling equipment
- number of blows per meter for the entire length of the pile and the number of blows
per 10 mm for the last 75 mm of driving
- the sequence of driving of each pile in a group of piles
- details of all interruptions in driving, or any other problems encountered.
For bored cast-in-place piles the records shall also include:
- date and times of drilling
- full details of drilling equipment
- details of soil strata encountered
- depth of drilling and elevation of bottom of drill hole
- details of bentonite mix and depuration plant
- date of placing of concrete
- details of all interruptions in drilling, depuration, placing of concrete, or any other
problems encountered.
10.5.6.5 Driven Piles

Pre-cast reinforced concrete pile (RC pile), Pre-cast pre-stressed reinforced concrete pile
(PC pile), or prefabricated steel pipe driven piles shall comply with the requirements of
this specification for concrete and structural steel work. They shall be in one full length
wherever practicable and the Contractor shall provide equipment of sufficient capacity to
handle and install them without cutting or splicing.
The Contractor shall protect all pre-cast or prefabricated piles from damage due to
excessive bending stresses, impact, abrasion or other causes during delivery, storage,
handling and driving and any pile so damaged shall be repaired or replaced, as directed by
the Owner.
Any pile which is lifted during the driving of adjacent piles shall be re-driven to the
10.5.6.6 Bored Cast-in-Place Piles
Bored cast-in-place concrete piles shall be installed by drilling with the use of bentonite
mud, placing of reinforcement steel bar cage, depuration of the bentonite and placing of
concrete by tremie pipe, or other method approved by the Owner.
The bentonite mud shall be produced by thoroughly mixing water, bentonite and such
additives as the Owner may approve to a uniform suspension of fines containing no lumps.
Revision 1
Page 125 of 247

PECC3

The concentration of bentonite shall range from a minimum of 4% to a maximum of 10%

by weight, according to the soil conditions encountered.
The depuration plant shall be capable of controlling and keeping to a minimum, the
percentage of suspended materials in the mud during the placing of concrete. It shall also
be capable of ensuring that, at the time of placing of concrete, the specific weight of the
mud to a depth of one meter from the bottom of the hole shall be 1.3 ton/m3 with a sand
content of 6% by volume.
The reinforcement steel bar cage, comprising vertical reinforcement with spirals or hoops,
shall be placed in the hole so that it is at least 100 mm from the bottom of the hole, with
spacers at the sides of the cage to maintain the specified concrete cover between the
outside of the cage and the sides of the hole.
Concrete shall comply with the general requirements of Clause 10.5.5d of this specification
with aggregate of maximum size 30 mm graded in accordance with ASTM C33 and a
slump between 150 and 200 mm.
10.5.6.7 Piles Near Existing Installations

Special precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to existing installations due to piling
operations.
No piles shall be driven within 10 meters of cast-in-place concrete which has been in place
for less than three (3) days.
10.5.6.8 Tolerances
All permanent piles shall be installed within 150 mm of their designated positions in plan
and the underside of the pile cap, as shown on the approved construction drawings. The
maximum inclination of any pile from its design center line shall be 1 in 75 and the top of
each pile shall be within 50 mm of its design level.
10.5.6.9 Inner Drilling

The Contractor shall perform drilling inside steel pipe piles to require depths in accordance
with the Specifications and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
During drilling, the optimum method and equipment type for the inner drilling work for
bearing rock stratum shall be selected upon thoroughly studying data such as boring. A
work plan shall be submitted to the Owner beforehand for approval.
Revision 1
Page 126 of 247

PECC3

The work shall be executed with greatest care not to damage the steel pipe, and pollution
control measures shall be taken in order that matter such as slime will not be directly
disposed of to the sea.
During drilling, the elevations of soil and rock surface inside steel pipe piles shall be
measured, and the data submitted to the Owner.
10.5.7
Sheet Piling
10.5.7.1 General
This clause covers the design, supply and transportation, fabrication, installation,
construction and testing of all pipe sheet piles, u-shape sheet piles, anchor piles and anchor
works.
The Contractor shall, subject to the restrictions herein and the approval of the Owner,
select the type of sheet pile which he considers to be most appropriate for the location and
ground conditions on the basis of technical suitability, economy, availability of materials
and equipment, ease of installation, rate of progress of construction and his experience in
the performance of similar works.
10.5.7.2 Design
10.5.7.2.1
General
The Contractor shall design all sheet piles basically in accordance with the geotechnical
data shown on the Bid Drawings. If the Contractor is not confident that this geotechnical
information is fully representative of the ground conditions and entirely adequate for the
detailed design of the sheet piles for the permanent works, he shall include an explicit
statement to this effect in his bid. In that event, the Contractor shall define such further
geotechnical investigation which he considers to be necessary, include the cost of such
investigations and the scheduled time for their execution in his bid.
10.5.7.2.2 Codes and Standards
All sheet piles shall be designed in accordance with relevant standards acceptable to the
Owner, shall also comply with all requirements of this section.
10.5.7.2.3 Design Calculations and Drawings
At least two (02) months prior to the commencement of sheet piling, the Contractor shall
submit for the approval of the Owner detailed design calculations and drawings together
Revision 1
Page 127 of 247

PECC3

with a complete sheet piling schedule showing the type, location, design bearing capacity
and proposed sequence of installation of all sheet piles. He shall also submit for approval
full details of the proposed method of installation, the equipment to be used and the
sources of supply of materials.
The Contractor shall revise and update the drawings and pile schedule, as and when
required by the Owner throughout the duration of the works.
10.5.7.3 Driven Sheet Piles and Anchor Piles

Driven piles shall comply with the requirements of this specification for structural steel
work. The Contractor shall provide equipment of sufficient capacity to handle.
The Contractor shall protect all piles from damage due to excessive bending stresses,
impact, abrasion or other causes during delivery, storage, handling and driving and any pile
so damaged shall be repaired or replaced, as directed by the Owner.
The interlocks shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly and sheet piles shall be driven
to the required line and level. Guide waling and/or other forms of control shall be used.
Any piles found to have deviated from the correct alignment or which are out of plumb by
more than the permissible deviation either longitudinally or transversely, out of clutch with
adjacent piles or insufficiently driven, will be liable to rejection.
10.5.7.4 Anchor Works

The Contractor shall carry out fabrication, transportation, painting, installation, adjustment
of anchor materials which including waling, tie-rods/cables, bolts, nuts, turn buckle, etc.
for anchor works of the sheet pile wall in accordance with the Specifications and
Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
Waling shall be installed on the level with designed height and tie-rod shall be installed at
right angles to sheet piles.
Prior to lay tie-rods or tie-cables under the ground, the Contractor shall carry out
thoroughly tension of tie-rods or tie-cables and tie up of tune buckles, bolts and nuts.
The Contractor shall notify the Owner when all preparation, as specified above, have been
completed and are ready for inspection. No backfill shall be carried out without the prior
Backfill of the tie-rod shall be taken greatest care of it, and the Contractor shall protect tiePart 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works
Revision 1
Page 128 of 247

PECC3

rods from any damage for the backfilling, if necessary.

10.5.8
Structural Steelworks
10.5.10.1 General
Work of this section includes the design, preparation of drawings and calculations, supply,
fabrication, assembly, erection and installation of all structural steelwork in accordance
with the requirements of the bid documents and drawings or as directed by the Owner.
10.5.10.2 Design
10.5.10.2.1
Codes and Standards
All design shall comply with the applicable codes and standards listed in Part 4 Section 1
and, in particular, with the AISC and AIJ codes, the AISC Handbook of Steel Construction
all local building codes or regulations.
10.5.10.2.2
Design Calculations and Drawings
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Owner detailed design calculations and
drawings as follows:
(a) Design calculation for each building.
(b) Working drawings showing the general arrangement of each structure, designation
and sizes of all members.
(c) Working drawings showing details and connections.
(d) Working drawings showing splice details.
10.5.10.2.3
Design of Connections
Joint eccentricities shall be taken into account and special consideration shall be given to
the design of connections for members subjected to torsion.
All bolted connections for structural members shall be designed as friction type
connections.
The use of rivets will not be permitted.
All connections subject to significant seismic loading shall be designed so as to develop
the full yield strength of the connected members prior to yield in the connecting materials.

Revision 1
Page 129 of 247

PECC3
10.5.10.2.4

Temporary Loads and Stresses
Full account shall be made in the design for all temporary loads and stresses which may
occur during fabrication, assembly, transportation or erection.
10.5.10.3 Materials
10.5.10.3.1
General
All steel shall meet the requirements of ASTM or equivalent unless specified or directed
otherwise.
The Contractor shall supply the Owner with certified manufacturers' mill tests for all
materials and structural components prior to delivery.
10.5.10.3.2
Plates and Bars and Structural Shapes
Materials for plates, bars and structural shapes shall comply with ASTM or equivalent as
10.5.10.3.3
Bolts
Bolted connections for structural members shall be friction type made with high strength
friction grip bolts which meet the requirements of ASTM or equivalent as approved by the
Owner. The bolts, except where the above standard conflicts with recommendations of the
manufacturer of the tension control (T.C.) bolts, shall be used in conjunction with T.C.
bolts.
With the exception of site connection for sheeting rails, purlins, handrails and similar
non-structural members for which black bolts may be used, and certain specified in-situ
welded connections, the site connections shall be joined with approved type of high
strength friction grip bolts.
10.5.10.3.4
Electrodes
Electrodes for metal arc welding shall comply with the requirements of relevant AWS
codes.

Revision 1
Page 130 of 247

PECC3

10.5.10.4 Test and Inspections

10.5.10.4.1
Inspection
The Contractor shall provide all facilities for the inspection of the work at all stages by the
Owner at the Contractor's works and those of his sub-contractors. All work shall be
subject to inspection before shipment to the site.
10.5.10.4.2
Notice
The Contractor shall give such reasonable notice to the Owner of the progress of the work
as will enable the inspection, examination and testing as required.
10.5.10.4.3
Samples
Samples of materials and workmanship to be employed in the Facilities may be called for
at any time by the Owner.
10.5.10.4.4
Work Tests
The Contractor shall arrange for all materials to be tested at the manufacturer's works and
when required in the presence of the Owner. When materials are obtained from a
supplier's stock, the Contractor shall,
(1) by means of identification marks stamped on the materials together with the
manufacturer's test certificate, show that such materials complies with the
requirements specified herein; or
(2) arrange for samples to be taken and tested to prove the requisite quality. Copies of
all test certificates shall be submitted.
10.5.10.4.5
Rejection
Notwithstanding compliance with Clause 10.5.10.4.4 nothing shall affect the right of the
Owner to reject materials found not suitable after delivery to the site.
10.5.10.4.6
Independent Analysis and Test
The Owner reserves the right to require independent analysis and tests on the materials by
an analyst or testing laboratory selected by him, in order to check the Facilities, analysis
and tests. For this purpose the Owner may take drillings for analysis and have pieces cut
out side by side with pieces subjected to test in the workshops. Should the comparison of
the result of any independent analysis or test be unsatisfactory, the materials represented
will be rejected. All incidental cost for the above shall be borne by the Contractor.

Revision 1
Page 131 of 247

PECC3

10.5.10.5 Fabrication
10.5.10.5.1
General
All structural steel, before and after fabrication, shall be flat, straight or true to shape and
free from twists within the specified tolerances.
10.5.10.5.2
Shop Drawings
Prior to the inspection of fabricated or assembled materials, the Contractor shall submit for
inspection of the Owner, detailed shop drawings showing all materials, fabrication details
and member weights.
Fabrication shall not commence until all shop drawings have been received, revised as
required and approved in writing by the Owner.
10.5.10.5.3
Identification
At all stages of fabrication, all structural steel shall be clearly identified, by grade, by color
marking or such other system as the Owner has approved or directed.
10.5.10.5.4
Cutting
Cutting may be by sawing, shearing, cropping or machine flame cutting. Manual flame
cutting shall be allowed only with written approval of the Owner.
10.5.10.5.5
Preparation
Edges shall be free from any defects or distortions which would adversely affect the
serviceability of the member. All burrs and similar defects shall be carefully removed.
The edges of flame-cut plates shall be machined to remove notches and heat affected
zones.
The abutting surfaces of joints which depend on contact for the transmission of load shall
be accurately prepared to butt over the full contact area. Steel base plates having a surface
area greater than one square meter shall be provided with 50 mm diameter grout holes.
10.5.10.5.6
Shop Welding
All shop welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.0 and all welding procedures shall
be subject to the approval of the Owner. All welds shall be visually examined in
accordance with AWS D1.1.
Revision 1
Page 132 of 247

PECC3

Splices in beams, webs of girders, girder flanges and tension butt splices shall be subject to
full radiographic examination in accordance with AWS D1.1.
Full penetration tee or corner joints and such other joints which are designated by the
Owner, shall be examined ultrasonically in accordance with AWS D1.1.
Flange to web fillet welds or beams or girders shall be examined by magnetic particle
methods in accordance with AWS D1.1 for at least ten percent of the length fabricated.
10.5.10.5.7
Holes for Fitted Bolts and Pins
Parts to be connected by fitted bolts and pins shall be tightly and securely clamped together
and the holes drilled through all the thicknesses in a single operation and subsequently
reamed to size after welding and all other fabrication procedures have been completed.
10.5.10.6 Assembly
10.5.10.6.1
General
Component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are not bent, twisted or
otherwise damaged and shall be prepared so that any specified camber is attained.
10.5.10.6.2
Holes for Fasteners and Pins
Holes for the assembly of built-up sections shall be drilled after the members have been
fabricated and all burrs shall be removed before assembly. All matching holes for
fasteners or pins shall register accurately one with another so that the fasteners can be
inserted freely through the assembled members in a direction perpendicular to the faces in
contact.
Drifting to align holes shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Members which
cannot be aligned for assembly without enlargement of the holes shall be rejected.
10.5.10.6.3
Bolted Connections
The joined parts of bolted connections shall be firmly drawn together and, where
necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to provide a satisfactory
bearing surface for bolt heads and nuts. The length of each bolt shall be such that, after
tightening, at least one complete thread projects beyond the nut and there is at least one
complete thread between the nut and the unthreaded portion of the shank.

Revision 1
Page 133 of 247

PECC3
10.5.10.6.4

Hollow Sections
Unless special corrosion protection is provided by other means, the interior of all hollow
members, whether structural or fabricated hollow sections, shall be sealed so as to prevent
the ingress of moisture.
Where so required by the design, the ends of circular hollow members may be flattened or
otherwise formed for connections provided that the change of section is gradual and the
method employed does not injure or deface the material.
10.5.10.6.5
Identification
Each steelwork assembly shall be clearly and distinctly tagged and marked before delivery
in accordance with an approved marking schedule to facilitate erection. The tags and
markings shall clearly identify the location of the assembly in the completed structure and
its relationship to other members and assemblies.
10.5.10.6.6
Protective Treatment
Surfaces which are not in contact, but which will be inaccessible after assembly, shall
receive the full specified protective treatment before assembly.
10.5.10.6.7
Inspection
Prior to delivery to the site of any fabricated or assembled materials, the Contractor shall
carefully check all items for compliance with the requirements of this specification and
shall confirm in writing to the Owner that this has been done.
At all stages of fabrication and assembly, the Owner shall have full access for inspection
and the performance of any additional checks or tests which he deems to be necessary.
10.5.10.6.8
Transportation
Prior to delivery to the site of any fabricated or assembled materials, the Contractor shall
submit, for the approval of the Owner, full details of the proposed method of
transportation, the proposed transportation route and the proposed delivery schedule.
The Contractor's transportation plan shall comply with all local regulations and by-laws
and the Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits or licenses required in connection
therewith.

Revision 1
Page 134 of 247

PECC3

10.5.10.7 Erection
10.5.10.7.1
General
Erection of structural steelwork shall comply with ASTM specifications, the AISC Code of
Standard Practice or equivalent. All structural steel shall be accurately erected true and
plumb on the foundations and to the elevations shown on the approved drawings.
10.5.10.7.2
Erection Drawings/Procedure
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Owner detailed erection drawings/
procedures.
The erection drawings/procedure shall show the sequence of erection of all structural steel
members and assemblies, details of all temporary supports and all information required by
the erection personnel and equipment.
The erection drawings/procedure shall clearly indicate all cases where erection loads and
stresses are critical to the design of a member and these shall have been considered in the
design in accordance with Clause 10.5.10.2.4.
Erection shall not commence until all erection drawings/procedure have been received,
revised as required and approved in writing by the Owner.
10.5.10.7.3
Storage
All steel materials prior to painting, fabrication and erection shall be kept clean and laid
out or handled in such manner as not to cause adverse effect or damage on materials.
Direct contact with cement, soil and other harmful objects shall not be allowed for all steel
materials.
10.5.10.7.4
Temporary Shoring and Bracing
Temporary shoring or bracing shall be used wherever necessary to accommodate all loads
and forces to which the structure may be subjected, including those due to erection
equipment and the operation thereof, and shall be clearly shown on the erection drawings.
Such shoring or bracing shall not be removed as long as it is required for safety and then
only with the approval of the Owner.
10.5.10.7.5
Alignment
As erection proceeds, all work shall be securely bolted to take care of all dead load, wind
and erection stresses, but final bolting shall not be done until the work has been properly
aligned.

Revision 1
Page 135 of 247

PECC3

Each part of a structure shall be aligned as soon as possible after it is erected. Members
shall not be permanently connected until the structure has been aligned, leveled, plumbed
and temporarily connected to ensure that they will not be displaced during the erection or
alignment of the remainder of the structure.
All column bases shall be set to the proper elevations on steel shims ready for grouting.
Wood wedges shall not be used.
The method of grouting the column bases shall be to the approval of the Owner and shall
be such as to ensure a complete uniform contact over the whole area of the steel base.
10.5.10.7.6
Field Welding
All field welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. The Contractor shall obtain the
approval of the Owner for all field welding procedures, including the welding process,
method, sequences, number and distribution of passes and current ranges, class and
diameter of electrodes and weld repair procedures.
The requirements for inspection of field welds shall be as specified for shop welds in
Clause 10.5.10.5.6.
10.5.10.8 Tolerances
Unless specified otherwise, the fabrication and assembly tolerances on all dimensions shall
be 2mm.
Compression members and beams, before erection, shall not deviate from straightness by
more than 1/1,000 of the length between points which are to be laterally restrained. Other
structural members shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1/500 of the overall
length, or 25mm, whichever is the greater.
The length of a compression member faced at both ends for bearing shall not deviate from
the intended length by more than 1 mm. For other structural members this tolerance
shall be + 0mm, -4mm and, for members such as trusses and lattice girders, shall apply to
the member as a whole.
After erection, the steelwork shall not be out of plumb over any distance by more than
5mm or 1/1,000 of the distance, whichever is the greater.
When two steel surfaces are required to be in contact in bearing, the maximum clearance
between the bearing surfaces shall be 1mm when the members in contact are aligned
within 1/1,000 of their combined length.

Revision 1
Page 136 of 247

PECC3

10.5.10.9 Painting
10.5.10.9.1
General
All paints shall be suitable for use in humid tropical coastal environment, and shall be to
the approval of the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary information to the
paint manufacturer to enable him to supply the most suitable paint complying with the
requirements of this Specification.
The color of all paints shall be selected by the Owner.
The Contractor shall, when required, provide sample panels 600 mm by 300 mm showing a
150 mm wide band of each coat forming the paint schemes being used at the Site for
identification and control.
10.5.10.9.2
Material
Paint materials shall be in compliance with QCVN 16-5:2011/BXD or equivalent
standards, and subjected to Owners approval
All paint is to be supplied fresh in sealed containers not exceeding 20 liters capacity. A
sufficient supply of all paint is to be maintained on site, but no paint is to be used which
has been stored for longer than 06 months on site, or manufactured longer than 12 months.
The date of arrival at site shall be marked on each container.
The paint systems, priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats for any one surface shall
be obtained from the same manufacturer. Paints for the shop coat may be obtained from
elsewhere with the Owner's approval.
10.5.10.9.3
Paint and Paint Schedule
Steel Structure, pipe rack, support structure (secondly steel structure) shall be painted
according to ISO 12944 C5(M) for outdoor steel structure and ISO 12944-5 C4 for indoor
steel structure.
Paint schedule of steelwork shall be referred to the schedules of "Indoor Steel Structure"
and "Outdoor Steel Structure" indicated in the Part 4 Section 1.
10.5.10.9.4
Storage of Paint
Paint shall be stored in sealed containers in a lock-up store where it is not exposed to
extreme temperatures. Any special storage conditions recommended by the manufacturer
shall be observed.
Paint which has not been used within the 'shelf life' period specified on the containers or
within 6 months of the date of manufacture, whichever is lesser, shall be replaced.

Revision 1
Page 137 of 247

PECC3

Paint from painters' kettles shall be returned to store at the end of each working period
where it shall be kept in a sealed container. Before it is reissued for use it shall be
thoroughly mixed and no fresh paint or thinners shall be added.
10.5.10.9.5
Surface Preparation
Before paint is applied to any surface other than galvanized surfaces, the appropriate
surface preparation as described below shall be carried out.
(1) Blast Cleaning
Blast cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with the SSPC or equivalent approved
Standards/Codes. The abrasive used for blasting shall be free from contamination and any
recovered material shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner before re-use. The
maximum amplitude (peak to through) of the blast cleaned surface shall not exceed 0.1
mm. Surfaces shall be protected within 4 hours of having been blast cleaned. A sample
blast cleaned steel panel measuring not less than 150 mm x 150 mm x 6 mm adequately
protected by sealed clean polyethylene wrapping shall be submitted to the Owner for
approval before any work is put in hand. The approved sample shall then be retained by
the Owner for comparison with the prepared steelwork.
If site blasting is necessary, it shall be performed in enclosed area, subject to the approval
of the Owner.
(2) Mechanical Cleaning
Mechanical cleaning shall be carried out by power driven tools, such as carborundum
grinding discs, chipping hammers and needle guns, followed by steelwire brushing and
dusting to remove all loosened materials. Excessive burnishing of the metal through
prolonged application of rotary wire brushes shall be avoided. Surfaces shall be protected
within 4 hours of having been mechanically cleaned.
(3) Painted Surface
Painted surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust immediately prior to the application further
paint. Any loose paint and dust shall be removed.
10.5.10.9.6
Surface Treatment
Steelwork surfaces which will have concrete cast against them shall be left unpainted. The
surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose rust, millscales and surface
contamination.
Any paint within the periphery of the contact surfaces of friction type connections shall be
fully removed, and shall be cleaned by hand wire brushing prior to assembly.
Surfaces to be permanently in contact shall, immediately after blasting cleaning and prior
to being assembled together, receive a priming coat except when these surfaces are to be
Revision 1
Page 138 of 247

PECC3

jointed by welding or High Strength Friction Grip bolts.

10.5.10.9.7
Application of Paint
All paint shall be supplied from the store to the painters ready for application, and the
addition of thinners or of any other material shall be thereafter prohibited. Any instruction
given by the paint manufacturer shall be strictly followed.
All painting shall be carried out by skilled painters under competent supervision.
The surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified in Clause 10.5.10.9.5, and shall be
perfectly dry, clean and free of all grease and salts before painting commences.
Paint shall not be applied under the following conditions:
(1) When the ambient temperature falls below 4C;
(2) During rain, fog or mist;
(3) When condensation has occurred or is likely to occur on the steel.
Each coat of paint shall be applied by the method specified to produce a continuous film of
paint of uniform and even thickness. As soon as the first priming coat has dried an extra
strip coat of paint shall be applied by brush to edges, corners, crevices, bolt heads and
welds, using paint of a similar composition to the priming coat but in a contrasting shade.
Successive coats shall have different shades for identification and each coat shall be
thoroughly dry before the application of a further coat.
The total dry paint film thickness of the paint system on bare steel surfaces and on metal
coated surfaces shall be not less than the value specified for the respective schemes in
Clause 10.5.10.9.3. The dry paint film thickness shall be measured by Elcometer or other
instruments approved by the Owner.
In order to obtain the dry film thickness specified the Contractor shall ensure that the
coverage rate given by the paint manufacturer will enable this thickness to be attained.
No paint shall be used after the expiration of the 'pot-life' stipulated by the manufacturer,
and paints of limited 'pot-life' shall not be mixed with fresh paint or have thinners added to
them.
The Contractor shall provide and use sufficient number of drop cloths, covers, tarpaulins
and other screens to protect adjacent surfaces and shall remove all spatter and stains from
such surfaces. The Contractor shall also protect his own work. Any damage to adjacent
work or any part of the premises due to painting carelessness or accidental performance of
the Contractor shall be repaired or made good at the Contractor's expense.
The term 'Site Painting' in these Specifications shall mean painting after erection.

Revision 1
Page 139 of 247

PECC3
10.5.10.9.8

Storage and Repair of Painted or Coated Steelwork
Painted fabricated steelwork which is to be stored prior to erection shall be kept clear of
the ground and shall be laid out or stacked in an orderly manner that will ensure no pools
of water or dirt can accumulate on the surfaces. Suitable packings shall be laid between
the layers of stacked materials.
Areas of paint which have been damaged during handling, storing, loading and off-loading,
transportation, erection and construction shall be cleaned to bare metal, or metal coating
where this has been applied, and the edges of the undamaged paint beveled with sandpaper.
Where a metal coating has been damaged the affected area shall be rubbed down to remove
excessive roughness, cleaned and an additional coat of approved primer applied.
The full specified painting system shall then be reapplied and the new paint shall overlap
the existing paint by at least 50 mm all round the affected part.
10.5.9
Miscellaneous Steelworks
10.5.9.1 General
This specification covers the performance of all work in connection with miscellaneous
steelwork, including, but not limited to, handrails, ladders, stop logs, pit and trench covers,
hatch openings, embedded plates, conduits and pipes and various items fabricated for
special purposes, all complete with anchoring devices, bolts and fastenings. The
Contractor shall furnish details and materials, fabricate, assemble, install, test and paint all
miscellaneous steel work.
10.5.9.2 Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Owner complete manufacturer's shop
and erection drawings of all miscellaneous steelwork items showing general arrangements,
dimensions, weights, fabrication and assembly methods, associated hardware, installation
procedures and anchorage details.
10.5.9.3 Materials
All structural steel items such as ladders, hatch openings, pit and trench covers, embedded
plates, caisson cutting edges, etc., shall comply with SS400 (JIS G 3101) or approved
equal.

Revision 1
Page 140 of 247

PECC3

Plain style steel grating and steel checkered plate shall comply with ASTM standards or
approved equal.
10.5.9.4 Workmanship
All work shall be executed by skilled technicians and all workmanship and materials shall
be subject to the approval of the Owner. All metal work shall be carefully and accurately
assembled in the most satisfactory manner.
All items shall be carefully assembled and the component parts shall be well secured
together by welding or with screws, bolts or rivets, concealed as far as possible. All joints
shall be filed, milled or machined as necessary to achieve close and matching connections.
All frames shall be provided with suitable bracing to maintain alignment during shipping.
Members shall not be overstressed during the process of erection and hammering likely to
injure or distort the work shall not be permitted. Built-up work shall be assembled
completely at the shop accurately finished and section matchmarked for field erection.
The Contractor shall furnish all welding rods required for field welds and all anchors,
temporary bracing, tie rods, shims, erection bolts and other miscellaneous materials
required during erection.
10.5.9.5 Embedded Metalwork

All embedded metal work shall be accurately set in place at the time the concrete is placed,
or recesses shall be left in the concrete and the metal work placed, anchored and grouted in
place after the structural concrete has set.
Grout shall consist of aggregates, sand, cement and water in proportions established by the
Contractor to the approval of the Owner. Forms shall be used for grouting whenever
necessary. Grout shall fill all spaces of recesses with no voids. After grout has hardened,
any visible wedges shall be removed and exposed joints neatly finished to a smooth dense
surface.
Where it is impracticable to install anchors and anchor bolts for ladders, stairways, railing,
door frames or other miscellaneous work before concrete is placed, the Contractor shall
drill holes in the concrete and install expansion bolts to the approval of the Owner.
10.5.9.6 Welding
Welding shall be in accordance with the relevant AWS Code or equivalent.

Revision 1
Page 141 of 247

PECC3

All welding shall be continuous along the entire line of contact, except where tack welding
is expressly approved. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth.
No welding of galvanized steel shall be permitted, except in exceptional cases approved by
the Owner. In that event, the welded portion of the galvanized steel shall be coated with
anti-corrosion primer and steel paint to ensure its durability.
10.5.9.7 Painting and Galvanizing

Miscellaneous steelwork shall be painted as specified in the Part 4 Section 1.
Painting of galvanized steel items shall be as directed or approved by the Owner.
Galvanizing of steel shall be in accordance with ASTM A-123 with a zinc coating of not
less than 600 grams/m.
10.5.9.8 Steel Gratings and Supports

Gratings shall be one-piece, all-welded construction integral formation at bar junctions and
must assure full strength without rivets or slots. Plain type grating shall have rectangular
grids with clean lines to permit unimpeded flow and afford maximum open area.
Gratings shall be of galvanized steel, galvanized after fabrication. Grating supports shall
be fitted carefully into place and leveled to prevent rocking or movement under traffic.
Grating supports shall be painted under same category/schedule with based structural
steelworks.
10.5.9.9 Steel Stairs

Stair work shall be furnished and installed with all stringers, treads, risers, hangers,
railings, kick plates. All treads and bolts/nuts/washers shall be hot-dipped galvanized., and
other items shall be painted under same category/schedule with based structural steelworks
Members shall be punched, drilled and tapped as required for installation of other, applied
or abutted materials.
Stair construction framed to structural steel supports shall follow the erection of the
steelwork as closely as possible and shall be securely bolted to the steel framing. All stair
work shall be fully protected by temporary board treads.

Revision 1
Page 142 of 247

PECC3

10.5.9.10 Access Ladders and Handrails

Pipes for all handrails and ladders must be of 32mm nominal bore MS material (medium
class). It must then be galvanized to a minimum of 610gm/m2 for operating floor or
outdoor application.
Adequate access must be provided to allow satisfactory and safe operation and
maintenance of all buildings and equipment. The requirements for equipment and crane
access, access to manholes, pits and trenches, maintenance access and staircase
access to the upper floors of buildings must be considered during the layout planning
study. Safety barriers and handrails must be provided wherever necessary to meet the
requirements of the adopted standards.
In any case the design superimposed loading for handrails or access ways must not be less
than 2.5kN per linear meter. Surface finish to access ladders, stairs and handrails must be
compatible with the design environment and must give satisfactory performance without
deterioration during the design life and must have a non-slip surface on walking areas.
10.5.9.11 Stop Log
10.5.9.11.1
General
The Contractor shall design steel stop logs in accordance with the Specifications and
Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner, and fabrication and installation
shall be carried out after such approval of the Owner has been obtained.
The Contractor, in preparing the design, shall follow the Japanese Technical Standards for
Gates and Penstocks (published by the Gates and Penstocks Association of Japan), JIS, or
equivalents approved by the Owner.
10.5.9.11.2
Design Condition
Allowable Stress
Steel
50% increase over Clause 1, Article 12, Chapter 2, the Japanese Technical
Standards for Gates and Penstocks, or equivalent
Concrete
Allowable compressive stress

Allowable shear stress
Allowable bond stress
10.5.9.11.3
Gate Leaf
60 kgf/cm
6 kgf/cm
6 kgf/cm
Stop logs shall be lowered and raised by truck crane (10 t hoisting capacity). It shall be
divided into individual sizes and weights for easy handling and interchangeability.

Revision 1
Page 143 of 247

PECC3

The main parts of the stop logs shall be of sound construction, have ample watertight
structure, and be sufficiently capable of withstanding the design water pressure.
The principal specifications shall be as follows:
Pump Room Stop Log
Type
Quantity
Specifications
Main girder deflection

10.5.9.11.4
Steel stop log

2 sets
Design load
Hydrostatic pressure
Design still water level
E.L. +4.00 m
Watertightness system Three-face watertightness
Not more than 1/600 of span under design load
Lifting Beam
Lowering and raising of stop logs shall be done by using a lifting beam.
The lifting beam shall be constructed such that it can be attached to the truck crane, and
can also be easily attached and released to the stop logs.
Rotating parts, hooks, etc. of the attachment and detachment mechanism which may
corrode shall use stainless steel.
10.5.9.11.5
Gate Guide
Gate guides shall be rigid, fit well with the gate leaf and safely transmit design load acting
on the gate leaf without any trouble. Stainless steel shall be used for gate sheet surfaces
where water-tightness is required and the guide shall be smoothly finished by a machine.
The quantities required shall be as indicated below.
Pump Room
10.5.9.11.6
three (3) sets
Painting
Base treatment shall be by blasting as approved by the Owner and of quality satisfying the
requirements of American SSPC-SP10 standards or equivalent. Epoxy-zinc primer shall
be applied immediately after completion of this base treatment, with a film thickness of 40
.
Finish painting shall be performed with tar epoxy resin paint specified under Class 1 of JIS
K 5664 or an equivalent product. A minimum of two coats shall be applied with the
finished film thickness to be not less than 200 .
Revision 1
Page 144 of 247

PECC3

The amount of thinner to be used in diluting the paint shall be in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's specification approved by the Owner.
Stainless steel for water-stops and parts to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted.
10.5.9.11.7
Inspection
The Contractor shall perform the following inspections in the presence of the Owner.
The items to be inspected shall be appearance and dimension, painting (film thickness,
pinhole, appearance) and completion inspection. The places, time, and contents of the
inspection shall be subject to approval of THE OWNER.
10.5.10
Condenser Cooling Water Pipelines
10.5.10.1 General
The Contractor shall carry out fabrication, transportation, painting, installation, adjustment,
testing, and inspection of pipelines and their accessories for the condenser cooling water
facilities in accordance with the Specifications and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as
10.5.10.2 Material
(a)
Steel Pipeline
Steel for the pipelines shall be SS41, SM41, SM50 of JIS G 3101, or equivalent.
Other materials used for the work shall meet the requirements mentioned in Clause
10. 4 of this specification.
Contractor shall submit mill certificates issued by the manufacturers of the steel and
other materials to the Owner. In the event the Owner deems it especially necessary,
the Contractor shall perform materials tests at his own expense.
(b)
Manhole
All manholes shall be of flanged-joint construction with flanges of 5 kgf/cm2, and
nominal diameter 1,000 mm according to JIS B 2210 or equivalent.. Manhole covers
shall be SS 41 in JIS G 3101 or equivalent, with bolts and accessories of stainless
steel with galvanic isolation.

Revision 1
Page 145 of 247

PECC3

10.5.10.3 Tolerances in Measurements

Tolerances in dimensions of the parts of a pipe shall be the following unless otherwise
directed:
Pipe thickness:
According to the tolerances in dimensions in JIS G 3106 or
JIS G 3101 or equivalent.
Pipe circumferential length: 0.25% of design circumferential length
10.5.10.4 Fabrication
10.5.10.4.1
(a)
Welding
Welding Method
Welding shall be performed after the approval of the Owner regarding welding
conditions (groove shape, preheating temperature, combination of core wire and flux,
type of welding rod, rod diameter, heat input, welding current, voltage, speed).
The method of welding shall be arc welding (manual welding) or submerged arc
welding (automatic welding), and in case other welding methods are employed, they
shall be to the approval of the Owner.
Manual welding shall be performed in a flat position and overhead welding shall be
avoided whenever possible. In case of multiple pass welding, slag, spatter, etc., shall
be completely removed after each pass, with the next pass made after cleaning by
scraper.
Longitudinal joints shall be staggered so that adjacent joints will not be in a single
straight line.
(b)
Welder
Any welder performing manual welding shall have passed the tests for A-2F, 2V, 20
specified in JIS Z 3801,"Standard Qualification Procedure for Welding Technique,"
or a person whose name is submitted to the Owner and recognized by the Owner as
possessing equivalent skill.
(c)
Welding Rod
Welding rod for manual welding shall be used within 2 hours after removal from
container.
Welding rod which has been in the open air for more than 2 hours shall not be used
unless re-dried.

Revision 1
Page 146 of 247

PECC3
10.5.10.4.2
(a)
(b)

Painting
General
Painting shall be performed duly taking into account the effects of turbulent flow due
to irregularly shaped parts.
The Contractor shall submit a painting plan as designated below and obtain the
(i) Painted sample
(ii) Method and degree of base treatment
(iii) Brand of sheathing material and list of components
(iv) Painting method
Painting of Steel Pipelines
Painting of pipelines shall be done on both inner and outer surfaces.
(i)
Inner Surface Painting

a) Method and Thickness of Painting
Painting Step
Content of Work
Base preparation Shot-blasting or Sand-blasting

Inner
surface Spraying or Centrifugal application
painting
Brush painting (Field welding portion)
Number of
Coats
Thickness
(mm)
Depending on the standard

specification of the product used
Note) Inner surface painting: Adequate painting in accordance with the Painting
Schedules in Part 4 Section 1.
(ii)
Outer Surface Painting

Method and Thickness of Painting

Revision 1
Page 147 of 247

PECC3
Painting Step
Base preparation
Content of Work
Shot-blasting or Sand-blasting
Outer
surface
under-painting
Base preparation
Number of Coats
Thickness
(mm)

Shot-blasting or Sand-blasting
Outer surface over- Machine painting

painting
Glass cloth

Wrapped by machine
Whitewash

2
Note) Outer surface under-painting and outer surface over-painting: Adequate painting in
accordance with the Painting Schedules in Part 4 Section 1.
The glass cloth shall be of the specifications below or equivalent.
Item
Specifications
Alkali content (%)
Not more than 15
Texture
Plain wave
Thickness (mm)
0.15 0.02
Thread count
70 6 (JIS R 3413)
Diameter of single filament ()
9 1.8 or 12 1.8
Number of fibers (per cm)
Not less than 7
Tensile strength (longitudinal, transverse) (kg/15 Not less than 20

mm)
10.5.10.5 Installation
The Contractor shall prepare an installation work plan including relations with other
works, transportation, sequence and method of installation, field joints, prevention of
deformation during installation for approval by the Owner.
In case of inner-lined steel pipe, paint, rust, oil, etc. at surfaces to be embedded in concrete
shall be removed thoroughly before placement, and shall be provided with supports to
prevent being deformed during concrete placement.

Revision 1
Page 148 of 247

PECC3

10.5.10.6 Test and Inspection

10.5.10.6.1
General
The Contractor shall perform the tests and inspections mentioned below. The Owner shall
witness these tests and inspections when deemed necessary, and he may direct the
performance of tests and inspections other than those mentioned below, and the Contractor
shall comply with the instructions of the Owner. All expenses required for the tests and
inspections shall be borne by the Contractor.
10.5.10.6.2
Items of Tests and Inspections
(a)
Appearance Inspection
As per Clause 10.5.10.3.
(b)
Material Tests
Submittal of mill certificates of the steel manufacturer may be substituted for
materials tests. When deemed necessary by the Owner, materials tests shall be
performed at the expense of the Contractor.
(c)
Radiographic Inspection of Weld

The inspection shall be made by radiographic tests according to JIS Z 3104-1968,
"Methods of Radiographic Test and Classification of Radiographs for Steel Welds"
or equivalent methods.
(i)
Scope of Application
This method shall be applied to inspection of butt welds of pipe shells.
Sampling inspection of other parts may be performed when deemed necessary
by the Owner.
(ii)
Radiographic Inspection
Radiographs of welded portions shall be taken by the Contractor. In case a
third party is employed to perform the radiographic inspection the approval of
the Owner shall be obtained.
(iii) Submittal of Radiograph, Evaluation, Possession of Film

The radiographs shall be submitted to the Owner who shall inspect same to
judge the workmanship of the weld. The radiographs shall not be returned to
the Contractor.
(iv) Location of Inspection
The inspection shall be a sampling inspection. The location of sampling will
be directed by the Owner. The radiographic inspection shall not be less than 5
percent of the entire weld length.
Revision 1
Page 149 of 247

PECC3
(v)

Criteria for Evaluating Radiograph

The criteria shall be Grade 2 in the JIS specifications or other equivalent
standards.
(vi) Evaluation of Inspection

a) In the event the first sampling inspection is rejected, two radiographs shall
be taken adjacent to the two ends of the first sampling.
b) In the event the second inspection is rejected, further adjacent weld lines
shall be radiographed.
For a lot where the third radiographs are accepted, the defective parts up to
the second radiographs shall be repaired, and inspection shall be carried
out on the entire length repaired.
c) In the event the third inspection is rejected, the entire lot shall be
considered as unacceptable and the entire line shall be inspected by
radiograph after all defective parts are repaired.
d) When the entire weld line has been inspected and defective locations have
all been repaired, radiographs shall be retaken for all of these locations.
(vii) Re-welding
Repair of defective welding at the same location shall be limited to two times.
Suitable measures shall be taken such as to completely remove the heataffected zone and to re-fabricate the groove, after which welding shall be done.
(viii) Method of Taking Radiograph and Others
The method of taking radiographs, films, etc. shall be subject to approval of the
Owner.
In taking radiograph, the location shall be clearly marked with lead strips or
other materials to enable accurate collation between location and film.
(d)
Painting Inspection
(i) Paint
Paint shall be tested on its heat resistance, softening point, penetration,
abrasion, salt water, low temperature, impact resistance, peeling, absorption,
adherence, etc. The test results along with the materials shall be submitted to
the Owner for approval before application.
(ii)
Pinhole Inspection
Pinhole inspection of inner surface and outer surface after wrapping with glass
cloth shall be performed using a pinhole detector after completion of painting.
The voltage for inspection shall be as approved by the Owner.

Revision 1
Page 150 of 247

PECC3

(iii) Separation Inspection

After completion of painting of the outer surface, the painted surface shall be
lightly tapped to inspect if separation has occurred. If paint at any part
separates from the steel surface, the coat shall be peeled in accordance with the
directions of the Owner, repainted, and re-inspected.
(iv) Paint Film Thickness Inspection
The thickness of the paint film shall be inspected by electromagnetic microthickness gauge.
(v)
10.5.11
Peeling Inspection
When deemed necessary by the Owner, peeling inspection shall be carried out.
Repair of the peeled area shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Corrosion Protection Work
10.5.11.1 General
The Contractor, prior to performance of work, shall submit to the Owner for approval a
work plan, including among others materials to be used for corrosion protection work, test
results of the materials, location of attachment, and method of execution.
10.5.11.2 Cathodic Protection

Cathodic protection for steel pipe pile shall be by a sacrificial system using aluminum alloy
anodes for cathodic protection of generated currents and shall have a service life of 30
years.
For potential measurement, 16 mm reinforcing bars shall be installed at specified locations
of the steel pipe pile, and connected to exposed stainless steel terminals of the
measurement devices which shall be installed in terminal boxes on the concrete slab.
Test pieces shall be suspended in sea water at specified locations with leash wires
connected to the stainless steel terminals in the terminal boxes on the concrete slab.
The potential of a steel pipe pile provided with cathodic protection shall be not more than 770 mV in terms of saturated calomel reference electrode potential.
10.5.11.3 Cement Mortar Lining

Revision 1
Page 151 of 247

PECC3
10.5.11.3.1

General
Cement covering is the filling of cement mortar between the fiber glass reinforced resin
(FRP) cover and the body to be protected.
The corrosion prevention shall be applied from EL -2.43 m to the bottom of girder
concrete, and FRP cover shall not be less than 7 cm in the concrete.
Storage, transport, and construction of FRP cover shall be made with due care to prevent
flaw, deformation, and other damages.
The FRP cover fixing metal shall be embedded in girder concrete with sufficient clearance
from the bottom surface.
Before installation of FRP cover, the surface of steel pipe piles shall be cleaned
satisfactory to adhesion of mortar by removing seaweeds, etc. Mortar shall be poured with
due care to prevent seawater to mix into mortar.
10.5.11.3.2
FRP Cover
The FRP cover shall be fabricated by laminating unsaturated polyester resin in compliance
with JIS K6919 and glass fibers in compliance with JIS R3412 and JIS R3411, or
equivalent and shall be homogeneous in quality and free from mixing of foreign matter,
defect, crack, etc.
This cover shall also be durable over a long period against weather, sea conditions,
seawater, chemical components of cement, and stock caused by floating objects on the sea
surface.
Dimensions and strength of the FRP cover shall comply with the following specifications.
Item
Thickness of FRP cover
Specification
Not less than 4.5 mm
Distance between outer side of steel pipe Not less than 5.0 cm
pile and FRP cover inner surface
Bending strength Circumferential Axial
Not less than 2,000 kgf/cm2

Tensile strength Circumferential Axial

Not less than 500 kgf/cm2
Tensile elastic module Circumferential Not less than 1.1 105 kgf/cm2
Axial
Revision 1
Page 152 of 247

PECC3

Not less than 5.5 104 kgf/cm2

Bending strength, tensile strength, and tensile elastic module tests shall comply with JIS
K6919 or equivalent standard. Spacers shall be installed in required quantities to maintain
the distance between the FRP cover and steel pipe and to prevent FRP cover and mortar
from being vibrated by waves until mortar sets completely. The spacer material shall be
same as that for FRP cover.
The seal member shall be provided in the bottom and on the side to prevent entry of
seawater after installation of the FRP cover. The seal member shall have sufficient strength
to carry the mortar weight while preventing entry of seawater into the FRP cover even
under forces applied by mortar load and waves. The seal shall be made from resin or
rubber of a quality same as that for the FRP cover and shall have satisfactory resistance
against seawater, cement chemical components, etc.
The color of FRP cover shall be as instructed by the Owner.
10.5.11.3.3
Mortar Grout
The cement used for mortar grout shall comply with Clause 5.5.3. Mixing shall be by
weight according to the standard ratio as shown below.
Cement : Sand : Water = 1 : 1 : 0.5
Water to be used for mortar grout shall comply with Clause 5.5.5. In no case seawater
shall be used.
Admixture to be used for mortar grout shall be the expander. Its name, specifications and
application quantity shall be approved by the Owner. Foaming type expander consisting
mainly of aluminum power shall not be used.
10.5.11.4 Polyethylene Sheathing

10.5.11.4.1
General
The Contractor shall execute polyethylene sheathing of steel pipe piles of the Coal Jetty
and steel sheet pile / steel pipe sheet pipe of the Condenser Cooling Water intake wall
according to the Specification and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the
Owner. Polyethylene cover as referred herein means sheathing of polyethylene containing
black carbon.
Polyethylene sheathing shall be applied at the factory.
Revision 1
Page 153 of 247

PECC3

Application in site shall not be permitted except additional coating when the Contractor
fails to drive the pile up to the elevation he assumed previously.
The sheathe thickness shall not be less than 2.5 mm.
10.5.11.4.2
Materials
(a)
General
Polyethylene shall have sufficient durability against weather, marine phenomena,
sea water, and shock by floating objects on the sea water surface. Before use of
polyethylene, the Contractor shall submit the test results for approval of the Owner.
(b)
Quality of polyethylene
The quality of polyethylene shall comply with the following specifications, or
equivalent.
Item
(c)
Test method
Characteristic value
Density
JIS-K6760
0.93 g/cm3-0.96 g/cm3
Carbon content
2.5% 0.5%
Tensile strength at rupture
JIS-K6760
not less than 180 kgf/cm
Elongation ratio
JIS-K6760
not less than 500%
Hardness
JIS-G3469
not less than 45 (Shore D)
Color
Black
Shock resistance
ASTM G14 (20C)
not less than 2 kg-m
Insulation resistance
DIN 30670 (20C)
not less than 108 ohm-m
Environmental stress cracking test
ASTM D1693
no crack after 500 hours
Brittle temperature
ASTM D746
not more than -60C
Adhesive
The Contractor shall submit a document giving the specifications and
characteristics of adhesive to be used for polyethylene sheathing for approval of
the Owner before use.

Revision 1
Page 154 of 247

PECC3
10.5.11.4.3

Inspection
(a)
General
Prior to start of inspection, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the inspection
plan describing the content, purpose, and schedule of inspection. The Owner may
witness the inspection and the contractor shall provide all facility and cooperation.
All costs necessary for inspection shall be borne by the contractor.
(b)
Sheathing and appearance inspection

The inspection of the sheathing shall be made on all items and shall satisfy the values
given in Clause 10.5.11.4.2.
The appearance inspection shall be made on all items without harmful defect to
corrosion protection.
(c)
Sheathe thickness inspection

The sheathe thickness measurements shall be taken at 12 points, including three
points (top, bottom, and center) in longitudinal direction and four points in a
circumferential direction on each pile, where there is no overlap of sheathing, by
using an electromagnetic fine thickness meter. The minimum thickness shall not be
less than 2.5 mm.
(d)
Pinhole inspection
The pinhole inspection shall be made on all items over the entire sheathed surface by
using a detector. There shall be no pinhole.
The inspection voltage shall be 5 + 5t (t >/=2.5) kV or greater.
(e)
Other inspections
The Owner may instruct the inspection of other items than those specified above in
which the Contractors must comply. The method and judgment criteria shall be
agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner.
10.5.11.3.4
Transport and Handling
Before transport of steel pipe pile, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the transport
plan describing the method, schedule, packing condition, and quantity.
Handling of piles for preparation and driving shall be made with due care so as not to
damage polyethylene sheathing. Should the corrosion protection be damaged, it shall be
repaired or replaced at the responsibility of the Contractor.

Revision 1
Page 155 of 247

PECC3
10.5.11.3.5

Application
Since polyethylene sheathing shall be employed for pile surfaces above EL -2.93 m after
driving, the Contractor shall apply coating at factory taking into account such allowance in
case the pile stops at higher position than assumed.
10.5.12
Coal Storage Yard
10.5.12.1 General
This specification covers the concrete-slab/ballast work for rail foundation, gravel
pavement work, perforated pipe work and concrete cover work for the coal storage yard.
The Contractor shall carry out above works in accordance with the specifications and
All other works required for the coal storage yard not described herein shall comply with
the relevant clauses of the Specifications.
10.5.12.2 Rail foundation

10.5.12.2.1
General
The concrete-slab foundation with pre-cast/pre-fabricated piles or ballast foundation for

stacker-re-claimer rail track shall be constructed.
The design of the reinforced concrete-slab to be used in the Facilities or ballast materials to
be used in the Facilities shall be to the approval of the Owner.
The Contractor shall supply to the Owner prior to the commencement of the Facilities.
10.5.12.2.2
Concrete-slab foundation
The Concrete-slab foundations for the stacker-re-claimer rail track design shall be in
accordance with the specifications in Clause 10.5.5.
The support piles shall be in accordance with the specifications in Clause 10.5.6.

Revision 1
Page 156 of 247

PECC3
10.5.12.2.3

Ballast foundation
The ballast foundation for rail track shall be constructed in two layers.
Ballast material to be used in the Facilities shall be to the approval of the Owner.
The Contractor shall supply the samples of the ballast materials prior to the
commencement of the Work to the Owner for inspection and approval.
(a)
Lower Ballast Layer

The lower ballast layer material shall be hard, durable and clean granular material
such as gravel or crushed rock and shall be free from organic material, clay balls and
any other deleterious substances.
The crushed rock or gravel for ballast materials shall be well graded and have a
grading curve lying within either of grading envelope (A) or(B) given in the
following table.
Grading Envelopes for crushed rock or Gravel as Lower Ballast Layer Material
Percentage by weight
Sieve Size
(A)
(B)
37.50 mm
100
25.00 mm
75-100
100
19.00 mm
60-90
70-100
9.50 mm
45-75
58-75
4.75 mm
30-60
35-65
2.36 mm
20-50
25-50
25 microns
10-30
15-30
75 microns
0-2
0-2
The ballast material shall be laid on he prepared foundation in layers and compacted
to the required thickness.
Each layer shall be compacted by not less than five passes of a smooth wheeled roller
weighing not less than 10 tons or equivalent vibrator roller.
(b)
Upper Ballast Layer

The upper ballast layer material shall be hard, durable and clean crushed rock, and
shall be free from clay balls and any other deleterious materials.

Revision 1
Page 157 of 247

PECC3

The crushed rock shall have a grading curve lying within grading envelope given in
the following table.
Grading Envelopes for Upper Ballast Layer Material
Sieve Size
Percentage by weight
63.50 mm
100
50.00 mm
80-100
37.50 mm
35-75
25.00 mm
0-40
19.00 mm
0-5
The upper layer ballast material shall be laid and compacted to the specified
thickness and width, line and levels. Care shall be taken to prevent segregation of the
materials into coarse and fine fractions.
(c)
Concrete sleeper
The reinforced concrete sleepers shall be manufactured in accordance with the
Specifications and Construction Drawings, or directed by the Owner.
The concrete works shall comply with Clause 10.5.5 in this specification.
The concrete sleeper block shall be run out on the prepared ballast, spaced at the
required centers and alignment to receive the rail of the stacker/re-claimer track. The
rails shall be laid and secured to the sleeper blocks and rods fixed to maintain the
gauge of rail track. The rail track shall be slued to alignment and packed to levels.
Ballast materials shall then be filled between the space of the sleepers blocks up to
the top level of the sleeper blocks. The fine alignment and leveling are then carried
out using suitable instruments.
The shoulders of the rail track shall be filled in with ballast materials abd properly
compacted with suitable compactor.
10.5.12.3 Perforated Pipe

10.5.12.3.1
General
The Contractor shall lay perforated pipes in accordance with the Specification and

Revision 1
Page 158 of 247

PECC3
10.5.12.3.2

Materials
The perforated pipe shall be rigid polyethylene pipe of 250 mm in diameter (corrugated
perforated pipe) or equivalent and approved by the Owner.
10.5.12.4 Concrete Cover

The Contractor shall perform the concrete cover work in accordance with the Specification
and Bid/Construction Drawing, or as directed by the Owner.
The concrete cover to be used shall be free from cracks and damages, and shall have
adequate bearing strength against coal dozer load.
10.5.13
Tank Foundation Work
10.5.13.1 General
The Contractor shall place asphalt sand on the concrete slab foundation supported by piles
or concrete ring foundation with inside the ring crusher run filled, for water tanks or oil
tanks in accordance with the Specifications and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed
by the Owner.
The Contractor, prior to execution of the work, shall submit to the Owner for approval the
materials to be used, mix proportions and method of execution.
10.5.13.2 Asphalt Sand

10.5.13.2.1
Materials
Materials for asphalt sand shall be as described below:

(a)
Asphalt
Either blown asphalt or straight asphalt of penetration 60 to 100 (25C, 100 g, 5 sec)
or equivalent material approved by the Owner.
(b)
Aggregate
Pit sand or river sand, free of foreign matter such as trash, dirt, wood fragments, etc.,
comparatively of uniform gradation and of good quality.

Revision 1
Page 159 of 247

PECC3
(c)
Additive
Filler for stabilization of asphalt shall be fine rock powder such as limestone.
10.5.13.2.2
(a)

Mix Proportions
Asphalt Quantity
The quantity of asphalt added to aggregate and filler shall be in a range not
exceeding 5 percent of the amount calculated by the equation below.
V = (1 - d/D) x 100 (%)
where,
V: porosity (%)
D: theoretical density of combined aggregate (g/cm3)
d: compacted density of combined aggregate (g/cm3)
(b)
Filler Mixing Ratio

The mixing ratio of asphalt (A) and Filler (F) shall be by weight with F/A from 0.6 to
1.8, selection and suitability shall depend on air temperature variation and other
factors.
(c)
Percentage of Voids
The range of the percentage of voids in asphalt sand mixtures shall be 1 to 8 percent,
and shall be selected to obtain a mixture high in flexibility and stability.
(d)
Heating
Melting of asphalt and heating of aggregate and filler shall be done uniformly.
Mixing temperature shall be raise as quickly as possible and exercise thorough care
not to cause impairment of quality. The maximum temperature during melting of
asphalt shall not exceed 250C.
10.5.13.2.3
Laying
The Contractor shall carefully clean the surface of concrete slab foundation or the crusher
run foundation before laying asphalt sand.
Laying of material shall be done quickly and compacted by roller maintaining proper
temperature.

Revision 1
Page 160 of 247

PECC3

10.5.13.3 Oil Retaining Wall

10.5.13.3.1
General
The Contractor shall install oil stops at concrete joints of retaining wall in accordance with
the Specifications and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
10.5.13.5.2
Oil Retaining Wall
Oil stop shall be copper strip 30 cm wide, and 1 mm thick, and shall be subject to approval
of the Owner.
Slip bars (including caps) shall be arranged at intervals of 25 cm at joints of oil stops, and
connections shall be made to secure water-tightness. A slip bar shall be 40 cm long and 19
mm diameter, the cap 20 cm long and 25 mm diameter.
10.5.14
Sewerage and Drainage System
10.5.14.1 General
In accordance with the specifications contained herein, the Contractor shall perform all
work, furnish all sewerage and drainage pipes and fittings of the sizes and dimensions
required and install same in such places shown on the plans or where actually required, in
conformity with the lines and grades shown on the drawings or to the lines and grades as
actually established in the field. The Contractor shall also construct or install, where
required, appurtenant structures like street inlet, pits, street inlet-catch basin combination,
junction box, septic tank, headwall, etc. and such joints and connections as may be
required to complete the system.
10.5.14.2 Materials
(a)
Concrete and Reinforcing Steel Bar

Concrete and reinforcing steel bar to be used in the sewerage and drainage system
shall conform to the requirements set forth in Clause 10.5.5 of this specification.
(b)
Non-reinforced Concrete Sewerage and Drainage Pipes

Non-reinforced concrete sewerage and drainage pipes shall meet the requirements of
ASTM C14-68 or equivalent.
Pipe length shall be taken at random representing a group of fifty (50) pipes or
fraction thereof of each size and shall be submitted for test. Any group represented

Revision 1
Page 161 of 247

PECC3

by corresponding test specimens which do not meet the strength and other test
requirements shall not be installed in the work.
(c)
Reinforced Concrete Drainage Pipes

Reinforced concrete drainage pipes shall meet the design and test requirements for
Class II Reinforced Concrete Pipe in accordance with ASTM C76-68 and ASTM
C497- 67 or equivalent.
Pipe specimens shall be taken at random representing a group of 100 pipes or
fraction thereof of each size and shall be submitted for test. Any group represented
by corresponding test specimens which do not meet the strength and other test
requirements shall not be used in the work.
(d)
C. I. Soil Pipes
Cast iron soil pipes and fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A74-66 or
equivalent.
One (1) full length of pipe shall be taken at random for each 50 lengths or fraction
thereof of each size and shall be submitted for test. Any group represented by
corresponding test specimens which do not meet the strength and other test
requirements shall not be used in the work.
10.5.14.3
Trench Excavation and Backfill
Trench excavation and backfill work shall be done in accordance with the pertinent
provisions of Clause 10.5.1 of this specification.
10.5.14.4 Appurtenant Structures

Appurtenant structures like street inlet, street inlet catch basin combination, junction box
and septic tanks shall be constructed at locations indicated on the plans or at other
convenient location designated by the Owner.
10.5.14.5 Bedding Materials

(a)
For Stable Soil Foundation

Bedding materials for sewerage and drainage pipes in stable soil foundation shall
consist of sand or natural sandy soil in which all the material passes a 9.5 mm sieve
but not more than 10% passing a 0.074mm (No. 200) sieve.

Revision 1
Page 162 of 247

PECC3

(b)
For Unstable Foundation

Bedding for sewerage and drainage pipes in soft and unstable foundation shall be
concrete basement having compressive strength of 141 kg/cm2.
(c)
Foundation Under Roadways and Parking Areas

All sewerage and drainage pipes crossing under roadways and parking areas with
pipe cover (excluding concrete or asphalt pavement) of 60.9cm or less shall be
bedded on concrete basement with compressive strength of 141 kg/cm2.
10.5.14.6 Pipe Installation

(a)
General
Before any drain is installed, the sand or concrete bedding shall be prepared to the
grade, shape, and dimensions shown on the Bid/Construction Drawings, or as
actually required in the Power plant construction works. No pipe shall be laid on
concrete bedding until three (3) days have elapsed after placing the concrete bedding.
All drain pipes shall be laid carefully, hubs upgrade, ends fully and snugly jointed,
and true to the lines and grades given. Succeeding pipe shall be jointed to the
previously laid pipe correct in alignment and grade.
Any pipe which has been damaged during installation or before acceptance of the
completion of the work shall be replaced and laid by the Contractor at his expense.
(b)
Non-reinforced and Reinforced Concrete Drainage Pipes

The concrete pipes shall be handled and installed with the aid of mechanical
equipment in case of large diameter, and not rolled or pushed into the trench. For
small pipes, rope slings may be placed at both ends of the pipes and the rope slowly
shall be pulled out until the pipe rests on the trench bed.
Proper and careful handling and laying should be conducted at all times to prevent
unnecessary structural damage to the pipe, especially at the pipe ends.
For pipes on sand bedding, before jointing the next pipe to the last pipe already laid,
the bottom of the trench for the next pipe shall be excavated to the shape, size and
location of the collar. The next pipe shall be securely attached to the previously laid
pipe by fitting the excavated shape that correct alignment and grade. Same
procedure shall be conducted for the remaining pipes.
All pipe joints shall be filled with stiff mortar. The inside part of the joint shall be
plastered properly to bring the inside surfaces of the jointed ends flush and
smoothen. Sufficient mortar shall be placed on the outside surface of the joint.
Plastering work shall be done where actually required in the works. Curing of the
joint shall be done at least for seven (7) days.

Revision 1
Page 163 of 247

PECC3
(c)

Cast Iron Soil Pipes

Cast iron soil pipes shall be placed where required and jointing shall be completed by
filling the joint with tightly packed.
10.5.15
Roads
10.5.15.1 General
Asphalt paved roads and gravel pavement including traffic stripes and signs shall be
constructed as shown in the Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
8.5.15.2 Materials
10.5.15.2.1 Sub-Grade
The material shall be selected form selected excavation for the works and from borrow
areas, and shall consist of approved granular fill, free of rock and stones larger than 75
mm.
The gradation of the material shall conform to the following:
Sieve Size (mm)
Percentage Passing (by weight)
75
100
50
95 to 100
19.1
50 to 100
9.5
20 to 80
1.2
0 to 30
0.074
0 to 12
If the above gradation envelope cannot be obtained from selective excavation for the works
or borrow areas, the material shall be processed.
The materials shall also comply with following requirements:
a) Organic matter content: not containing
b) Plasticity Index: under or equal to 15
c) California Bearing Ratio: over or equal to 10% at 95% of ASTM D1557 maximum
dry optimum density.

Revision 1
Page 164 of 247

PECC3
10.5.15.2.2

Crushed Stone Base
Crushed stone base shall be constructed of hard, durable particles of both fine and coarse
fragments of crushed rock or gravel. At least 50% by weight of the particles of coarse
fragments retained on a 19.1mm sieve shall have one-fractured faces. The material shall
have a percent of wear of not more than 40% by weight for 500 revolutions as determined
by ASTM C131 and shall not show a total loss greater than 12% when subjected to 5
Cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test as determined by ASTM C810.
The gradation of the material shall conform to the following:
Sieve Size (mm)
Percentage Passing (by Weight)
37.5
100
25.0
75 to 95
19.0
55 to 85
2.0 (No.10)
30 to 60
0.425 (No.40)
10 to 25
0.075 (No.200)
3 to 10
The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed one-half of the fractions passing
the No. 40 sieve. The portion of the material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid
limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D43110. The material shall obtain a minimum CBR value of 80,
tested in accordance with ASTM D1883, when compacted to 95% of maximum dry density
as determined by ASTM D1557.
If the material does not contain a sufficient quantity of natural cementations material to
bond readily under the action of traffic, a binder, consisting of rock screenings, or other
cementations material obtained from approved sources shall be added to, and incorporated
in it. After the binder has been added, the combined grading of the mixture shall be within
the limits specified above. The binder may be incorporated in the material at the point
where the material is produced, or may be incorporated uniformly in the base, during the
progress of the work, and in the amount specified.
10.5.15.2.3
(1)
Bituminous Material
Cut-Back Asphalt
Cutback asphalt shall be of the rapid curing type conforming to the requirement for RC250, RC-800, RC-3000 designated in ASTM D2028 as applicable.
Revision 1
Page 165 of 247

PECC3
(2)

Emulsified Asphalt
Emulsified asphalt shall be of the anionic type conforming to the requirement for rapid
setting grade RS-1 designated in ASTM D977.
(3)
Bituminous Material for Prime Coat
Bituminous material for prime coats shall be medium curing cutback asphalt conforming to
the requirements of MC-70 designated in ASTM D2027. Primer protection material shall
be clean dry sand from a source approved by the Owner and it shall be free of clay, silt and
organic matter.
10.5.15.2.4
Asphalt Concrete
The asphalt concrete shall consist of crushed aggregate, mineral filler and asphalt. The
quality of aggregate shall conform to the requirements for concrete aggregate. Mineral
filler shall consist of limestones dust, dolomite dust, or similar rock dust, Portland cement,
hydrated lime or other non-plastic mineral matter approved by the Owner. It shall be
thoroughly dry and free from lumps. Asphalt cement shall conform to the requirements of
Standard Specification for asphalt cement, ASSHTO M20-63, and its penetration value
shall be 60-70. No additives shall be included in the asphalt.
The asphalt concrete shall have the following characteristic:
1. Marshall Stability (1 bs) not less than 500 lb or 750lb
2. Marshall Flow (0.01 ins) not less than 8 nor more than 110.
3. Air voids in Mix: 3-5 %
4. Voids filled with Asphalt: 75-80 %
5. Voids in Mineral Aggregate; 15-20 %
10.5.15.3
10.5.15.3.1
Executions
Lines, Grades, Dimensions and Tolerances
Road shall be constructed in accordance with the alignments, slopes and sections shown on
in the Bid Drawings, or as directed by the Owner. The Owner may alter the width or
foundations or change side slopes or make any other change in the cross-section of road, if
he considers it necessary. The Contractor shall be entitled to no additional allowance above
the unit prices stipulated in the BOQ by reason of such variations.

Revision 1
Page 166 of 247

PECC3

The road shall be constructed so that variations in dimension, alignment and grade of any
finished surface from the dimensions, locations and grades as shown in the Bid Drawings,
or required by the Owner, shall be within the tolerances specified in the following table.
Description
a) Elevation of Subgrade
Tolerance in Centimeters
+0
-3
b) Elevation of Crushed Stone Base
+2
-2
c) Crown Elevation
+2
-1
No reduction of the required thickness of subgrade crushed stone base and asphalt concrete
surfacing indicated on the Drawings shall be allowed.
The Owner may instruct the Contractor to remedy or remove at his own expense, any
material that exceeds the limits above specified.
The Contractor shall remove banking material placed outside the prescribed profiles if so
The Contractor shall remove from the banking any material which in the opinion of the
Owner is unsuitable, and shall transport it to prescribed disposal area as instructed.
10.5.15.3.2
(1)
Quality Control Tests
General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the control of the quality of fill materials, and shall
perform tests in the field and laboratory on samples of uncompacted and compacted fill to
determine if such materials and their compaction meet requirements of this
Specification. The Owner will notify the Contractor of any deficiencies in materials or
construction when the results of the test are known. Deficiencies shall be remedied by
such measures as the Owner may approve, including additional measures to increase
density, lower or raise moisture content, and complete removal of portions of embankment
which fail to meet the requirements of this specification.
(2)
Uncompacted Material

Revision 1
Page 167 of 247

PECC3

Control test on uncompacted material shall be carried out by the Contractor according to
the frequency given in the following table to determine whether all fill material, as
produced by the method employed, satisfies the requirements of this Specification.
Materials
Test
General
fill
Subgrade
Crushed
stone base
Stone
aggregates
- Grading analysis
4000 m3
500 m3
500 m3
50 m3
- Atterberg limit
4000 m3
500 m3
500 m3
500 m
500 m
1000 m
1000 m
3000 m
3000 m
- Natural moisture content

- ASTM D1557 density test
4000 m
-
- Organic matter content
5000 m
- Los Angeles abrasion
- California bearing ratio (labo)
1000 m3
1000 m3
1000 m3
The frequency of the tests may be amended as required by the Owner according to the
results of previous tests, material variations and weather conditions.
(3)
In - situ Test
The following controls shall be made on materials either placed or in situ:
Test
Sub-grade
Crushed
stone base
Base
1 per 200 m
1 per 200 m
California bearing ratio (in

situ)
1 per 200 m
Density of soil in place
1 per 200
1 per 200 m3
m3
1 per
m3
200
The frequency and nature of the tests may be amended as required by the Owner
depending on the results of previous tests, material variations or climatic conditions.
(4) Field Density Test
Bulk density will be determined in field in accordance with ASTM D1557 with dimensions
and apparatus modified to suit the soil tested, or with ASTM D2167, whichever is most
suitable in the opinion of the Owner, to obtain representative density of fill tested. Particle
size distribution will be performed in accordance with ASTM D422 modified as required
to suit the material tested.

Revision 1
Page 168 of 247

PECC3

(5) Nuclear Apparatus

The Contractor may use a nuclear apparatus to determine density and moisture content in
accordance with ASTM D2922 and ASTM D3017, if materials of consistent gradation are
being placed.
(6) Final Acceptance
The final acceptance of earthworks will be made after materials have been dumped, spread
and compacted if required. Rejection by the Owner may be made at the source, on
transporting vehicles, or in place.
(7) Cutback Asphalt
Cutback Asphalt shall be subject to testing in accordance with the ASTM standards
designated for each requirement in Clause 2.6.2. Samples shall be provided in accordance
with ASTM D140, and in such reasonable quantities as may be required for independent
testing purposes.
10.5.15.3.3
Preparation of Foundation Surface
After clearing, grubbing and stripping in accordance with chapter 2, ground surface shall
be scarified, plowed, broken up, pulverized, moistened or aerated as necessary and
thoroughly mixed and compacted with the top 15cm.
Local unstable soil and loose material below foundation level shall be excavated and
backfilled with sand or fill similar to adjacent natural soils, and compacted in layers not
exceeding 20 cm. Removal, backfilling and compaction of visually observed soft spots
shall be also performed.
10.5.15.3.4
Subgrade and Crushed Stone Base
The specified material shall be spread on the prepared foundation to such thickness that,
when thoroughly compacted, it will conform to the prescribed grades and dimensions.
Each layer shall be of uniform thickness after compacted.
Segregation of coarse and fine particles shall be avoided, and harrowing and blading shall
remix any segregated material.

Revision 1
Page 169 of 247

PECC3

Hauling and spreading shall be accompanied by blading and/or dragging, and the surfacing
shall be free from corrugations and waves. If necessary to produce proper compaction,
water shall be added to the surfacing material, either at the source or after it has been
spread on the roadway. The method of incorporating water in the surfacing material shall
be subject to approval of the Owner.
Immediately following final spreading and grading, each layer shall be compacted to full
width by means of smooth-wheel vibrating rollers or pneumatic-tired rollers.
Each layer shall be compacted in place at optimum moisture content and to the maximum
dry density and/or relative density of 95% and 100% for subgrade and crushed stone base
respectively, of ASTM D1556, as determined by ASTM D1557 and ASTM D2049.
Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center, and shall continue until the
whole surface has been rolled. Any irregularities or depressions that develop shall be
corrected by the Contractor and they shall be subject to approval of the Owner.
Compaction shall be done in longitudinal direction along the banking and shall begin at
outer edges and progress towards the center.
10.5.15.3.5
Asphalt Concrete Surfacing
(1) Prime Coat

Prime coat shall be applied only to a dry surface of crushed stone base, which has been
swept to the satisfaction of the Owner using mechanical brooms. The primer shall be
applied only when the road surface temperature is at least 24C and no rain is threatening.
The application rate of between 1.2 and 1.5 liters/m2 and the temperature of application for
the prime coat shall be as directed by the Owner. The use of primer protection sand shall
be limited to areas designated by the Owner, elsewhere the prime coat shall be left
uncovered to penetrate and to cure completely.
(2) Asphalt
(a) Design of asphalt concrete mixes
The design of asphalt concrete mixtures shall be undertaken by the Contractor. The design
of the asphalt concrete mixtures shall be undertaken on the basis of trial mix prepared and
tested according to standard Marshall methods in the material testing laboratory approved
by the Owner.
The selection of mix design shall be based on the following limitation:
Gradation of aggregate and filler

Revision 1
Page 170 of 247

PECC3

Sieve Size (mm)
Percentage Passing (by

Weight)
19.0
100
9.5
60-80
4.8 (No.4)
40-65
2.36 (No.8)
30-50
1.2 (No.16)
20-40
0.60 (No.30)
15-35
0.30 (No.50)
10-25
0.15 (No.100)
7-17
0.075 (No.200)
5-9
Asphalt cement content by total weight of the mixture shall be in the range of 5.0-7.0 %.
(b) Placing and compacting
Asphalt concrete surfacing having a maximum aggregate size of 20 mm shall be placed to
a compacted thickness of 50 mm.
The delivery temperature of the mixture shall be within the absolute limits of 140C and
163C. Breakdown compaction of the mat shall commence as soon as working clearance
exists behind the pavers for the breakdown roller. Materials deposited on the road behind
the pavers and not in the course of being compacted by the roller, may be rejected should
its temperature be less than 120C.
Asphalt concrete surfacing shall be placed using self-propelled tamper/spreader paving
machines, approved by the Owner. Each paving machine used shall work in conjunction
with two road rollers, a steel drummed roller for breakdown rolling and a multi-tired roller
for finish rolling. The steel drummed roller shall have a mass of at least eight (8) tons. The
multi-tired roller shall have a mass of at least ten (10) tons and shall have at least nine (9)
tires each capable of inflation to a pressure of 830 kpa (10.0 kg/cm2). Each roller shall
incorporate a means of keeping the drums (tires) wet during operation to prevent picking
up of the asphalt concrete mat. Only experienced operators shall be used on the rollers.
Sharp turns and sudden reversals of traveling direction will not be permitted on the asphalt
concrete surface.
Placement of asphalt concrete shall be continuous. In the event of an interruption of
placement due to the weather or plant failure or any other cause, the Owner may direct the
formation of a construction joint in the mat before placement resumes.
The Owner may direct control testing to be undertaken by the Contractor on days when
asphalt concrete is being placed. The Owner will direct the frequency of control testing on
Revision 1
Page 171 of 247

PECC3

the basis of the daily production volume. All control testing shall be in accordance with
current ASTM procedures.
The frequency of the control testing is one test per every 500m in general. The deviation of
the thickness of asphalt concrete shall not be more than 0.7cm from the design thickness at
every test, and shall not be more than 0.2cm from the design thickness in average of ten
consecutive test results. The compaction degree shall be more than 96% in consecutive 10
samples.
10.5.15.4 Traffic Lane Stripes

The Contractor shall apply traffic lane stripes (width 15 cm) in accordance with the
Specifications and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
Color of the traffic lane stripes shall be directed by the Owner.
Traffic lane stripes shall conform to the standards of Class 3, No. 1, JIS K 5665 [Traffic
Paint (Melt Application)] or equivalent and be approved by the Owner.
During application, moisture, dirt, and dust shall be removed from the surface of the
pavement. Application shall be done carefully in a manner that materials will adhere
uniformly to the surface.
10.5.15.5 Traffic Signs

The Contractor shall install traffic signs in accordance with the Specifications and
Installation of traffic signs shall include erection of posts and attachment of sign boards
(aluminum), and erection of curve mirrors (stainless steel, diameter 800 mm).
10.5.15.6 Gravel Pavement

Material for gravel pavement shall consist of clean, hard, durable, well-graded natural or
crushed gravel, free of loam, roots, organic matter or other deleterious material, of 50 mm
nominal largest size and shall conform to the following gradation requirements:

Revision 1
Page 172 of 247

PECC3
Sieve Designation (mm)

% By Weight Passing
50
100
40
95 ~ 100
20
50 ~ 80
15 ~ 40
2.5
5 ~ 25
The gravel pavement shall be spread, leveled and compacted with equipment of a type, size
and efficiency approved by the Owner, to a finished thickness of not less than 200 mm, or
as specified in the Specifications.
10.5.16
Waste Water Treatment Facilities and Water Treatment Facilities
10.5.16.1 General
This specification covers the performance of waterproofing mortar work and
chemical-resistant lining work, for the waste water treatment facilities and the water
treatment facilities.
The Contractor shall carry out the above works in accordance with the specifications and
Bid/Construction Drawing, or as directed by the Owner.
All other works required for the waste water treatment and water treatment facilities not
described herein shall comply with the relevant clauses of the Specifications.
10.5.16.2 Waterproofing Mortar

10.5.16.2.1
General
The Contractor shall apply waterproofing mortar in accordance with the Specifications and
Bid/Construction Drawings, or directed by the Owner.
The Contractor, prior to start of the work, shall submit detailed specifications and a work
program for the approval by the Owner.
10.5.16.2.2
Treatment of Concrete Surface
The Contractor, after removing and repairing offsets at the concrete surface and other
objectionable defects, shall completely wash off laitance, oil films, and the like from the
Revision 1
Page 173 of 247

PECC3

concrete surface and perform careful substrate preparation for enhancement of good
bonding with the concrete.
10.5.16.2.3
Mix Proportions
The table below gives an example mix proportions.

Mix Proportions
Material
t = 25 mm
t = 30 mm
Cement
15.0 kg
17.5 kg
Sand
0.03 m3
0.036 m3
0.36 l
0.4 l
Waterproofing agent
10.5.16.2.4
per m
Finishing
The Contractor shall apply waterproofing mortar to a thickness of not less than 25 mm at
side walls and not less than 30 mm at floors divided into two or more layers, and apply the
mortar in a manner that there will be no surface irregularities.
Finishing shall be done carefully in a manner that brush marks and trowel marks will not
remain.
10.5.16.3 Chemical-resistant Lining

10.5.16.3.1
General
The Contractor shall apply chemical-resistant lining in accordance with the Specifications
and Bid/Construction Drawings, or as directed by the Owner.
The specifications for chemical-resistant lining shall satisfy the conditions of the waste
water during the treatment process.
The applied material shall adhere securely to the concrete surface.
The Contractor, prior to start of application, shall submit detailed specifications and a work
program for approval of the Owner. The following shall be included among the items to
be submitted:
(a) Application sample
(b) Method of concrete surface treatment
Revision 1
Page 174 of 247

PECC3
(c)
(d)

Brand name, composition, and various test results of lining material

Lining applicator and performance record for the last two years.
10.5.16.3.2
Treatment of Concrete Surface
The Contractor, after removing and repairing objectionable defects of the concrete surface,
shall remove laitance, oil films and other deleterious matters on the concrete surface
harmful to adherence by means such as sandblasting.
10.5.16.3.3
Application
Application shall be done carefully and the surface smoothly finished. Thorough care shall
be exercised for ventilation during application operations, and related local laws and local
regulations shall be strictly observed.
10.5.16.3.4
Inspection
The Contractor shall measure film thickness at two places each of wall surfaces as directed
by the Owner using film thickness gauging equipment. Methods of inspection applied and
inspection report shall be approved and submitted to the Owner.
Peeling tests may be performed when deemed necessary by the Owner, and the Contractor
shall cooperate with these tests. All expenses required for these tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
10.5.17
10.5.17.1
Coal Jetty and Appurtenant Facilities

General
This specification covers the performance of the work related to the port appurtenant
facilities.
The Contractor shall carry out the above works in accordance with the specifications and
All other works required for the port appurtenant facilities not described herein shall
comply with the relevant clauses of the Specifications.
10.5.17.2 Bollard (Mooring Post)

The specifications for mooring posts and construction thereof shall be in accordance with
Revision 1
Page 175 of 247

PECC3

relevant standard approved by the Owner.

10.5.17.3 Fender
10.5.17.3.1 General
The Contractor, prior to installation of fenders, shall submit test results specified herein
and drawings showing method of attachment to the Jetty to the Owner for approval.
10.5.17.3.2
Materials
(a)
Rubber
Rubber used for fenders shall be good quality natural rubber reinforced with carbon
black or synthetic rubber. The quality shall be uniform with no mixture of foreign
matter, air bubbles, cracking, or other defects, and there shall be ample aging
resistance, oil resistance, weather resistance, and abrasion resistance.
Rubber used for fenders shall meet the specifications values approved by the Owner:
(b)
Protector
Steel used for the cover plate and frame of the protector shall be meet the
requirements of Class 2, JIS G 3101 or equivalent. A synthetic resin sheet shall be
attached to the surface of the protector. The coefficient of friction between this
synthetic resin sheet and steel shall be not more than 0.3.
Attachment of the synthetic resin sheet to the frame shall be with nuts and bolts of
SUS 304 or equivalent, and attachment of the protector to the fender proper with
galvanized nuts and bolts meeting the requirements of JIS G 3101 or equivalent.
Nuts to be welded to frames shall be SUS 304 or equivalent.
10.5.17.3.3
Corrosion Protection Painting and Other Matters
Embedded pins, bolts, etc. for attaching fenders shall be SUS 304, or SS 41 of JIS G 3101
that has been galvanized, or be of equivalent performances and strengths.
Steel exposed in air or in water, other than SUS304 or galvanized steel, shall be painted for
corrosion protection described as below.
Base treatment shall be by sandblasting meeting the requirement of SSPC-SP10.
Painting shall be done with two undercoats of zinc base paint and three surface coats of tar
epoxy resin paint, with film thickness not less than 20 micron for each undercoat and not
less than 65 micron for each surface coat.

Revision 1
Page 176 of 247

PECC3
10.5.18

Chimney Stack
10.5.110.1
General
The Contractor shall design and furnish materials, labor, equipment and other things
required for the construction of the chimney stack. Any items or things not specified
herein but are required for the successful completion of the chimney stack shall be supplied
and furnished by the Contractor. The chimney stack shall be designed to satisfy the plant
requirements including flue gas volume, temperature, height, exit velocity specified in Part
4 Section 1 and 3. The Contractor shall submit the design and construction procedure of
the stack to the Owner for his approval prior to execution of the work. The Contractor
shall also prepare structural calculations of foundation, outer shell, platforms and inner
flues, and submit them to the Owner for his approval.
10.5.110.2
10.5.110.2.1
Outer Shell
General
The outer shell of chimney stack shall be of reinforced concrete and shall have a concrete
roof slab with waterproofing to prevent ingress of rain water. The top of the Stack shall be
made weather proof and the reinforced concrete roof shall be protected with heat and acid
resistant paint. The structure of outer shell shall be designed taking into consideration
seismic force, wind force and temperature stress, etc.
10.5.110.2.2
Slip Form
The following specification shall be applied to the slip form work to be used in
construction of reinforced concrete outer shell:
(a) Sliding of slip forms shall be performed at an appropriate speed, taking into
consideration the strength of concrete and the bonding strength of the form.
(b) When sliding the slip form after prolonged suspension of concreting, adequate
measures shall be taken so as not to damage the concrete by the adhesion of the slip
form.
(c) The work shall be suspended during rain, strong wind, low temperature, or whenever
there is danger of adverse effect to concrete.
(d) The contractor shall establish Contractor's standards for slip form equipment and
safety control during the execution of works, which shall be subject to the approval
of the Owner.
(e) Prior to the commencement of the works, the Contractor shall submit an execution
plan incorporating the tolerances required for the height, wall thickness, plumbing,
roundness, etc. to the Owner for his approval.

Revision 1
Page 177 of 247

PECC3
10.5.110.3
10.5.110.3.1

Inner Flue, Platforms and Stair/Ladders

General
Two inner flues with flue lining and insulation as specified hereafter and four platforms
shall be arranged inside the outer shell as shown on the Bid Drawings. Platforms for
maintenance at hopper part and top part of inner flues shall be provided taking into
consideration operation and maintenance of plant. The Contractor shall prepare their
proposal of numbers, levels and area of platforms and submit them to the Owner for his
approval. Stairs shall be arranged from ground floor to top main platform, and ladders
shall be arranged from top main platform to roof of the outer shell where the access hatch
shall be arranged as shown on the Bid Drawings. Access to additional platforms shall be
designed by the use of stairs, unless otherwise specified. Additional platforms and access
hatch, etc. above the reinforced concrete roof shall be galvanized.
10.5.110.3.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
Materials and Workmanship
All structural steel for main part of inner beams for platforms, stairs, ladders, soot
hopper, flue terminal shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A36, JIS G 3101
for SS400 or equivalent. Specifications and workmanship for other materials shall
be according to Clause 10.5.8 of this document.
All stainless steel for top of flue and others shall be of SUS 316 of JIS G4304 or
approved equal and of a grade suitable for welding conforming to relevant standards.
All galvanization of steelwork shall be in compliance with Part 4 Section 1 in the Bid
Document.
10.5.110.3.3 Fabrication and Erection of Steel Flues

Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, each segment of steel flue shall be shop
fabricated. The Contractor shall provide temporary stiffeners and bracings to each
segment to ensure roundness and stability of the segments and to avoid overstress during
transportation and site erection. The supply and subsequent removal of the temporary
stiffeners and bracings is the Contractors own cost.
Each fabricated segment shall be erected and jointed on site by welding upon the
completion of outer shell construction.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary erection plant and shall submit his erection
method to the Owner for his approval.
10.5.110.3.4
Top of Flue
The top part of flue projecting above the reinforced concrete roof shall consist of 4 mm
thick mild steel plate on the outer face of flue framed together by mild steel stiffeners and
6 mm thick stainless steel plate in the inner face of flue. The gap between 4 mm mild steel
and 6 mm stainless steel shall be 50 mm and filled with glass wool for insulation. Top of
Revision 1
Page 178 of 247

PECC3

the steel flue shall be fitted with 4 mm thick stainless steel capping welded. Entire portion
of the flues projecting above the top of reinforced concrete floor shall be painted with heat
and acid resistant paint to protect the outside surface from acid reaction.
10.5.110.3.5
Gas Sampling/Measurement Apertures
Gas sampling/measurement apertures consisting of various internal diameter stainless steel

pipes complete with stainless steel easily removable blank flanges shall be provided in
each inner flue as shown on the Bid Drawing.

Revision 1
Page 179 of 247

PECC3
10.5.110.3.6

Inspection Doors and Cleaning Access Doors
The Contractor shall provide the following accesses to window shield and steel flues. The
Contractor shall prepare detail drawings of these doors and submit it to the Owner for his
approval.
(a)Access Door
Access to the base of stack shall be through an opening in the concrete and shall be
fitted with an steel door 2,500mm wide 2,700mm high.
The Contractor may have to allow for larger opening at the location of the roller shutter
door for the construction of flues and platforms. However, the additional opening in
the windshield shall be closed to the satisfaction of the Owner
(b)Cleaning Access Door
The Contractor shall provide double skin access door in each inner flue for the purpose
of soot hopper cleaning. The dimensions of the clear opening of door shall be dicided
so that persons can clean chimney inside. And the dimensions shall not be too big for
size of an inner pipe. The inner skin shall be of stainless steel and the external skin shall
be mild steel. The frame shall be fabricated from stainless steel and mild steel plates
with mild steel stiffener and glasswool infill. The door shall be fitted with recessed
screw locking type device around the door to ensure the door is closed tight.
(c)Inspection Access Door
The Contractor shall also provide inspection access door of 550mm side and 800mm
high in each inner flue at each main platform, for the purpose of inspection of surface
condition of each inner flue lining. The fabrication shall be same as cleaning door.
(d)Hatch Door
A hatch door shall be provided for a clear opening in the concrete roof slab for the
access to ladder. The hatch door shall open upwards and away from the ladder and be
provided with spring locking devices functioning from above and below to hold the
door in open or in closed position. The hatch door shall be fabricated from mild steel
angles and 2mm thick stainless steel plates complete with mild steel frame including the
necessary hardware.
(e)Louver for natural ventilation
If the temperature of windshield will be expected exceeding 60, louvers for natural
ventilation shall be installed.

Revision 1
Page 180 of 247

PECC3
10.5.110.3.7

Soot Hopper
Soot hopper, which is a welded steel plate angled conical hopper, is to be installed,
vertically inverted, at the bottom of each flue to collect any accumulation of soot. The
internal surface of the hopper is to be protected by a lining of acid resisting bricks, jointed
with an acid resisting mortar as specified hereafter.
On opposing sides of each hopper, adjacent to the discharge port, two poker hole fittings
are to be installed complete with ball-jointed pokers which can be operated to agitate the
soot deposits without the removal of any part, except for maintenance.
10.5.110.3.8
Soot Hoppers Cleaning Water Pipes
The Contractor shall provide galvanized mild steel water pipes from the nearest fire
fighting mains to hopper cleaning platform and connect this pipe to the perforated stainless
steel pipe ring located inside the flue for periodic soot hopper cleaning.
10.5.110.4
Insulation
The Contractor shall provide insulating material on the external face of inner flue and the
flue ducts supplied and installed under the scope of the stack.
Materials and thickness of the insulation shall be decided to prevent gas emissions from
becoming the dew-point temperature.
In addition, materials and thickness of insulations shall be selected so that gas emission
temperature does not become the acid dew-point and be able to keep the highest runnning
cost merit.
All insulation material shall be to the approval of the Owner and shall be acid resisting and
capable of withstanding sulphuric acid, asbestos free, vermin proof, non-hygroscopic,
chemically inert when both wet and dry and fire resistant and rot and fungus proof.
10.5.110.5
Steel Flue Lining
In order to protect the steel flue from corrosion and erosion induced by flue gas, the
Contractor shall line the inside face of steel flue with Borosilicate glass block (Pennguard
or equivalent approved materials):
In addition, thickness of linings shall be satisfied with 20 years or more useful life span.
The contractor shall submit its specification to the Owner for approval.
The chimney lining system must be suitable for continuous operation of the Units with and
without the SWFGD Plant for indefinite periods.
10.5.110.6
Acid Resisting Brickwork
The internal lining for the soot hopper shall be first class quality acid resisting brick, joint
filler mortar and backfilling mortar complying with the requirements of relevant standard
Revision 1
Page 181 of 247

PECC3

where applicable and subject to the approval of the Owner. The bricks and mortar shall
have characteristics suitable to meet the operating conditions and be satisfied with 20 years
or more useful life span.
10.5.110.7
Painting of Outer Shell
The stack chimney shall be painted so as to conform with the requirements in Decree
20/2009/ND-CP. The chimney stack outer shell shall be painted white and red alternating
in bands. Colors to be selected shall be to the approval of the Owner. The paint shall be
anti-sulfureous acid paint subject to the approval of the Owner.
10.5.110.8
Lightning Protection
10.5.110.10.1
General
The lightning protection system shall comply with the requirements of IEC Code
"Lightning Protection Code", and shall be referred to Part 4 Section 1 of the Bid
Document.
The conductor rods shall be of stainless steel securely fixed to reinforced concrete outer
shell with stainless steel stay wire.
The detailed design and detail drawings shall be approved by the Owner.
10.5.110.10.2
Temporary Protection During Construction
Temporary lightning protection during construction shall be in accordance with ACI

307-79, Clauses A2.1.2 and A2.1.3 or equivalent.
10.5.110.9 Lighting of Chimney Stack

The detailed design shall cover lighting system as specified in Part 4 Section 1 and 6 of the
Bid Document.
10.5.110.9.1
Aviation obstruction Lights
The chimney stack shall be fitted with aviation obstruction lights, and shall comply with
requirements in Decree 20/2009/ND-CP.

Revision 1
Page 182 of 247

PECC3

The Contractor shall submit all application documents to relevant authorities to obtain their
approval. The installation is to comply in all respects with the requirements and
recommendations of relevant authorities.
The lamp shall be mounted on the outside face of galvanized swing-type window which is
fixed on the outer shell.
The lamp shall be protected by a watertight transparent cover mounted in such a manner
that an electrical interconnection will disconnect the power supply to the lamp when the
cover is opened.
The power supply cables shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated cable in galvanized
steel conduit.
10.5.110.9.2
Day-light Switch
The aviation light system shall include a day-light switch. The day-light switch is for
switching off relay circuits by day-light intensity and shall have sufficient amperes
capacity to hold the relays continuously.
10.5.110.9.3
Spare Parts
The Contractor shall supply, as spares to ensure the continuity of lamps service for a period
of not less than two (2) years from the expiry of the Defect Liability Period, lamps and
these spares are to be turned over to the Owner when the works are taken over.
10.5.110.9.4
Temporary Aviation obstruction Light
During the construction of the outer shell and throughout the duration of the contract
period, the Contractor shall provide temporary aviation obstruction lights at appropriate
levels of the outer shell and remove same upon the commissioning of the permanent
aviation obstruction lights.
10.5.110.9.5
Interior Lighting and Small Power
Interior lighting and small power including all fittings shall be provided as per
maintenance and operation requirement subject to the approval of the Owner. The
Contractor shall include necessary provision in his Bid for cabling and other associated
works. The lighting and small power installation shall comply with relevant specification
of these documents.

Revision 1
Page 183 of 247

PECC3
10.5.110.9.6

Distribution Board
The Contractor shall supply distribution board to supply power to the warning lights, stack
elevator, interior lighting and small power. The distribution board shall be mounted on the
wall inside the outer shell with the top of the board being 1,800 mm above the ground floor
level.
10.5.110.10
Stack Elevator
10.5.110.10.1 General
The Contractor shall provide a stack elevator at the position shown on the Bid Drawing
and shall include in his Bid the supply, testing, packing for transport, delivery to site,
unloading, installation, wiring, connecting, final testing and commissioning, maintenance
and handing over.
The Contractor shall prepare their detailed proposal for design and installation of stack
elevator. Prior to order and installation the Contractor shall submit the proposal to the
Owner for his approval.
The elevator shall be front opening, single call push-button controlled, electric, serving
from ground level to each platform level in the chimney stack with an approximate travel
of one hundred eighty (180) meters.
The elevator must be capable of operating non-stop in ambient temperature range of 20C
to 60C for a minimum period of three hours at a minimum speed of 30 metres per minute.
The elevator shall conform to the following specification:
(a) Rack gear type
(b) Contract Load: 400kg
(c) Contract Speed: (approx.) 40 m/min.
(d) Travel: The platform level for measurement above 180metres
(e) Call Buttons: CALL push-buttons are to be provided on each landing. The car control
panel to include platform selection push-buttons which will actuate the doors and
DOOR HOLD switch to hold doors in open position during loading and unloading
operations with device to prevent DOOR HOLD switch being inadvertently left in
closed position. Maintenance and Service switches are to be provided under a locked
cover as required.
(f) Car: Car design, construction and finish shall conform to the following:

Revision 1
Page 184 of 247

PECC3

Car floor size (inside) will be 1000 mm x 1100 mm. The Car to be built up
independently of the platform, mounted on suitable framing, walls shall be of rigid
stainless steel panels having minimum ledges, projections and corners, colour shall be
plain, cat floor shall be of galvanized steel checkered plate designed to a factor of
safety of four (4) to support evenly distributed contract load. The Car shall be
provided with telephone and emergency signal that is operative from the Car and the
same shall be connected to Central Control Room in Central Control Building. The
Car shall also be fitted with emergency hatch on the top so that it permits the passage
of a person. The hatch may be equipped electrically.
(g) Lighting and Maintenance Lamp Sockets: The Car shall be illuminated by two
fluorescent lamps during the time the lift is available for use. A watertight socket
outlet with switch be fitted outside on the top and underside of the lift car for
attachment of maintenance lamp.
(h) Landing Door and Cage: Landing Levels (including ground) shall be the same as the
number of platforms. Every landing shall be protected by a landing and cage which
shall extend the full height, width and a surrounding the lift car. The door shall be
provided with appropriate locking devices.
(i)
Capacity Plate: A capacity plate bearing the contract load of the lift shall be
permanently fitted in the lift car.
The following safety systems for lifts shall be prepared;

(a)
Automatic safety catcher
(b)
Final limit switches
(c)
Limit switches
(d)
Emergency stop device
(e)
Automatic door locking device
(f)
Governor limit switch
(h)
Overload warning device
(i)
Shock eliminator
(j)
Letdown device at emergency

Revision 1
Page 185 of 247

PECC3

Other requirements:
- Automatic stop equipment must be provided in the elevator cab.
- All necessary safety, equipment and devices must be installed.
- Phase failure relay must be provided for the protection of the electrical
equipment in the elevator system.
- The elevator must be provided with front opening and single call push button
controlled.
- The elevator must have local maintenance and service agent for routine
maintenance and inspection.
- The elevator must be provided with variable frequency drive (VFD).
10.5.110.10.2 Submission with Bid
The Contractor shall, at the time of Bidding, submit general outline drawings of the electric
elevator system which he is offering and all other relevant details in order to enable his Bid
to be assessed.
10.5.110.10.3 Approval and Tests
(a)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit on behalf of the Owner all details in respect
of the statutory authorities in accordance with the requirements of relevant codes and
regulations, and to obtain their approval of the same. The Contractor shall keep the
Owner fully informed of all correspondence and transactions with any such
department or statutory authority.
The Contractor shall provide all competent and experienced labor, necessary tools
and precise instruments required for carrying out necessary tests on the elevator,
including the necessary calibration and setting out of the equipment and controls
associated with the installation. The tools and instruments shall be subject to the
approval of the Owner and shall be provided for the timely commencement of the
required tests.
On substantial completion of the installation of the elevator, the Contractor shall give
due notice to the Owner and the relevant Authority as to when the elevator shall be
ready for testing in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and the
Contract. The elevator shall be tested by the Contractor before it is put into service
with the contract load in the car to the satisfaction of the relevant Authority and the
Owner. The Contractor shall allow in his Bids for such tests to be carried out, any
fees payable, any phasing and any temporary suspension of the works, and other
costs resulting thereby.
10.5.110.10.4 Notices
The Contractor shall supply, deliver and fix all necessary load restriction and warning
notices which may be required by the relevant Authority to be displayed on the elevator
shaft, in the elevator car, on the machinery room door and in the machinery room (if any).
Revision 1
Page 186 of 247

PECC3

10.5.110.10.5 Spare Parts

The Contractor shall furnish the Owner together with the operation and maintenance
manuals, a relevant parts list for his information.
Essential spare parts to ensure the continuity of elevator service for a period of not less
than two (2) years from the expiry of the Guarantee Period, including contacts, brake
shoes, etc., shall be provided by the Contractor and deemed to be included in his Bid Price,
and shall be turned over to the Owner at the time of taking over.
Full details of essential spare parts shall be entered into TECHNICAL SCHEDULE to be
submitted with the Bid.
10.5.110.11
Rainwater Drain Pipe
The Contractor shall provide rainwater drain pipe from the roof to the ground floor,
rainwater pit on the ground floor and drain pipe from the said pit to the road drainage,
which shall be designed taking into consideration rainwater condition during storm, subject
to approval of the Owner.
10.5.110.12
Soot Hopper Drain Pipe
The Contractor shall provide soot hopper drain pipe, which is made of steel stainless, from
the bottom of the flue to drain pit on the ground floor.
The above pipe and drain pit shall be designed by the Contractor taking into account
volume and characteristics of drain water and subject to the approval of the Owner.
10.5.110.13
Water Supply and Drainage system
The following water supply and drainage system shall be installed in the Stack.
(a) Water receiving tanks ,lifting pumps, hose pipes, all fittings and foundations
(b) Drainage trenches, pipes, pits, drain pumps, all fittings and foundations
Hose pipes enough to clean inside of Stack, storage boxes for hose pipes and all fittings
shall be installed at each Inspection Access Door. Water and usable water pressure for
cleaning inside the Stack shall be prepared.

Revision 1
Page 187 of 247

PECC3

Drainage after cleaning shall be collected into drainage pits and shall discharged into
appropriate collecting tank in Waste Water Treatment Plant.
Acid proof lining shall be installed in drainage pits.
10.5.19
Soil Poisoning and Termite Control
10.5.19.1 Materials
The Contractor shall treat the soil under the building and immediate surroundings to make
it impervious and toxic to subterranean termites, often referred to as white ant or "anay",
by application of soil poison solution approved by the Owner.
Manufacturer's recommendations for preparation of any other approved poison solution
shall be strictly followed.
10.5.19.2 Application
The application of poison solution follows the sequence of construction, and the following
is the order of treatment:
(a) Thoroughly drench and saturate every linear meter of excavation for footings, and
other cement work with recommended quantity of solution before pouring of
concrete.
(b) After grading and leveling the soil in the ground and layers of gravel laid preparatory
to the pouring of concrete, flood or soak every square meter floor area with
recommended quantity of solution.
(c) As soon as the building is constructed, just prior to the landscaping of the lawn and
garden, saturate every linear meter perimeter of the building, about three (3) meters
wide, with the termite proofing solution.
(d) Treat earth fills thoroughly as they may carry termite colonies. As soon as fill is
packed and leveled, drench every one (1) square meter area with four (4) liters (or as
recommended) of the termite proofing solution.
10.5.19.3 Equipment
An ordinary watering can (sprinkling can) can be used to drench or saturate areas with the
termite proofing solution. However, for convenience and thorough and faster application,
use a power sprayer with 12 to 20 liters per minute capacity.

Revision 1
Page 188 of 247

PECC3
10.5. 20

Concrete Masonry Work
10.5.20.1 General
Concrete masonry units shall be of the type and thickness approved by the Owner and shall
be properly coordinated with other works. The source of supply for materials shall not be
changed after the work has started.
10.5.20.2 Handling and Storage

Masonry units shall be handled with care to prevent chipping and breakage. Storage piles
shall be so located as to avoid being damaged by construction operations and traffic.
Cement and lime shall be stored off the ground under watertight cover until ready for use.
Damaged materials shall be rejected.
10.5.20.3 Materials
(a)
Concrete Hollow Block Units

Concrete hollow block shall be modular no-load bearing units with sizes approved by
the Owner. All hollow blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of not less
than 31.70kg/cm. Hollow block units shall be true to size, without cracks, chips,
splits, or other defects which may impair their strength or durability.
(b)
Mortar Proportions
(i) Cement mortar for laying concrete hollow block shall consist of one (1) part
Portland cement, one-fourth (1/4) part lime and three (3) parts sand. Only
sufficient water to make a workable mixture will be permitted.
(ii) Masonry grout for filling cells of concrete hollow blocks shall consist of one
(1) part Portland cement, one-fourth (1/4) part lime, three (3) parts sand to
which three (3) parts pea gravel is added by volume. Mortar materials shall be
accurately measured by volume and thoroughly mixed until evenly distributed
throughout the batch, by means of a batch mechanical mixer. The actual
mixing time shall not be less than two minutes.
(c)
Steel Reinforcing Bars

Horizontal and vertical reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirements of Clause
10.5.5.11 "Steel Reinforcement" of this document.
(d)
Cement
Cement shall be Portland cement of approved brand.

Revision 1
Page 189 of 247

PECC3

(e)
Lime
Lime shall be made from pulverized quicklime.
(f)
Sand
Sand shall be clean, hard, natural sand and free from deleterious substances.
(g)
Water
Water for mixing shall be reasonably clean and free from objectionable quantities of
silt, organic matter, alkali, salts or other impurities.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Laying - All masonry units shall be laid plumbed, leveled and accurately spaced. All
units shall be wetted before laying. The blocks should be laid on full mortar bedding
and in such a way that no cracks are formed between the blocks and the mortar at the
time the block is placed. All joints should be filled with mortar at the time it is laid.
Any horizontal and vertical CHB wall reinforcing shall be anchored to concrete work
by means of 9.5 mm round by 610 mm long dowels. Embedding of anchor bolts,
expansion shields, conduits, etc., shall be done as the erection progresses.
Cutting and Patching - Cutting and patching of masonry required to accommodate
the work of other trades shall be performed by masonry mechanics.
Finishing - For surface finishes refer to applicable provisions of this section.
10.5.20.5 Concrete Lintel

Unless otherwise indicated, provide concrete lintel over all openings in concrete unit
masonry walls. Lintels shall be cast-in-place and reinforced with longitudinal bars at the
bottom the sizes of which shall be as approved by the Owner.
10.5.21
Moisture Vapor Barrier
10.5.21.1 General
The work shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, plant and other
facilities required to complete all moisture vapor barrier work.
All concrete floor slabs in direct contact with the ground shall be provided with moisture
vapor barrier to stop movement of moisture from the ground through action of osmotic
pressure.

Revision 1
Page 190 of 247

PECC3

10.5.21.2 Materials
(a)
(b)
Vapor Barrier - Vapor barrier shall be polyethylene sheeting with thickness as

recommended by the manufacturers.
Adhesive and/or Tape - Adhesive or tape shall be as recommended by the
manufacturers as approved by the Owner.
10.5.21.3 Physical Properties

(a)
(b)
(c)
Tensile strength is 1156 N./2" width.

Moisture vapor transmission (ASTM E.96, Procedure E) Increased 6 M/sq. meter/24
hours are 4. Perms shall be 0.14.
Creased 6 M/sq. meter/24 hours is 10. Perms shall be 0.27.
Prior to placing the concrete, the gravel fills should be compacted to a smooth even
surface, eliminating all sharp projections or irregularities which may puncture the moisture
vapor barrier. It is preferable in most cases to bring the fill to grade with a stiff mix of one
part Portland cement and three parts sand to provide a smooth even surface for installing
the membrane, or to blind the hard core with a layer of consolidated sand. The net
thickness of consolidated sand above the gravel fill shall not be less than 6.3 mm. Cover
the entire area with a layer of moisture barrier extending to the perimeter of the slab and
turning up against walls for the depth of the concrete. The moisture barrier shall be lapped
and the exposed edges of polyethylene sealed by either of the sealing methods explained
below. Where pipes and conduits must pass through the barrier, the material should be
carefully cross-slit so that it fits tightly around the pipe, then taped to the pipe with
pressure sensitive tape.
10.5.21.5 Sealing
(a)
(b)
Tape Sealing - To obtain an effective seal, moisture vapor barrier should be lapped
25 mm at all joints and sealed with 50 mm pressure sensitive tape. A 50 mm width of
polyethylene film is to be left exposed on both edges for joining and it is important to
ensure that both surfaces are free from moisture and dust, and that the tape is in
contact with the polyethylene film on both sheets. If necessary, a firm base such as a
board can be placed under the joint and the tape applied with firm pressure by hand
or by mechanical applicator.
Adhesive Sealing - Where adhesive sealing is to be used, each alternate sheet must
be inverted so that the exposed polyethylene strips of the alternate sheets of the
barrier face downwards, ensuring that both surfaces are free from moisture and dust.

Revision 1
Page 191 of 247

PECC3
(c)

It is then possible to join polyethylene to polyethylene. The sheets shall be lapped 50

mm to ensure good adhesion and both polyethylene surfaces shall then be coated
with adhesive and the joint made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
End Joint Sealing - End joint sealing should be effected by cutting the ends square,
forming a continuous single interlocking fold and sealing on both sides with
adhesive.
10.5.21.6 Moisture Vapor Barrier under Concrete Slabs-on-Ground

After consolidating the sand bed under concrete floors and edge beams and before placing
the reinforcement, the whole of the sand bed shall be covered with a layer of the vapor
barrier laid in longest lengths and widest available width, lapped 25 mm at all joints and
intersections and sealed with the pressure sensitive tape. A 50 mm width of polyethylene
film shall be exposed on both edges of the moisture vapor barrier where sealed joints are to
be made, and the Contractor shall ensure that the tape is in contact with the polyethylene
film on both sheets, all in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. Alternatively,
adhesive sealing may be used, in which case each alternate sheet shall be inverted so that
the exposed strips of polyethylene are in contact. The sheets shall be lapped 50 mm and
both polyethylene surfaces coated with contact adhesive and firmly pressed together to
form a moisture proof sealed joint. The barrier shall be carried down into trenches, turned
up the side edge and after concrete has set, turned across on top of concrete slab under
cavity flashing.
10.5.22
Floor and Wall Finishes
10.5.22.1 General
The surfaces of the concrete base to which the floor finish is to be applied shall be clean
and rough and brought to proper grade. The structural concrete shall be prepared for the
application of the finish grade by chipping and/or wire brushing followed by complete
removal of all fractured and semi-detached particles of concrete. The surface so prepared
shall be washed and cleaned thoroughly with water under pressure. Tile work shall not be
started until the roughing-in for all works to be embedded in concrete or masonry and the
required waterproofing shall have been installed, tested and approved.
The work also includes treating areas of exposed concrete as shown on the Bid Drawings,
to produce the desired surface finishes. Placing shall be continuous throughout each district
division of area. Immediately after the removal of forms, all projecting wires and bolts, or
other devices used in tying forms, shall be cut off at least one-half centimeter beneath the
concrete surface. All holes, voids shall be patched immediately.

Revision 1
Page 192 of 247

PECC3

10.5.22.2 Delivery and Storage

Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unopened
packages that are plainly labeled with manufacturer's names and brands. Materials shall be
stored in dry weathertight enclosures and shall be handled in a manner that will prevent the
inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness.
10.5.22.3 Workmanship
Installation shall be executed with best workmanship and the finish work shall be free of
broken, cracked, or damaged or faulty tiles.
10.5.22.4 Vinyl Floor Tiles

10.5.22.4.1
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Vinyl Tile (PVC Tile) - Tile shall be 304 mm x 304 mm and 3 mm thickness. Tile
shall have a calendar surface, containing no sand or grit and shall be free from lumps
and coloring matter. It shall not soften in all animal and vegetable fats at normal
room temperature.
Adhesive - Adhesive shall be water-resistant type and as recommended by the tile
manufacturer to be the best suited for tropical installation and for use with the
particular type of floors. Adhesive shall be applied in accordance with the adhesive
manufacturer's printed instructions unless directed otherwise.
Plastic Emulsion - Plastic emulsion (seal polish) shall be the best suited for the
particular type of floor as recommended by the tile manufacturer.
Metal Edge Strips - Metal edge strips shall be provided at all exposed edges of vinyl
tiles. Metal strips shall be extruded aluminum or brass, butt type and beveled at
exposed edges. Top surface metal strips shall be finished flush with the tiles. Strips
shall be secured at the ends and between at about 200 mm apart with screws. Where
two different floor finishes meet on the same level of the surface, the vinyl tile shall
be provided with a metal edge strip. Brass metal strip-edge nosing shall be provided
between vinyl tile floor finish and ceramic tile floor finish.
Nosing - Rubber top nosing of approved design shall be used to protect exposed
edges of tiles.
10.5.22.4.2
(a)
Material
Installation
Preparation - Concrete sub-floors to receive the tile shall be clean, thoroughly dry,
smooth, firm and sound; and they shall be free from oil, dirt, curing compounds, or
other deleterious materials. Sub-floors shall be swept, vacuumed and damp mopped
when necessary to remove dust and oil; shall be scrubbed with strong detergent
solution, thoroughly rinsed, and spot primed, when necessary to remove oil or grease

Revision 1
Page 193 of 247

PECC3
(b)
(c)
(d)

stains. All edges shall be ground smooth and all holes and cracks less than 1.6 mm
shall be filled with an approved plastic emulsion. Large holes or depressions, if any,
shall be filled and treated with underlayment mortar toweled on to smooth surface
and shall be completely dried before the application of adhesive.
Tile-laying Design - Floor covering shall be applied in patterns selected by the
Owner for each area. Joint lines shall be parallel to wall lines. Where line patterns of
tiles run perpendicular to lines of other tiles, they shall be laid truly at right angles.
Tiles shall be neatly cut as required to form neat edges around permanent fixtures,
built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes and other items attached to the floor or wall.
Adhesive - The adhesive shall be applied in a thin film while it is still tacky and
spread evenly with a noticed finisher's trowel of the type recommended by the
adhesive supplier.
Application of Tiles - Tiles shall be laid cut from midpoint of the long axis of the
area to be tiled so that opposite borders will be of equal width. Starting at
established guidelines, the approved adhesive shall be spread over and under floor
with a fine notched trowel covering approximately 4.0 sq. m. per liter and
immediately the tiles shall be embedded into the adhesive. Mechanic shall work
from the uncovered floors as much as possible until adhesive has set so that it does
not come up between joints. Tiles shall be rolled in both directions with 70 kg roller
to assure contact of tiles and adhesive and to bring edges of the tiles flush.
At junctions with vertical surfaces, tiles shall be carefully scribed so as to form a neat
joint at this point. Tile shall never be placed or laid under pressure.
10.5.22.4.3
Cleaning and Waxing
Not earlier than five days after installation, floors shall be washed with an approved
cleaning solution and rinsed thoroughly with clean cold water. Vinyl tiles shall be waxed
with two coats of water emulsion wax, buffed to an even luster with an approved emulsion.
10.5.22.5 Resilient Floor Covering

10.5.22.5.1
(a)
(b)
(c)
Materials
Resilient Floor Covering - The Material shall be a composition of vinyl resins,

plasticizers, stabilizers, fillers and pigments, and shall be resistant to grease, alkali
and dilute chemicals.
Adhesive - Adhesive shall be as manufactured by the flooring manufactured to be the
best suited for tropical installation and for use with the particular type of floors. The
adhesive shall be applied in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's printed
instructions unless directed otherwise.
Others - Refer to Clause 10.5.22.4 of this document for plastic emulsion, metal edge
strips and nosing.

Revision 1
Page 194 of 247

PECC3
10.5.22.5.2

Installation
Method of installation shall be done in strict accordance with the flooring manufacturer's
instructions.
10.5.22.5.3
Cleaning and Waxing
The cleaning and waxing shall be carried out in accordance with the following instructions
unless otherwise directed:
(a) Sweep or vacuum floor to remove all loose dirt.
(b) Clean floor thoroughly with a good grade of commercial floor cleaner as approved
by the Owner, using standard floor cleaning equipment.
(c) Rinse floor thoroughly with clear water, and let dry. Do not flood the floor with
rinse water.
(d) Apply two thin coats of a good grade of commercial floor finish, buff able or
self-polishing type as approved by the Owner, allowing thirty (30) minutes drying
time between applications.
10.5.22.6 Acid-Resistant Floor
(a)
Tiles
Tiles shall be a semi-vitreous tile for unglazed floor tiles.
(b)
Acid Resistant Membrane

An acid resistant membrane shall be placed under the mortar used for bedding the
tiles. This consists of a dry epoxy mortar base and a liquid chemical activator as
recommended by the manufacturers as approved by the Owner.
(c)
Mortar for Bed

Mortar of Class A (mixture of one part of Portland Cement and two parts of Sand)
shall be used for the construction of the screeded bed.
(d)
Mortar for Placing the Tiles

Mortar used for bedding the tiles and filling the joints shall be an epoxy-sand mixture
consisting of one part of epoxy-resin and 2-3 parts of sand by weight.
The sand shall be dry silica sand having the following grading:

Revision 1
Page 195 of 247

PECC3
Sand Size
(e)

% Retained
No. 16
No. 30
12
No. 50
32
No. 100
20
Pan
36
Placing
Tiles and membrane shall be completely dry at the moment of placing.
The tiles shall not be placed in contact, but separated for about 5 mm in order to
allow easy joint filling with epoxy mortar.
Tiles shall be firmly pressed onto a 10 mm mortar bed and beaten to obtain a strong
bond.
The joints shall be filled when the mortar of the tiles placed has sufficiently set.
10.5.22.7 Plain Cement Floor Finish

Floors indicated to receive plain cement finish shall have such respective finishes
monolithic with the slab. In preparation for finishing, floor slabs shall be struck off true to
the required level of the finished floors as indicated in the drawings. Floors shall be
finished by tamping concrete with special tools to force coarse aggregates away from the
surface, then screeding and floating with straight edges to bring the surface to the required
finish level. While the concrete is still green but sufficiently hardened to bear a man's
weight without deep imprint, it shall be floated to a true and uniform plane with no coarse
aggregates visible. Sufficient pressure shall be used on the wood float to bring moisture to
the surface. The concrete shall then be hand troweled to produce a smooth impervious
surface free from trowel marks. Additional troweling shall be given the surface for
furnishing purposes.
10.5.22.8 Cement Floor with Hardener and Non-skid Finish

(a)
(b)
General - Application of floor hardener topping shall be coordinated with the pouring
of the concrete floor slabs to receive such finish.
Materials
(i) Floor Hardener - Floor hardener shall be extremely hard, non-metallic
aggregate with high abrasion resistance. Floor hardener brand shall be

Revision 1
Page 196 of 247

PECC3

(ii) Cement - Cement shall be Portland cement.

(iii) Curing Compound - Curing compound shall be subject to approval of the
Owner.
10.5.22.9 Pebble Washout Floor Finish

(a)
General
(i) The pebble washout shall be done by workmen experienced and qualified to do
this particular type of work.
(ii) The Contractor shall submit to the Owner pebble washout samples including
samples of pebbles to be used in the work.
(b)
Materials
(i) Quart Size Pebble
Pebbles shall be well graded, clean, round, hard, river pebbles having good
appearance in color. The sizes of pebbles shall be between 9 mm and 15 mm.
(ii)
White Cement
"Snocrete" or equal as approved by the Owner.
(iii) Admixture
The Contractor may use retarding admixture provided that the admixture is in
compliance with QCVN 16-3:2011/BXD and does not alter the required
strength and the admixture. Admixture used shall be the products of worldwide
leader chemical corporation as approved by the Owner.
(c)
Application
(i) Before commencement of the work, desired pitch for drainage shall be
provided in the concrete slab. Concrete must be rough, and loose particles or
anything which would prevent bond shall be thoroughly cleaned off with water.
Concrete surfaces must be kept wet for at least 4 hours before the scratch coat
is applied. The required scratch coat of cement mortar is proportioned to one
(1) part Portland cement to two (2) parts sand by volume and shall be applied
not more than 19 mm in thickness.
(ii) Washout finish, composed of one (1) part Portland cement or white cement (as
the case may be) to two-and-a-half (2-1/2) part pebble, shall be applied with a
pressure to obtain adhesion to concrete and shall be troweled to hard, smooth
even plane, rodded and floated to a uniform surface and even texture. Washout
finish shall not be more than 9.5 mm in thickness.
(d)
Curing and Cleaning

As soon as possible, wall or floor surface applied with washout finish shall be
covered with thick kraft paper or other approved covers for curing. At such time that

Revision 1
Page 197 of 247

PECC3

the surfaces are still semi-dry, surfaces shall be washed with clean water with
sponge and soft brush to remove cement pastes and smudges leaving the pebble
quarts in their natural texture and appearance.
10.5.22.10
Unglazed Floor Tiles
(a)
Materials
Unglazed tiles shall be ceramic tiles in compliance with QCVN 16-6:2011/BXD.
Trimmers, corners and base tiles shall be of the size and color corresponding to floor
tiles. Tiles shall be of first class quality, of uniform size, even surface, free from
warps, laminations, scratch edges, chipped corners and other imperfections or flaws
affecting their quality, appearance and strength.
(b)
Installation
(i) Preparation
Surfaces to receive the tile shall be clean, free from dirt, oil, grease, and other
deleterious substances. Floor tile installation in spaces receiving wall tile shall
not be started until after wall installation has been completed. Before tile is
applied with a dry-set mortar bed, the structural floor shall be tested for
levelness or uniformity of slope by water flooding and if the bed is found
defective, it shall be properly corrected to attain the required slope.
The structural concrete slab previously roughened and cleaned shall be
thoroughly saturated with clean fresh water one day prior to application of the
setting bed, and the slab again wetted thoroughly but no free water shall be
permitted to remain on the surface immediately before application of the
setting bed. A skim coat of neat Portland cement mortar shall then be applied
not more than 1.6 mm thick. The mortar setting bed shall then be spread until
its surface is true and even, and thoroughly compacted either level or sloped
uniformly for drainage as the case may require.
A setting bed, as large as can be covered with tiles before the mortar is
reached, its initial set shall be placed in one operation. In the event that more
mortar has been placed than can be covered, the unfinished portion shall be
removed and cut back to a clean beveled edge.
10.5.22.11
Cement Plaster Finish
All surfaces indicated in the drawings as "Cement Plaster" in all interior and exterior wall
and concrete or masonry surfaces without specific finish shall be finished with cement
plaster.

Revision 1
Page 198 of 247

PECC3
10.5.22.11.1

Storage and Handling
Cement shall be stored off the ground, under cover and away from sweating walls and
damp surfaces.
10.5.22.11.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Cement - Cement shall be Portland cement.

Lime - Lime shall be quicklime or hydrated lime to make lime putty.
Sand - Natural sand, white or light gray, washed and cleaned.
Water - Water shall be clean and fresh containing no salt, sulphur or other harmful
substances.
10.5.22.11.3
(a)
(b)
(b)
(c)
Mixtures
Plaster materials specified on a volume basis, shall be measured accurately in

approved container that will insure the specific proportion. Measuring materials with
shovels (shovel-count) will not be permitted.
Cement plaster shall be applied in two coats. Mortar for brown coat (first coat) shall
be mixed in the proportion (by volume) of 1 part Portland cement, 3 parts sand, and
1/4 hydrated lime. Mortar for finish coat (second coat) shall be the same as specified
for brown coat except that the proportion of sand shall be increased to 4 parts.
10.5.22.11.4
(a)
Materials
Application of Plaster
Preparation of Surfaces - Surfaces to receive cement plaster shall be cleaned of all

projections, dust loose particles, grease and other foreign matter. Plaster shall not be
applied directly to (a) concrete or masonry surfaces that have been coated with
bituminous compound, (b) surfaces that have been painted or previously plastered.
Before the plaster work is started, masonry surfaces shall be wetted thoroughly with
fog spray of clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition. Metal ground
corner beads, screed and other accessories shall be checked carefully for alignment
before work is started.
Brown Coat - Shall be applied with sufficient pressure to fill the grooves in hollow
block or concrete to prevent air pockets and secure a good bond. Brown coat shall be
lightly scratched and broomed. Each coat of cement plaster shall be kept moist for 48
hours after application and then allowed to dry.
Finish Coat - Shall not be applied until after brown coat has seasoned for 7 days. Just
before the application of the finish coat, brown coat shall again be evenly moistened
with fog spray. Finish coat shall be floated first to a true and even surface then
troweled in a manner that will force the sand particles down into the plaster.
Plastered surfaces shall be smooth and free from rough area, trowel marks, cracks
and blemishes. Thickness of plaster shall be 10 mm on vertical concrete and on
masonry.

Revision 1
Page 199 of 247

PECC3
10.5.22.11.5

Finishes
Trowel finishes shall be of water troweled furring set to provide a smooth, dense surface
for decoration, free of irregularities and blemishes.
10.5.22.11.6
Workmanship
Plaster work shall be level finished, plumbed, square and true within to tolerance of 3 mm
to 10 mm without waves, cracks, blister pits, crazings, discolorations, projects or other
imperfections. Plaster work shall be formed carefully around angles contours, and well up
to screeds. Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent dropping of
applications. There shall be no visible junction marks in the finish coat where one day's
work adjoint another.
10.5.22.11.7
Patching, Pointing and Cleaning
Upon completion of the building and when directed, loose, cracked, damaged or defective
plastering shall be cut out and replastered in a satisfactory and approved manner. Pointing
and patching of plastered surfaces and plaster work abutting or adjoining other finish work
shall be done in a neat manner. Plaster dropping or spatterings shall be removed from all
surfaces. Exposed plastered surfaces shall be left in a clean, unblemished condition ready
to receive paint or other finish. Protective covering shall be removed from floors and other
surfaces, and all rubbish and debris shall be removed from the building.
10.5.22.12
Chiseled Concrete Finish
10.5.22.12.1
Scope of Work
(a)
(b)
The work to be done under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment and other necessary facilities and the satisfactory performance of all work
necessary to complete all chiseled concrete finish.
See drawings for location of work required.
10.5.22.12.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Materials
Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard particles of gravel or crushed rock. Sizes to be

determined by the Owner after approval of the test samples.
Sand: Well-graded, clean, free from soluble salts and organic impurities.
Water: Clean potable water.
Cement: Portland cement conforming to the latest edition of ASTM Standards or
approved equal.

Revision 1
Page 200 of 247

PECC3
10.5.22.12.3
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Execution
Preparation
(i) Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be clean, free from dust, grit, grease and
other foreign matter.
(ii) For concrete surfaces, remove skin with bladed hammer until coarse aggregate
is exposed.
(iii) For masonry, wet surface thoroughly and apply one (1) layer of scratch coat
cement plaster.
Application
(i) Wet concrete on masonry surface thoroughly with water. Apply cement grout
generously.
(ii) Apply mixed mortar aggregate on one (1) panel in one (1) continuous operation
with a minimum thickness of 19 mm.
(iii) Do not use mortar guide in applying mixed mortar aggregate.
(iv) Use string as guide in producing an even surface.
Tooling: The next day after application of mixed mortar aggregate, gently tool the
applied mortar by pneumatic hammer until the coarse aggregate shows uniformly on
the surface.
Protection: Protect finished wall by a coat of approved water soluble silicone.
10.5.22.13
Glazed Ceramic Tiles
10.5.22.13.1
General
Tile work shall not be started until the roughing-in for plumbing, electrical and other trades
have been completed and tested. The work of all trades in the area where work is to be
done shall be protected from damage as directed.
All tiles found to be loose when tapped shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost.
10.5.22.13.2
Materials
Wall and Counter top tiles shall be lustrous, vitrified, glazed vitrified tiles in compliance
with QCVN 16-6:2011/BXD. Colors shall be subject for approval of the Owner. Bases,
stops, returns and caps shall be supplied as required to provide a complete and neatly
finished installation.
All tiles shall be of first class quality. They shall be of uniform size and even surface, free
from warps, laminations, serrated edges, chipped corners and other imperfections or flaws
affecting their quality, appearance and strength.

Revision 1
Page 201 of 247

PECC3
10.5.22.13.3
(a)
(b)
(c)

Installation of Wall Tile
Surfaces of interior masonry shall be clean and sufficiently rough to provide strong
bond. Temporary screeds shall be placed to provide a true plumb surface and as a
gauge for the proper thickness of the scratch coat. Surfaces shall be evenly
moistened immediately prior to the application of the scratch coat. Scratch coat shall
be applied to masonry as backing for wall tile. Scratch coat shall be applied with
sufficient pressure to insure proper bond with the base. This shall serve as the base
for the setting bed. Scratch coat shall not be less than 6 mm thick. While the mortar
is still plastic, the scratch coat shall be cut with a trowel to the depth of the coat and
the full height of the tile bed.
Immediately preceding the application of the mortar setting bed, the scratch coat
shall be moistened thoroughly but not saturated. The setting bed shall be applied,
rodded and floated flush with the screeds over an area not greater than will be
covered with tile while the bed remains plastic. The setting bed thickness shall not
exceed 20 mm thick and no mortar shall be re-tempered.
Tiles shall be set after 24 hours but not more than 48 hours after the application of
the scratch coat. Tiles shall be soaked in clean water for about 1/2 hour before
setting them. Wall tile shall be set by troweling skim coat of neat Portland cement
on the wall surface or by applying a skim coat to the back of each tile and
immediately floating the tile. Bases, caps, bull nose corners, and all other trimmers,
moulded or shaped features, and accessories, shall be backed thoroughly with mortar
and installed where necessary. All lines shall be kept straight and true and all
finished surfaces brought to true and even planes, straight and plumb, and internal
corners squared and external corners rounded.
Horizontal joints shall be maintained level and vertical joints plumb and in alignment. If
cutting of tile becomes necessary, it shall be done at the internal angles in walls. Tile
wainscot shall have glazed capping complete with interior and exterior corner caps.
Intersections and corners shall be provided with the proper tile mouldings and trimmers.
10.5.22.13.4
Grouting and Pointing
Tiles shall be wetted if they have become dry before applying grout. Joints 3 mm or less in
width shall be grouted with neat white Portland cement grout of the consistency of thick
cream. Other joints shall be pointed with mortar consisting of 1 part white Portland
cement and 2 parts pointing sand. Grout shall be worked into the joints by trowel or finger
application. Before the grout sets, the joints of cushion edge tile shall be struck or tooled
of the depth of the cushion, filling in skips or gaps and the joints of tiles shall be filled
completely flush with their surface. Dark cement shall not show through grouted white
joints. All surplus grout shall be removed before it sets.
10.5.22.13.5
Cleaning and Curing
Upon completion of the work, all surfaces of glazed tile shall be cleaned with a soap
powder and clean water applied with stiff fiber brushes. After scrubbing, the tile surfaces

Revision 1
Page 202 of 247

PECC3

shall be rinsed with clean water. Hard lumps or smudges of mortar or grout cleaning shall
be removed by means of wooden paddles. Mortar cleaning tools or metal brushes or acid
solution shall not be used. Where imperfections occur in jointing, the joint shall be raked
back not less than 12 mm in depth and the joint pointed full, and tooled smooth to match
the adjoining work. All tile work shall be adequately protected against damage from
subsequent building operations, both before and after cleaning.
10.5.22.14
Fair Face Concrete Finish
10.5.22.14.1
Scope of Work
(a)
(b)
The work to be done under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment and other facilities and the satisfactory performance of all work necessary
to complete all fair-face concrete finish.
See drawings and details for location of work required.
10.5.22.14.2
(a)
(b)
Concrete of the required mixture with the required grade of gravel and sand.
Form lumber boards of the approved type.
10.5.22.14.3
(a)
(b)
(c)
Samples
Application
Form lumber shall have to be installed into the required measurement and details of
the plan.
Concrete pouring should be well vibrated so as to avoid honeycombs and other
defects.
Upon removal of forms, all concrete residues from form joints shall be thoroughly
ground to produce a uniform and smooth surface.
10.5.22.14.4
Gypsum Board
Gypsum board is a board formed by covering the both faces and longitudinal side faces of
the core of gypsum with gypsum liner pasteboard. Gypsum board shall not be used if any
harmful defects such as chipping, crack, fouling or dent were found on both faces and side
face of gypsum board. The board shall be fixed with stainless steel screws and the joints of
board shall be covered with joint tape, puttied and finished smoothly. Gypsum board
materials shall meet with requirements in QCVN 16-4:2011/BXD.
10.5.22.14.5
Baseboard
Unless otherwise specified, PVC baseboard shall be used for the rooms floored with vinyl
tile and the electricity room. The adhesive to be used for the laying shall be of the solvent
Revision 1
Page 203 of 247

PECC3

type of vinyl acetate derivative. The laying shall be done firmly not to cause any gap with
the floor surface.
Baseboard shall be used for all rooms floored, which are set ceramic tile, with ceramic tile.
10.5.23
Masonry Water Repellent
10.5.23.1 General
All exterior masonry surfaces, as specified herein, shall be protected with one saturating
coat of water repellent.
10.5.23.2 Materials
Masonry water repellent shall be submitted for approval of the Owner. This should be
furnished in liquid form for application with brush or low pressure garden hose.
10.5.23.3 Preparation
(a)
(b)
(c)
Clean and repair the masonry before treatment. Muriatic acid diluted 5% to 8% shall
be used in removing efflorescent salt stains and streaks. Wash the masonry surface
with water before the acid wash, then remove acid and acid salts with an ample wash
of clear water. Allow two or three bright days to dry the surface before water
repellent treatment.
Repair all visible cracks and crevices and all mortar joints that are not tight. On
masonry having large pores, such as cinderblock or cement block, first fill the pores
with a thin grout or cement type paint, brushed well with a stiff brush. It should be
thoroughly cured before application of water repellent.
For masonry, the building mortar should be allowed to set at least thirty (30) days.
(a)
(b)
Apply with either spray or brush. A low pressure garden- type sprayer with a
neoprene rubber hose and coarse nozzle is best for large areas.
Apply a flood coating since it may soak in a quarter inch or more depending on the
porosity of the masonry. Apply liberally so that the solution will "run" 150 mm to
400 mm down the wall. Allow generous overlapping.

Revision 1
Page 204 of 247

PECC3

10.5.23.5 Coverage
1.80 to 4.0 square meters per liter depending on the porosity of the surface.
10.5.24
Insulation Works
10.5.24.1 General
Without limiting or restricting the volume or generality thereof, the fiberglass under slab
roof insulation shall consist of long, fine, glass fibers loaded with a thermosetting resin to
form a semi-rigid fiberglass insulation board.
10.5.24.2 Materials
Under slab Roof Insulation - under slab roof insulation material shall be submitted for
approval of the Owner. Fiberglass under slab roof insulation shall be designed to insulate
under concrete roof decks.
10.5.24.3 Performance Characteristics

Standard
Nominal Thickness
Nominal Mass
- 1,200 mm x 1,200 mm
- 50 mm
- 1.6kg/m2
(a)
(b)
(c)
The concrete surface shall be clean and dry, free of loose or foreign materials.
Concrete slab shall be applied with adhesive. A mechanical pin with a spindle longer
than the thickness of the insulation shall be adhered to the concrete at least 600 mm
on centers in both directions and 300 mm from the perimeter of the bat or blanket.
For the standard size of 1,200 mm x 1,200mm, four (4) pieces of mechanical pins
shall be consumed. The fiberglass insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical pin
and secure the insulation with clips to the pins.
Fiberglass insulation shall be faced with reflective aluminum foil vapor barrier. All
joints shall be sealed with 76mm-wide aluminum pressure-sensitive tape to prevent
transmission of water vapor.
10.5.25 Elevators
Elevators shall be provided for passenger and goods in:
Central control building or Turbine Building (1000kg passenger lift) ;
Revision 1
Page 205 of 247

PECC3

Boiler (3000kg passenger cum goods lift) for each Unit

The lifts must be provided with VFD;
Elevators must be designed based on following criteria:
Service
Passenger
Elevator
Passenger Cum Goods

Elevator
Quantity
Central Control
Building
or
turbine building
One No. for each
Central Control
Building
or
turbine building
Boiler
Location
One for Central

Control Building
and
Turbine
Building
each Boiler
Design/Construction
Vietnamese
standards
Load
capacity
1000 Kg
3000 Kg
Rate speed
0.55 m/s
0.55 m/s
Drive/motor
Worm geared traction machine driven by suitbale

motor or Two speed motor wwith proven
microprocessor based controls
Power Supply
415 V, 3 phases, 50 cycles, AC supply
Method of control
Single speed Servodrive control type wwith

automatic level adjustment
Type of doors
Vertically split, imperforated collapsible door of

hollow metal consstruction from 16 gauge thick
steel.
Machine room
Machine room will be located at top of Elevator.

Machine must be Pressurised dust proof. Sound
reducing material below machines in machine room
must be provided.
Operation
Elevator
carrying
of
a) Selective duplex collective automative operation

with or without attendant
b) Provision for locking control in auto or attendant
position
The supply of all elevators must take into account the requirement for regular
maintenance and services for the Equipment. The proposed vendors must therefore
be chosen from those ones who can provide the service from approved service
agency in Vietnam for the maintenance of the Equipment. The proposed vendors
must be reviewed and to the agreement of the Owner.
Revision 1
Page 206 of 247

PECC3

All proposed elevators must be of the industrial type of rugged design and duties,
suitable for the dusty power plant environment. The drives and control must have
the appropriate degree of protection.
Metallic wire mesh/screen in the area of lift travel must be provided where car and
the counter weight cross each other. Elevator shaft must be enclosed with
galvanized MS cladding sheet from top of elevator pit upto machine room level.
Appropriate sealing must be provided for the cladding sheet to prevent dust/ water
entry in the shaft.
Construction of the elevators must have the following features:
Flooring of
Cabin
Chequered plate flooring with heavy timber

underlay over steel sheeting and replaceable
felt spreading, each 25 mm thick.
Design Construction Car

entrance and landing doors
Car inside enclosure must be scratch proof SS

sheet.
Type F doors of BS: 5655 (Part-I) fire
resistant doors defined and tested as per
Appendix F of BS:5655 (Part- I).
Landing doors must have fire resistance of at
least one hour. These doors must also be
smoke tight as far as possible.
Car Door
Signals
Imperforated collapsible door of hollow

metal construction from 16 gauge thick steel
sheet.
Car position indicator with directional arrows
both audio and visual, hall position indicator
at all floors, tell lights at all floors, battery
operated alarm bell and emergency light with
suitable battery, charger & controls, fan and
telephone.
Construction
Type of indicators
Standard indicators or alternatively luminous

hall buttons and luminous button in car
operating panel and digital hall position
indicator on all floors. (All fixtures in
stainless steel face plates)
Emergency indicator
In case of Emergency hold-ups in between the

floors, automatic flashers should indicate its
location of hold-up both audio & visually as
well.
Further, elevators must have provisions to meet following operational requirements.

Selective collective, automatic operation with or without operator
through illuminated push button station located inside the lift car.
Power operated with automatic opening / closing car and landing doors.
Two push buttons, one for upward movement and the other for downward
movement at each intermediate landing, and one push button at each
terminal landing must be provided in order to call the car.
Revision 1
Page 207 of 247

PECC3

Push buttons must be fixed in the car for holding the doors open for any
length of the time required.
All other safety / protection / operation interlocks as required by BS:5655
(Part-I).
Indication for Position and call indication inside the car, and Up/down travel
direction indication in car and at each landing.
10.5.26
Fire Retardant Chemical
10.5.26.1 General
The work shall include all labor, materials and other facilities necessary for application of
fire retardant chemicals.
10.5.26.2 Materials
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval the complete specifications of the
proposed fire retardant chemical before starting application of same.
Rating for application for fire retardant chemical on wooden components of the building
shall be according to the classification as follows:
(a) All ceiling boards, panellings and all other wooden structures of a building or unit
that are found along corridors, lobbies and kitchen shall be treated with the fire
retardant chemical at the rate of 3.70 to 5.0 sq. meters per liter or two (2) coatings.
(b) All interior panellings, ceilings, floors, closets, cabinets and all other building
components made of wood and the like found on interiors of a building or unit shall
be treated with the fire retardant at the rate of 5.00 to 7.5 sq. meters per liter or one
(1) coating.
(c) All other interior wood based components of the building shall be treated with fire
retardant chemical at the rate of 3.70 to 10.0 sq. meters per liter.
10.5.26.4 Method of Application

The fire retardant shall be applied to interior part of the building or unit, on wood,
plywood, lumber acoustical board, insulation board, cellulose board, wood shavings,
corrugated board, and the like. Any method of normal application of paint such as spray,
paint brush rollers or immersion will be permitted. This may be applied on unpainted or
unvarnished wood materials or on already painted or varnished wood materials except
water based paint, water based enamel and acrylic and over the plastic varnish or shellac.
Revision 1
Page 208 of 247

PECC3

The wood should be totally dried and pure chemical should be used. And this should not be
diluted with other chemicals.
Whenever possible, the fire retardant shall be applied before applying paint or varnish to
guarantee maximum absorption. This acts as a primer and sealant.
10.5.27
Aluminum and Glass Doors
10.5.27.1 General
Aluminum shall be of commercial quality and of proper alloy, free from defects impairing
strength and/or durability, and meet with requirements in QCVN 16-4:2011/BXD.
Aluminum extrusions shall be of aluminum alloy meeting the properties and specifications
governing the alloy. They shall be extruded true to details, with clean, straight, sharply
defined profile and free from defects, impairing strength or durability.
Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices incorporated
in the aluminum work shall be of aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel, or other
non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminum and shall be of sufficient strength to
perform the functions for which they are used.
Protective materials and treatment for metals shall conform to the specifications of the
aluminum brand and as herein described:
(a) The aluminum surface should be kept from direct contact with incompatible metals
other than stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area by:
(i) Painting the dissimilar metal with a prime coat of zinc chromate primer or
equivalent, followed by one (1) or two (2) coats of aluminum metal and
masonry paint or other suitable protective coating, excluding those containing
lead pigmentations.
(ii) Painting the dissimilar metal with a coating of a heavy bodied bituminous
paint.
(b) Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with lime mortar, concrete or other
masonry materials, paint the aluminum with alkali-resistant coating.
(c) Where aluminum come in contact with wood or other absorptive materials which
may become repeatedly wet, aluminum should be painted with two (2) coats of
aluminum house paint and joints sealed with a good quality caulking compound.
10.5.27.2 Sealing and Glazing Compound

(a)
All exterior aluminium-to-aluminium field joints shall be sealed with one part sealing
compound.

Revision 1
Page 209 of 247

PECC3
(b)
(c)

All exterior/interior aluminum to concrete/masonry joints shall be caulked with two

parts sealing compound.
Glazing compound shall be oil-based glazing compound, performed as sealing
materials.
10.5.27.3 Materials
(a)
Aluminum Glass Door

(i) Aluminum glass doors - Frames and sash sections shall be extruded from
aluminum alloy specified in QCVN 16-4:2011/BXD.
The Contractor shall submit calculation of the strength of all exterior doors
under local wind condition, in design stage for approval of EVN. Thickness of
parts for interior aluminum doors shall be more than 1.2mm.
(ii) Hardware and Locks - Door sash shall be fitted with double cylinder lock in
single door active for two leaf doors. Concealed door closer shall be fitted with
single or double acting door. Inserted door push and pull plates shall be fitted
on both panels by inserting into the mounting with a slot or the extrusion which
hides the holding screws.
(iii) Fasteners - All fastening devices shall be either of aluminum or stainless steel.
(iv) Threshold - Threshold shall be flat, non slip aluminum plate secured in place
by flat head countersunk screws in wing anchor.
(b)
Fixed and Awning Type Aluminum Window

(i) Aluminum - All aluminum shall be of commercial quality specially designed
extruded shapes of 6063-T5 alloy having an ultimate tensile strength of 1,550
kg/sq. cm. The Contractor shall submit calculation of the strength exterior
windows under local wind condition, in design stage for approval of EVN.
Thickness of parts for interior aluminum windows shall be more than 1.2mm
(ii) Hardware - Ventilation sashes for awning window shall be fitted with a surface
mounted handle specially designed for effective and well sufficient strength to
perform its function. Operating sash shall be provided with a rotary type
balancing arm to assure balance operation.
(iii) Fastening - All screws and other miscellaneous fastening devices incorporated
in the pivot windows shall be of aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel or
other non- corrosive materials compatible with aluminum.
(iv) Glass - See Glass and Glazing.
10.5.27.4 Construction, Finishes, Hardware and Accessories

(a)
General Requirements
(i) All parts of the work shall be of the materials, design and dimensions herein
specified. Unless otherwise specifically directed, however, methods of

Revision 1
Page 210 of 247

PECC3
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

fabrication, assembly and installation shall be at the discretion of the aluminum

fabricator.
(ii) Metal parts of the work shall be accurately formed, and all joints except those
designated to accommodate movement shall be sealed to prevent leakage.
(iii) All necessary provisions shall be made in doors, frames and windows to
receive the hardware and accessories herein specified. Where concealed closers
or other mechanisms are required, the necessary space, cut-outs,
reinforcements and provisions for secure fastening shall be made.
Protection of Metals - Protection shall be provided wherever necessary to prevent
corrosion due to galvanic action between dissimilar metals.
Use of Sealing Materials - All uses of sealing materials, both in the shop and at the
site, shall be in strict accordance with the specific recommendation supplied by the
manufacturer of the material.
Finishes - All finishes shall match in appearance of the sample approved by the
Owner. Finishes on aluminum shall be fully sealed and tested in accordance with the
latest edition of ASTM Standards.
Hardware and Accessories - See door and window specifications.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Workmanship
(i) All work shall be installed by skilled workmen specially trained in this type of
work.
(ii) All work shall be erected plumb and true, as shown on approved shop drawings
and in proper alignment and proper relationship to establish lines and grades.
Erection Tolerance - Permissible dimensional tolerances in the buildings structure
are as specified in the specific section concerned (entrance and doors, walls,
windows, etc.) of these specifications.
Inspection of the Structure - After lines and grades have been established and before
beginning of the structure on which the fabricated aluminum is to be placed, should
any condition be found, which in the opinion of the Contractor will prevent the
proper execution of his work, he shall report such conditions in writing to the Owner.
Installation work shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected or
adjusted to the satisfaction of the Owner.
Installation Within Masonry Opening - Where installation within masonry openings
is to be performed, no part other than built-in anchors and provision for operating
devices located in the floor shall be put in place until after the masonry work is
completed. Under no circumstances shall aluminum be installed prior to completion
of masonry work.
Material Storage on Site - Aluminum components shall be stored under cover, in dry
spaces provided by the Contractor as close as possible to the point of installation.
These spaces shall be located where the stored materials will not be exposed to
damage by adjacent work and shall permit easy access to the materials. The
Contractor shall install the materials neatly, properly stacked on the floor and shall
not be required to remove them except for installation.

Revision 1
Page 211 of 247

PECC3
(f)
(g)
(h)

Field Welding - Field welding shall conform to the applicable provisions of this
section.
Adjustment After Installation - After installation is completed all hardware and
operating mechanisms shall be adjusted and lubricated to insure proper performance.
Protection and Cleaning - The Contractor shall install his work in a clean and
workmanlike manner, removing all mastic smears and other unsightly marks and
shall be responsible for repairing any damage or disfiguration of the work caused at
any time by his own workmen. Protection of the installed work against damage or
abuse or contamination by other materials as well as the final cleaning of the work,
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
10.5.28
Steel Doors, Windows and Louvers
10.5.210.1
General
The work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all steel doors, windows and
louvers in accordance with applicable drawings and specifications. Shop drawings and
catalogues shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner for approval before
fabrication begins. All doors, windows and louvers shall be completed with hardware, door
frames, anchors and all necessary accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's
standard unless otherwise specified. Frames and all other materials shall be installed by
construction workmen in strict accordance with accepted standard and set plumb, properly
aligned, and securely anchored.
The door in the Power House where it faces outdoor is made a sliding door.
10.5.210.2
Materials and Workmanship
(a)
Roll-up Door
Roll-up door shall be of gauge 16 metal slats, power operated with auxiliary
gear-chain operation and coated with epoxy-resin anti-corrosion paint. Shop
drawings and catalogue shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner for
approval before fabrication. The size of the roll-up door shall be determined taking
into consideration operation/maintenance requirement and shall be approved by the
Owner.
(b)
Steel Louvers
(i) All steel louvers shall comprise of fixed members. Steel louvers shall be
furnished in type and sizes, subject to the approval of the Owner, complete
with all necessary hardware, anchors and miscellaneous accessories.
(ii)
Steel fixed louvers shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheet.

Louver frames and blades shall be heavily zinc coated steel sheet. The blades
shall be gauge 18 and the frames shall be gauge 16. Blades shall be accurately

Revision 1
Page 212 of 247

PECC3

fitted and secured to the frames. The edges of all louver blades shall be folded
or beaded for rigidity.
(iii) Installation shall be checked for warp and wave, trued if necessary, installed
plumb and square without springing or forcing and securely anchored to walls.
The complete installation shall be rainproofed.
(c)
Steel Windows
(i) Frames and Vents - Shall be low carbon, new billet, hot rolled steel bars and
"z" sections of equal flange frame.
(ii) Sub frames and Vertical Mullions - Shall be formed from members which are
standard with the manufacturer of each window type, with corners and
intersections solidly welded and dressed smooth as in standard practice.
(iii) Hardware and Accessories - Shall be provided with complete cam locking
handle for each vent and shall be polished bronze, engaging or beveled strike
plate.
10.5.210.3
Erection
All wood braces which are included to insure that sub frames hold square and true to shape
shall remain in place until the panel are installed. Where required by job conditions, sub
frames shall be built in as the wall construction progresses or installed, without forcing,
into prepared openings by experienced steel mechanics. Window shall be set plumb, level
and in alignment and properly secured to walls and mullions. The joints between the panel
and sub frames and between exterior mullion covers shall be neatly painted both inside and
outside. Caulking between sub frames and surrounding masonry shall be provided by the
Contractor.
10.5.29
Steel Sheets Cladding and Accessories
10.5.29.1 General
The roof and wall construction shall be single steel sheets unless otherwise stated in the
Drawings.
Manufacturer's standard practice and catalogue shall be provided by the Contractor to the
Owner for approval before installation.

Revision 1
Page 213 of 247

PECC3

10.5.29.2 Steel Sheets Cladding

(a)
Materials
Materials must be durable and fit for purpose. Materials for external surfaces
must be selected for aesthetic qualities and proven durability to withstand all
climatic conditions likely to be experienced, ease of maintenance and economy
of cost. Every endeavor must be made to create as pleasant a working
environment as is practical for the staff working in the buildings of the Facility.
The selection of cladding materials must be compatible with the constraints of
the buildings and structures in accordance with good practice. Details of
materials proposed for building exteriors and their respective finishing colors
must be submitted for Owners review when the design starts.
The construction of steel sheets roof shall comprise of an external sheet with an
insulation blanket and including all sub-grits and fixing accessories.
The material for external skin shall be of steel and shall comply with the
requirements of ISO 3574. The sheets shall be formed form cold-reduced steel
sheets of grade G550 and of asymmetrical trapezoidal profile about 0.70 mm
thick and minimum trough of 35 mm.
The steel sheets shall be free from surface flaws and other defects which are
detrimental to subsequent processing and ultimate use. The sheets shall be
coated with zinc or aluminium/zinc on both sides by the hot-dip coating
process to a minimum coating weight of 150 g/m2, total both sides. For
increased resistance to chemical corrosion, the sheets shall be further coated on
both sides with PVDF 0.050 mm thick surface and 0.030 mm thick reverse side
at the manufacturer's works and of a color to be approved by the Owner. The
galvanized surface shall be preheated as necessary to ensure adhesion of the
final coating provided.
(b)
Sample
Sample of steel sheets shall be submitted for approval by the Owner.
(c)
Installation
Method of installation shall be done in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
10.5.29.3 Sheeting and Fixing Accessories

(a)
Sheeting Accessories
Sheeting accessories of steel for the roofing and wall cladding respectively shall suit
the profile of the sheeting and be fixed in accordance with approval of the Owner.
Sheeting accessories shall include all fastenings, flashings, sealers, ridge, capping,

Revision 1
Page 214 of 247

PECC3

fascia capping, corner pieces, closing pieces, verge and barge boards and any other
items necessary to complete and ensure watertight roofs and wall claddings and shall
be of the same thickness, quality and finish as the sheeting.
(b)
Fixing Accessories
The fixing accessories shall include for galvanized sub-clips, hook bolts, self-tapping
screws, rivets, drive screws, studs, diamond washers, bitumen felt washers, neoprene
washers, neoprene gaskets, plastic cappings, etc. All threaded accessories and nuts
shall be in stainless steel.
10.5.30
Downpipes and Roof Drains
10.5.30.1 Downpipes
Downpipes shall be 100 mm dia. PVC pipes, U.V resistant type embedded in concrete
and/or as shown on the Bid Drawings.
10.5.30.2 Roof Drain

Roof drain shall be high grade, strong, tough and even grained metals. Casting shall be
free from blow-holes, porosity hard spots, excessive shrinkage, cracks, or other injurious
defects; shall be smooth and well cleaned both inside and outside.
Roof drains shall conform to the diameter of downpipes. Roof drains shall be provided at
the upper end of all downpipes.
10.5.31
Finishing Hardware
10.5.31.1 General
(a)
(b)
All builder's hardwares suitable and adaptable to the services required shall be
furnished and installed to fully equip, in a satisfactory operational condition, the
operating members in all types of building. Where exact types of hardware are
required, suitable type having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality
as the corresponding individual types shall be furnished, subject to the approval of
the Owner.
Hardware schedule mentioned herein by reference to specific manufacturers are for
descriptive purposes only, in order to identify and establish the type, design,
operation and material of the item desired. Items by other manufacturers which are
similar and equal to the items required herein may be accepted subject to the

Revision 1
Page 215 of 247

PECC3

(c)
The Contractor shall provide and fit in place all hardware not herein specifically
mentioned, but necessary to have the work completed. All such hardware, should
there be any, shall conform in every respect to the balance of hardware.
(d) All modifications in hardware, required by reason of construction as indicated in the
drawings, shall be made to provide specific operation to the functional requirements.
(e) Items of hardwares shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original individual
containers, complete with the necessary appurtenances, including screws, keys and
instructions.
Each individual container shall be marked with manufacturer's name and catalog number.
10.5.31.2 Keying
All cylinder locks included herein shall be keyed separately and shall be master keyed in
groups to conform to the following key schedule:
- One (2) nos. of Construction Keys of all buildings
- Three (3) nos. of normal Keys of all buildings (for permanent use)
- Three (3) no. of Master Keys which can open all buildings
- One (1) no. of Key Box which is able to hold normal Keys and Master Keys.
10.5.31.3 Hardware Schedule

The following schedule shows the type of hardware for the different types of openings
throughout the buildings. The Contractor shall examine the drawings carefully to ascertain
fully the extent of hardware required and shall furnish hardware for all doors, whether
included in the schedule or not. All hardware shall be supplied with machine screws or
bolts.
(a) Butt hinges, extra heavy with five knuckles, ball bearings, and bottom tips
(b) Push pull plates
(c) Cylinder locks and latch set
(d) Cylinder deadlock latch
(e) Knob latch, no cylinder
(f) Closer, surface-mounted or concealed as required single acting with regulating valve
(g) Door stop, floor type
(h) Door holder, lever type with replaceable rubber tip
(i) Bolts, lever finish
(j) Bolts, foot

Revision 1
Page 216 of 247

PECC3

10.5.31.4 Installation of Hardware

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
All hardware shall be installed in a neat, craftsmanlike manner following the

manufacturer's instructions. Fasteners are supplied together with the hardware in
place. Wood screws shall be used for securing hardware to wood surfaces.
Appropriate and applicable fasteners shall be used for securing hardware to masonry
or concrete surfaces. Thru- bolts shall be used where specified or where necessary
for satisfactory installation.
After installation, all finish hardware shall be protected from paints, stains, blemishes
and damage.
All hardware shall be properly adjusted and checked out in the presence of the
Owner to see that the hinges, locks, catches, closers, etc. operate properly. After the
hardware is checked, keys shall be tagged, identified and delivered to the Owner.
Any error in cutting and fitting, or any damage to an adjoining work shall be repaired
to the full satisfaction of the Owner.
10.5.32
Glass and Glazing
10.5.32.1 General
The Contractor is responsible for the correct sizes and grades of glass to be used under his
scope. Improperly set glass or glasses which does not meet the requirements of its grade
and size will not be accepted. Such glass must be replaced to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
The size of glass indicated in the drawings is approximate only and the actual size shall be
determined by measuring the frames to receive the glass. Glazing rabbets shall be rigid,
true, plumb, square, properly primed, clean, dry and dust free, before glazing work is
started.
Each piece of glass shall have the manufacturer's label showing the type, thickness and
quality of the glass. Labels shall not be removed until glazing work has been approved.
Putty and glazing compound shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers, plainly
labeled with the manufacturer's brand name.
10.5.32.2 Materials
Glass and glazing materials shall be in compliance with QCVN 16-2:2011/BXD.
(a) Glass - For all windows, doors, transoms shall be of the best quality of its respective
kinds and free from internal or surface defects. Thickness of glass shall be approved
by the Owner. All exterior glasses shall be solar bronze manufactured. For other
qualities and thickness refer to recognized standards.
(b) Mirrors - For various purposes, public spaces, etc., glass to be selected shall be 6.3
mm thick, polished plate glass with right reflection. Silver to be deposited evenly on
Revision 1
Page 217 of 247

PECC3

selected quality polished plate and protected with electro- copper backing, shellac,
varnish and paint in an approved standard method. Each mirror shall bear
manufacturer's label guaranteeing quality and compliance with specifications. It
shall be free from any defects that impair full and complete reflection. Upon receipt
of notice from the Owner, Contractor shall repair and/or replace without cost to the
Owner all defective material and workmanship.
All labor and other incidental materials such as glazing compound, shims, glazing
clips, securement devices, felt, etc., not specifically referenced above but required to
provide a complete satisfactory and approved installation, shall be made and/or
executed.
Prior to setting of any mirror on masonry plastered wall surfaces, all such surfaces
shall be damp proofed.
Mirror without frames shall be set on wall by adhesive or fixing devices as approved
by the Owner. Mirror with frames with kinds, quality and finish as specified,
complete with "theft-proof" frames shall be furnished and installed in all public toilet
rooms as directed by the Owner. Mirror shall be 6.3 mm thick with aluminum or
stain steel frame on a 6.0 mm thick plywood backing. Space behind mirrors on walls
shall be insulated and damp proofed. "Flatness of wall plan" shall be checked prior to
setting. Perimeters of frame are to be closely against wall surface and back of
mirrors.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The glass shall be prevented from all contact with metal or any hard or sharp metals
by using resilient shims placed at quarter points.
Resilient sealants shall be used.
Use stops in size permitting a "good grip" on the glass.
Glass shall be installed only in openings that are rigid, plumb and square.
Allow sufficient clearance at edges of glass to compensate for some settlement of the
building. Clearance shall be 6.0 mm from edge to frame and 3.0 mm for face.
Marking, banners, posters and other decal shall not be applied directly to glass
surface as these could cause thermal stress.
Removal of putty or glazing compound smears from glass shall be performed by the
contractor to the complete satisfaction of the Owner.
10.5.32.4 Protection
Material shall be protected from loss, injury, staining and breakage. Lost and damaged
materials shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

Revision 1
Page 218 of 247

PECC3

10.5.32.5 Heat Absorbing Glass

(a)
Special attention must be given to the installation of all types of heat absorbing glass
because of its ability to absorb heat. Partial shading, painted signs, large interior
labels, tight draperies or blinds, heavy masonry structure and heating cooling outlets
directing air against the glass may increase edge tension stresses.
(b)
The ability of heat absorbing glass to resist solar energy breakage is primarily related
to its edge strength, therefore:
(i) Edges must be cleaned out
(ii) Do not install glass with flared edge at bottom
(iii) Do not seam edges
(iv) Do not nip edges nor scarf corners
(v) Be careful not to lump or brush edges against metal or other hard objects.
(vi) Avoid the use of pocket flushing glazing
(vii) Radius cutting should be reviewed by manufacturer
10.5.33
Glazing Sealant
10.5.33.1 Materials
(a)
(b)
Silicone Rubber - Silicone rubber should comply with U.S. Federal Specification for
silicone building sealant and U.S. Federal specification for one (1) component
building sealant. The joint depths shall be allowed a sealant depth of 3.0 mm to a
maximum of 12.7 mm. The silicone sealant bead depth shall be less than the joint
width.
Masking Tape - Areas adjacent to joint shall be masked to assure neat sealant lines.
Do not allow masking tape to attach clean surface to which the silicone sealant is to
adhere. Tooling shall be completed in one (1) continuous stroke immediately after
sealant application and before a skin forms. Maskings shall be removed immediately
after tooling.
10.5.33.2 Method of Application

Sealant shall be applied in a continuous operation. A positive pressure adequate to
properly fill and seal the joint width shall be employed. Tool or strike the building sealant
with light pressure to spread the material against the back-up material. A tool with a
concave profile is recommended to keep the building sealant with the joint. Excess sealant
shall be cleaned from non-porous surfaces, before curing, using a commercial solvent. On
porous surfaces, excess sealant shall be allowed to cure and then be removed by abrasion
or other mechanical means. The sealant shall not be disturbed for at least 48 hours.
Revision 1
Page 219 of 247

PECC3

10.5.33.3 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee the caulking work to be free from defects of materials and
workmanship.
10.5.34
Weatherstripping
10.5.34.1 General
Weatherstripping material shall be lightproof, soundproof and dustproof, and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It shall be fitted tightly at corners to
maintain continuity around periphery of doors.
10.5.34.2 Sample
Sample of strip of weatherstripping elements shall be submitted for approval by the Owner.
10.5.34.3 Materials
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Extruded products shall be of aluminum alloy

Extruded architectural bronze
Flexible metal products shall be of zinc, aluminum/ bronze/stainless steel.
Inserts shall be vinyl and/or felt
10.5.34.4 Fasteners
All extruded weatherstripping and saddles shall be furnished complete with screws, color
matched to the following items.
(a) For fastening to wood, screws shall be of aluminum or bronze.
(b) For fastening to metal, screws shall be of self-tapping plated steel.
(c) For exterior application to metal, stainless steel, self- tapping screws, plated to match
the item shall be supplied.

Revision 1
Page 220 of 247

PECC3

Extruded products shall be installed level, square and in proper alignment. Attachment
shall be by means of appropriate nails, screws, bolts, and/or anchors of corresponding
materials.
10.5.35
Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing
10.5.35.1 Material and Roofer

The material for waterproof covering shall be bitumen membrane. The laying of the
membrane shall be complete in every detail and also in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
All waterproofing works shall be carried out by a Specialist approved by the Owner. The
Specialist Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that the surfaces to be covered are
in a satisfactory condition for good adhesion of his materials and are such as not to damage
the water-proofing materials.
10.5.35.2 Guarantee for Waterproofing

Notwithstanding the specified maintenance requirements for the Facilities, the Contractor
shall guarantee the Facilities of his Roofing Sub-Contractor for a period of fifteen (15)
years in respect of workmanship and materials calculated from the time the Facilities are
certified as substantially complete. The Contractor's Guarantee for Waterproofing Works
shall be transmitted in writing at the time of issue of Substantial Completion Certificate for
this portion of the Facilities. Any extra costs for this guarantee, and for the preparation of
Drawings referred to herein for illustration of joints, eaves, and abutment details, shall be
deemed to be included in his bid.
The Contractor shall include in his bid for the preparation of all surfaces which are to
receive waterproofing materials. These surfaces shall be dry, clean, free from dust or
harmful objects, and of a nature satisfactory to the Specialist Sub-Contractor.
10.5.35.3 Laying of Waterproof Roofing

The bed shall be dry and swept free from dust prior to the laying of the roofing membrane.
The bed shall be primed with a suitable primer at the rate of 5.55-11.11 sq.m per liter. The
Primer shall be left for 30 mins. (approx.) or until tacky before application of the roofing
membrane. Application of the membrane shall be done with the stocky side downwards
starting from lowest point. All laps shall be 75 mm and rolled firmly together to ensure
water tightness. The membrane shall be covered by a 50 mm thick cement and sand (1 : 3)
Revision 1
Page 221 of 247

PECC3

mortar screeding. Immediately prior to covering the membrane, a careful inspection shall
be made for accidental damage and any damaged areas shall be cleaned and patched with
fresh membrane. At all upstands, the membrane shall be taken up to a height of 300 mm
and later covered by a cement sand mortar haunching to provide a protective layer to the
vertical membrane. The Contractor shall ensure that the membranes are never left
permanently exposed.
Prior to laying of roofing, the Contractor shall prepare detailed drawings for approval
showing the layers, expansion joints, connection details to adjoining building, fixing at
abutments, walls, eaves and verges.
10.5.36
Painting and Varnishing
10.5.36.1 General
This paragraph covers the performance of all work in connection with the preparation of
surfaces and the application of paint.
Surfaces not to be painted are finishes like pebble washout, marble slabs, aluminum
chrome finishes and other surfaces designated as such in the color schemes and/or as
specified hereunder.
10.5.36.2 Preparation of Surfaces

All surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, free or rust, grease, dirt and other substances that
would prevent adhesion of coating to be applied.
(a)
(b)
Concrete Surfaces - By removing all dirt, dust efflorescence, oil and grease and
stains , or other foreign substances by wire or fiber brushing and/or other approved
means to provide good adhesion of paint.
All exposed concrete and masonry surfaces to be painted shall be treated first by
brushing with a solution made from a mixture of three ponds zinc sulfate crystals to
one gallon of water. After the surface has dried, excess crystal deposits shall be
brushed off.
Surfaces so treated shall be tested with red and blue litmus paper. If there is no
change in color in the litmus paper, no further treatment of the solution shall be
made; otherwise a second treatment of the solution will be required. Within 24 hours
after drying, all crystals on the neutralized surface shall be brushed off before
applying the priming coat. New concrete surfaces receiving paint coating should be
allowed to age for a minimum of 60 days before being painted.
Plaster Surfaces - By repairing with approved patching materials, all cracks and holes
shall be properly keyed to the existing surfaces and finished smooth. No paint shall

Revision 1
Page 222 of 247

PECC3
(c)

be applied to plaster surfaces seasoned less than 30 days. Prior to painting, care shall
be taken to insure that such surfaces are thoroughly dry and clean.
Wood Surfaces - by removing all dust and treating all knots and streaks with a thin
coat of shellac. Puttying of cracks nailholes and minor surface defects shall be done
after the priming coat has been applied and has dried properly. Sand papering when
requiring, shall be done after the undercoats are dry. The use of water on unpainted
wood shall be avoided.
10.5.36.3 Materials
(a)
(b)
(c)
General - All materials, supplies and articles furnished shall be standard Industrial
Paint products. All constituent materials shall conform to the applicable provisions
of QCVN 16-5:2011/BXD or equivalent standards, .
Colors - All colors shall be factory-mixed pigments which are non-fading,
non-bleeding and finely ground. Selection of colors shall be approved by the Owner.
Coats - All surfaces which are required to be painted by Finish Schedules or
specifications shall be given coats of paints as specified hereunder:
(i) Indoor Plaster and Concrete, except that exposed to chemical action, applied as
follows:
a) Primer coat: one coat chlorinated rubber primer with volume solids of
38% 2% at a dry film thickness of 50 microns.
b) Intermediate coat: one coat of 100% chlorinated rubber high build with
volume solids of 40% 2% at a dry film thickness of 75 microns.
c) Finish coat: one coat of chlorinated rubber finish coat with volume solids
of 35% 2% at a dry film thickness of 50 microns.
(ii)
Outdoor plaster and concrete except that exposed to chemical action, applied as
follows:
Two coats of 100% chlorinated rubber high build with volume solids of 42%
2% and a total dry film thickness of 150 microns.
(iii) Plaster and concrete exposed to chemical action applied as follows:

a) One coat epoxy polyamide deep penetration clear coatings with volume
solids of 45% 2%.
b) Two coats epoxy polyamide high build top coatings with volume solids of
60% 2% and a total dry film thickness of 200 microns.
(iv) Wooden cabinets applied as follows:
a) One coat varnish type sealer
b) One coat undercoat modified alkyd enamel with volume solids of 45%
2% at a dry film thickness of 37 microns.

Revision 1
Page 223 of 247

PECC3
c)
(v)

Two coats modified alkyd furnish with volume solids of 47% 2% dry
film thickness 75 microns per coat.
Steel doors and windows, fire escapes shall be painted with the following
paints system.
a) Prime coat: one coat of epoxy zinc chromate primer with volume solids of
50% 2% at a dry film thickness of 50 microns.
b) Finish coat: two coats of epoxy polyamide top coat gloss finish with a
volume solids of 48% 2% at a dry film thickness of 75 microns per coat.
(vi) Interior wood door sashes and door jambs, heads and casings shall be stained
and varnished as follows:
a) First coat: Fill open gained wood with 100% volume solids epoxy putty.
b) Second coat: one coat of intermediate or under coat modified alkyd paints
with volume solids of 45% 2% at a dry film thickness of 37 microns.
c) Finish coat: two coats of modified alkyd finish gloss with a volume solids
of 47% 2% at a dry film thickness of 37 microns per coat.
(vii) For Aluminum surfaces (both surfaces)
a) Surface preparation
i) Remove oil, grease, etc.
ii) Sand disc to rougher surface.
iii) Clean with solvent
b) For primer
i) One coat of modified inorganic zinc rich primer with volume solids of
58% 2% with a dry film thickness of 25 microns.
ii) For finish coats
Two coats of epoxy polyamide, high build top coat with a volume
solids of 60% 2% at a total dry film thickness of 125 microns.
(viii) Galvanized surfaces - (for steel structures)
a) One coat of modified inorganic zinc rich primer with volume solids of 58
2% at a dry film thickness of 25-37 microns.
b) Two coats of 100% chlorinated rubber high build intermediate or topcoat
with volume solids of 42% 2% at a dry film thickness of 75 microns per
coat.
(ix) The wainscot surface 1,800 mm high and the entire floor surface of the battery
room shall be given acid-proof paint consisting of:
a) One coat of epoxy amine cured prim high solid coating with a volume
solids 88% 2% at a dry film thickness of 125 microns.

Revision 1
Page 224 of 247

PECC3

b) Two coats of epoxy amine cured finish high solids of 88% 2% at a dry
film thickness of 250 microns.
(x) All paints, coatings and varnishes specifications and brochures shall be
submitted to the Owner for approval before starting the work.
(xi) All other items of work to be painted or varnished but not specified herein,
shall likewise be submitted to the Owner for approval before applications.
(a)
(b)
General - Before painting, hardware accessories, lighting fixtures and similar items
that are not to be job painted shall be protected, masked or otherwise temporarily
removed. Removal and reinstallation of items shall be done by workmen skilled in
the trades involved. Exterior paint shall not be applied during foggy or rainy
weather. Except when otherwise specified herein, all paint shall be applied in
accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations.
Workmanship - Paint shall not be applied over a previous coat until the surface is
dried and hardened, and has been approved by the Owner. All coats shall be applied
in such a manner as to produce an even film of uniform thickness completely coating
corners and crevices. Each coat of paint shall have a variation in color to identify it
from the preceding coat. Paint shall be spread evenly and smoothly without runs,
sags, brush marks or skips. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, strained and kept at
uniform consistency during application. The first coat on surfaces shall be applied
by brush. Subsequent coats may be applied by spray or brush. In no case shall any
paint be applied during rain, misty weather, or to any surface upon which there is
moisture condensation.
All exposed to view concrete surfaces to be painted shall be treated first by brushing
with a solution made from a mixture of three hundred sixty (360) grams zinc sulfate
crystals to one liter of water after the surfaces had dried, excess crystal deposits shall
be brushed off.
10.5.36.5 Cleaning Up
Upon completion of the work, paint, caulking compound etc., shall be removed from all
surfaces on which the materials are not intended for application. All damaged places shall
be touched-up and the job shall be left in a first class condition.

Revision 1
Page 225 of 247

PECC3
10.5.37

Landscaping
10.5.37.1 General
The work shall include the furnishing of all labor, tools, equipment and materials necessary
for the performance of the construction of gravel surfacing, and the placement of top soil,
fine grading as indicated on the Bid Drawings, planting, fertilizing, maintenance, clean-up
and other work related thereto, including landscape works in accordance with the Bid
Drawings.
Maintenance shall be provided until Provisional Acceptance if Unit1 & 2.
The period of compensation for defect of trees is one year of Unit1 2 Taking Over later.
If trees dead, be damaged or become poor form, the Contractor shall incur all related costs
such as replanting the same or more than trees and disposing the trees.
10.5.37.2 Materials
(a)
Gravel Surfacing - Shall be 100 mm in finished thickness and consist of a base layer
and a finish layer. The top level of gravel surfacing shall be AP. +4.5 m. Material
for base layer shall be natural or crushed stone of a clean, hard and durable quality.
Before the placing of the base layer, the surface of the sub-grade shall be cleaned of
all objectionable substances and properly shaped and drained. The material for the
base layer shall not be less than 50 mm in size placed and spread on the prepared
sub-grade with a thickness of 75 mm. Spread material shall be compacted by means
of rammer tapping machine or approved equal equipment. The material for the
finish layer shall not be less than 25 mm in size and placed, spread and compacted
satisfactorily.
(b)
Topsoil - Topsoil for the use in planting areas designated on the Bid Drawings shall
be natural, sandy loam free from litter, stones, deleterious matter and noxious weed
and shall be obtained from source approved by the Owner. Topsoil shall be subject
to the rejection of the Owner if it does not equal the quality of the approved sample.
(c)
Plant Materials
(i) General The design shall be determined with reference to the Bid Drawings
and submitted to the Owner for approval. Nomenclature conforms to
customary nursery usage. Sizes of plants shall be as stated on the Bid
Drawings. No root bound or undersized material shall be allowed. Plant
materials furnished shall be well braced and well proportioned, particularly
with respect to the width- height relationship and shall have fibrous root
system. All plants shall have a normal habit of growth and shall be sound,
healthy, vigorous and free from insect infestations. The minimum acceptable
sizes of plants, measured before pruning, with branches in normal position
shall confirmed for approval by the Owner. Any tree with weak thin trunk not
capable of supporting itself when planted in the open will not be accepted.
(ii) Plant Label - Plants shall be true to name. The Contractor shall facilitate
inspection and identification by labelling trees, bundles or containers or the like

Revision 1
Page 226 of 247

PECC3

of shrubs or similar plants, with a durable waterproof label using

weather-resistant ink. Label shall state correct plant name and size as specified
in the design approved by the Owner. Labels shall be attached to the plants
bundles and/or container of plants delivered to the planting site.
(d)
Sod - Sod shall contain a good cover of living or growing grass that is seasonably
dormant during the dry season and capable of renewing growth during the dormant
period. At least eighty percent (80%) of the plants in the sod shall be of turf or
pasture. The sod shall be relatively free of weeds or undesirable plants, large stones,
roots and other material that may be detrimental to the development of the sod or
future maintenance. Hay and all other loose material on the surface shall be removed
before the sod is lifted. Sod shall be approximately 300 mm x 300 mm and 38 mm
thick. After lifting the sod shall be piled with grass face inside. Sod shall be
sufficiently moist when stripped to hold the soil in the roots. Sod shall be protected
at all times from drying out.
(e)
Water - Water shall be free from oil, acid, alkali, salt and other substances harmful to
the growth of the plant.
(f)
Materials other than Plants

(i) Stakes - Stakes for supporting trees shall be straight, sound, rough-sawn, not
less than 50 mm square and 2.0 m long, unless shown otherwise. Apitong and
tanguile lumber species shall be preferred for stakes and braces shall be painted
with whitewood paint.
(ii) Wires - Wires for guying shall be annealed galvanized iron or steel.
(iii) Burlap - Burlap shall be made of jute or hemp used as water retaining covering.
(iv) Protection of trees from guy wires - Hose to encase guy wires used for
fastening trees to stakes shall be new or used 2-ply reinforced garden hose.
(v) Mulching materials - Mulching materials shall be straw, hay, peat or other
approved material. Mulch material that contains an excessive quantity of
matured seed of noxious weeds or other species that would grow and be detrimental to surrounding land will not be accepted. Straw or other mulch material
that is excessively brittle, or that is in such an advance stage of decomposition
to smother or retard the growth of grass will not also be accepted.
10.5.37.3 Work Procedure

(a)
Topsoiling - All top soil fill in planting areas designated in the Bid Drawings shall be
placed without any mechanical compaction whatsoever. After placement, such fills
shall be thoroughly wetted with water in a manner to saturate the fill completely
from top to bottom and until approved by the Owner. After thorough water
settlement, additional topsoil shall be added in quantities to bring the areas to
finished grades. After the addition of such soil will follow the water compaction.
Topsoil shall not be loaded, hauled, or placed in an excessively wet condition. A

Revision 1
Page 227 of 247

PECC3

minimum thickness of 150 mm shall be provided for lawn areas and those covered
with ground covers, 300mm for planting beds of shrubs.
(b)
Fertilizing - Manure fertilizer shall be well rotten unleached ground, cotton-seed feed
stockyard (not dairy manure) reasonably free from sawdust, shaving, refuse and
harmful chemicals. All manure delivered shall be free from any stage of fly
manifestation. All manure fertilizer shall be spread and mixed with top soil within
48 hours after arrival on the site.
10.5.37.4 Planting Procedure

(a)
General - Planting shall commence as soon as the site is ready and only when the
weather and soil conditions are suitable and as directed by the Owner.
(b)
Digging-Up, Wrapping and Handling - Plants shall be dug up and prepared for
transport in a manner that will not cause damage to the branches, shape and future
development of the plants after replanting. Trees shall be balled with firm, natural
ball of soil and then firmly wrapped with burlap or substitute approved cloth tightly
bound with rope or wire. No balled plants shall be planted if the ball is cracked or
broken either before or during the process of planting. When transported by truck all
plant materials shall be packed to provide adequate protection against injuries during
transit. The top of the truck shall be securely covered with canvas to minimize
wind-whipping and drying.
(c)
Protection from Drying - All plants shall be handled so that the roots are adequately
protected at all times from drying and other injury.
(d)
Layout of Planting - Locations for plants and trees and outlines of areas to be planted
shall be staked on the ground to be approved by the Owner. The tree and shrub
planting shall be done to avoid interference with the lighting fixtures and
underground level installations.
(e)
Excavation for Planting - Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and
stacking of all acceptable topsoil encountered within the areas to be excavated for
tree holes, plant pits and planting beds. If the lawns have been established prior to the
planting operations, the surrounding turf shall be covered before excavations are
made, in a manner that will protect turfed areas.
(f)
Plant Pits and Tree Holes - Excavation of plant pits and planting beds shall extend to
the required depth before fine grading but in no case be less than specified herein.
Plant pits shall be done by breaking the ground with picks. Plant pits shall be square
or circular and shall have vertical sides and flat bottom with a minimum clearance of
150 mm at the bottom and 300 mm around the diameter of the ball to allow the
placement of topsoil or soil mixture around the roots. Acceptable excess topsoil
shall be wasted uniformly nearly low or rough lawn areas or otherwise disposed as

Revision 1
Page 228 of 247

PECC3

approved. Excess soils not required or not suitable for above usage shall be disposed
as directed by the Owner.
(g)
Planting with Soil Mix for Backfill - Backfill used in planting shall be topsoil as
specified, thoroughly mixed with fertilizer in the proportion of one-half kilogram for
each tree hole and 250 grams for each shrub hole.
(h)
Setting Plants - Plants shall be planted in the prepared pits. Trees shall be set plumb
and rigidly held in position until the backfill has been tamped firmly around the ball
or roots. Backfill of specified planting soil mix shall be stopped below the finish
grade to form a basin. Mulch material shall be applied. Additional backfill shall be
provided during the maintenance period where shrinkage occurs.
(i)
Pruning New Plant Material - Pruning shall be made as necessary to remove injured
twigs and branches and to compensate for loss of roots during transplanting but never
to be done before delivery of plants nor before plants have been inspected and
approved. Cuts over 6 mm in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree wound
paint.
(j)
Guying and Staking of Trees - Immediately after planting trees, stakes positioned
with respect to the tree shall be driven not less than 450 mm into ground from the
finished bottom level of excavation of the planting pit. Use guys consisting of
strands of 16 gauge wire attached to the tree trunk horizontally and anchored to the
stakes on the ground. Attachment to tree trunks shall be made with leg hooks or
eyes, or with wire loops separated from bark by rubber hose or heavy cloth padding.
Guys shall be tightened by hand twisting strand together. When planted, the crown
of the plant shall bear the same relation to finished grade as it did to soil surface in
the nursery or place of growth.
(k)
Ground cover Installation

(i) Plant ground covers in areas designated in the Bid Drawings.
(ii) Grade ground cover areas to finished grade, filling as needed or removing
surplus dirt.
(iii) Where no grades are shown, areas shall have a smooth and continual grade
between existing or fixed controls (such as walks, curbs, catch basins,
elevations at steps or building). Roll, scarify, rake finished grades shall meet
approval of the Owner before planting.
(iv) Finish grade so that ground cover areas shall be 50 mm below adjacent walk
and curb grades, after water setting. Rake, cultivate, float and roll until ridges
and depressions disappear and areas are in smooth and uniform conditions.
(v) Smoothen soil about the plants and leave areas in neat clean condition. Do not
pile soil around crown of any plant.
(l)
Sodding - Sodding shall be performed only when the sod bed is adequately moist to a
depth of at least 100 mm and satisfactory results can be expected. Care shall be taken
at all times to maintain the sod and attached soil intact during the cutting, lifting,

Revision 1
Page 229 of 247

PECC3

rolling, transporting and planting. Sod shall be laid, beginning at the toe (bottom) of
the slope, by placing the strips end to end at right angles to the slope. Sodding shall
proceed up to the slope staggered the end joints like masonry. Ends and edges shall
be fitted together. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed by
an approved method so as to eliminate air pockets, to provide a true and even surface
and to ensure knitting without displacement of the soil or deformation of the surface
of the sodded areas. Following compaction, screened soil of good quality shall fill
all cracks between sod strips or to fill all joints. Care shall be exercised to avoid
covering grass with soil. Water shall be applied in a manner to prevent surface
run-off. If sodding must be accomplished during the dry season, the bed shall be
thoroughly moistened to a depth 100 mm between 1- 1/2 days to 2 days prior to
placing of the sod.
(m) Watering - Plants shall be watered immediately after planting to provide moisture to
the depth of the roots. Watering will be required when soil moisture is below
optimum level for best plant growth or when directed.
10.5.37.5 Maintenance
(a)
Maintenance operations shall begin immediately after each plant is planted by

watering, pruning, spraying, weeding and other necessary operations of maintenance.
Planting saucers and beds shall be kept free of weed, grass and other undesired
vegetation growth. During the specified planting season, all plants that die or are in
badly impaired condition shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost.
(b)
Carabao grass, ground covers, plants, shrubs and trees shall be guaranteed up to one
year of Unit 1&2 taking over later.
10.5.38
Miscellaneous Items
10.5.310.1
General
This work shall include furnishing and installing of the following:

(a) Aluminum Railing
(b) G. I. Pipe
(c) Steel Lockers
(d) Safety Nosing
(e) Steel Ladder

Revision 1
Page 230 of 247

PECC3
10.5.310.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Materials and Installation
Aluminum Railings - Aluminum railings shall be formed where practicable shall be

continuous length for each run. Joints shall be accurately cut, soldered and ground
smooth. All aluminum shall be etched finish. All necessary fittings and fasteners
shall be furnished by the Contractor.
G.I. Pipe - G. I. Pipe and balusters shall be formed from galvanized iron pipe of sizes
as approved by the Owner.
Steel Lockers - Steel lockers shall be single-tiered lockers and shall have ventilation
grilles at the bottom and top of each door. Lockers shall be set on concrete wall, and
arranged for locking with a padlock.
Safety Nosing - Safety nosing shall be aluminum. All stairs shall be provided with
safety nosing.
10.5.39
Plumbing System
10.5.39.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools and materials necessary for the complete
installation of the plumbing system which includes the waste, soil and vent pipes and
fittings inside the buildings, the furnishing and installation of the cast iron soil sewer pipes
from the building to the septic vault and to the storm drain pipe to be installed below the
road and all incidentals necessary for the completion of the work ready for service.
The plumbing system shall also include the water supply pipes to all plumbing fixtures
within 1.5 meters beyond the exterior wall of the building and all incidentals necessary for
the completion of the work ready for service.
The Contractor shall also construct the corresponding type of septic vault, conforming to
the relevant local standard and with all the necessary fittings and pipes complete and ready
for service.
10.5.39.2 Specifications and Standards

Unless otherwise specified in these specifications and drawings, all plumbing fixtures for
this project shall comply with the following standards and local regulations:
ASTM
ANSI
AWWA
IPC
- American Society for Testing Materials

- American National Standards Institute
- American Water Works Association
- International Plumbing Code

Revision 1
Page 231 of 247

PECC3

QCVN 16-4:2011/BXD - Vietnam Building Code: Products, Goods of Building MaterialProducts of building material containing inorganic fibers and /or organic fibers, aluminium
alloy and wood-based products
10.5.39.3 General Requirements
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Owner complete schematic drawings at
scale 1:50 of all sanitary installation at least one month before actual installation is done.
Said drawings shall be prepared and designed by a licensed Sanitary Engineer.
(a) Standard Products - Materials and equipment furnished under these Specifications
shall be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of
such materials or equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design
that complies with the specification requirements.
(b) Defective Equipment - Defective equipment or fixtures or equipment or fixtures
damaged in the course of installation or testing shall be replaced or repaired by the
contractor in a manner approved by the Owner.
(c) Code Compliance - All materials and installation shall be approved by the Owner.
(d) Material and Equipment List and Data Sheet - Before starting installation of any
material and equipment, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of
materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work. This shall include catalog
number, cuts, data sheets and such other descriptive information as may be required.
No consideration will be given to partial list submitted from time to time.
Approval of materials will be based on manufacturer's published data, installation
and roughing-in data sheets and drawings.
10.5.39.4 Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Pipe and Fittings

(a)
(b)
(c)
Underground Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Pipe and Fittings - Underground soil,
waste, drain and vent pipe and fittings shall be hub-and-spigot cast iron pipe or
uPVC pipe. uPVC pipes with diameter exceed 63mm shall be joint by elastic sealing
ring. Underground cast iron pipe shall be coated with at least two coats protective
coating.
Flashing - Vent pipe shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 181 kg.
sheet lead. Flashing shall extend not less than 200 mm from the vent pipes in all
directions.
Traps - Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connection to the drainage
system shall be equipped with a metal trap. Traps installed on hub-and-spigot pipe
shall be cast iron. Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recessed drainage
pattern.

Revision 1
Page 232 of 247

PECC3

10.5.39.5 Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Trim

(a)
(b)
(c)
Trim - Plumbing and fixtures trim shall be provided complete with fittings. Exposed
traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough
piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise indicated. Floor plates, wall plates and
escutcheons shall be as required by the fixtures specified. Stops shall be provided at
each fixture.
Fixture Connections - Plumbing fixture compound shall be used for fixture
connection between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe. Closet bolts shall
not be less than 6 mm in diameter and shall be equipped with chromium- plated nuts
and washers.
Finish of Fittings and Trimmings - The exposed pipings, fittings and trimmings shall
be chromium-plated or nickel- plated brass with polished bright surfaces.
10.5.39.6 Types of Fixtures

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The Contractor shall submit types of fixtures for approval by the Owner as follows;
* Water Closet
* Urinal
* Lavatory
* Shower Heads
* Service Sink
* Slop Sink
Concrete Catch Basin - Catch basin shall be constructed at location indicated and in
accordance with the details shown on the drawings or as directed by the Owner.
Floor Drain - Floor drain shall be round top cast iron with flashing ring, trap and
adjustable chrome plated bronze round strainer.
Drinking Fountain - Drinking fountains shall be self-filling with cooling capacity of
at least 22.5 liter per hour from 26.7C Top shall be of stainless steel with removable
drain strainer. Front panel shall be removable, constructed of 19 gauge
phosphatized steel painted with separate primer and baked enamel finish.
Refrigeration system shall be hermetically sealed, with refrigerant flow controlled by
capillary tube. Cooling Tank shall be of stainless steel with copper refrigerant coil
mechanically bonded to exterior. Cooler shall be equipped with a full width foot
pedal and a 3 wire grounding service and plug set. Cooler shall be complete with all
required accessories and controls for automatic operation.
10.5.39.7 Plumbing Accessories

(a)
Liquid Soap Dispenser - Liquid soap dispensers shall be provided one for each toilet
room and installed at a convenient place near the lavatories.

Revision 1
Page 233 of 247

PECC3
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Toilet Paper Holder - Toilet paper holders shall be vitreous china, recessed type with
color to match wainscoting. Roller shall be of metal, wood or plastic with spring
pivot, suitable for paper rolls 126 mm end to end. One toilet paper holder shall be
installed for each water closet.
Towel Holder - Towel holder shall be installed for every shower bath.
Soap Holder - Soap holders shall be vitreous china, recessed type, color to match
wainscoting and installed in each shower.
Twin Hooks - Shall be provided for every shower bath.
10.5.40
Air Conditioning/Ventilation System
10.5.40.1 General and Extent of Supply

The work shall include the supply, testing, packing for transport, delivery to site,
unloading, installation, wiring, connecting, final testing and putting into commission,
handing-over in approved working order and maintenance of the air-conditioning and
ventilation system.
The supply shall include all accessories, even if not specifically mentioned herein but are
necessary to obtain a complete set in perfect operating condition, and shall mainly consist
of the following:
(a) Air conditioning system for the rooms in Power House as described in Clause 10.3.7
of this document.
(b) Air conditioning system for Ancillary Buildings as described in Clause 10.3.17 of
this document.
(c) Ventilation system for Turbine operating floor, Switchgear room etc. of the Power
House.
(d) Ventilation system for Ancillary Buildings.
(e) Explosion proof motor and corrosion resistant type exhaust fan for battery room.
(f) All ductwork, supply and exhaust grilles, louvers, diffusers, filters, supply air
plenum, flexible duct, dampers and all other accessories.
(g) Complete system of automatic temperature and humidity controls for the control
rooms, relay and control equipment rooms.
(h) All automatic controls, motor control center consisting of start-stop push buttons,
pilot lights including control wires and conduits, etc.
Central type air conditioning system must be, as a minimum, provided for the following
areas:
Gatehouse and security building;
All laboratories and coal samples preparation room;
Central control room and adjacent offices;

Revision 1
Page 234 of 247

PECC3

DCS equipment room;

All computer rooms and electronic rooms;
All working offices;
MV electrical rooms, battery rooms and motor control centre rooms.
All other areas of the Facility must be ventilated. Two air conditioning units of the same
size shall be provided for Electrical Rooms, each having 75% of the total capacity
required. These two units selected shall have the same capacity, 2x100% air conditioning
units shall be provided for Control Rooms and 1x100% air conditioning unit shall be
provided for other air conditioning area. The ventilation system must be provided adequate
ventilation to ensure each room is kept at an acceptable temperature level for the
equipment, facilities, etc and not exceed 40C. Either Water sprayed curtain/fans or
package air conditioning system may be used to lower the temperature of the ventilated
area to below 40oC, and they may be also provided for workers who work in the
atmospheric temperature of over 30oC.
The design philosophy of the power plant must make use of natural ventilation system,
especially at spacious locations. The forced ventilation system must be used at specific
areas which are designed with particular requirements such as operating rooms to ensure
the internal temperature and air suitably with humans biological demand. In addition, for a
number of locations, combination between natural and forced ventilation systems can be
made. Manned locations must be provided with air condition. Places where demand on air
condition is high must be equipped with central conditioning such as central control
building.
10.5.40.2 Design Conditions

The HVAC systems must be designed with the following conditions.
Temp (oC)
all ventilated areas
CCR
Ambient +5oC but not higher

than 40oC in any conditions
25 oC
Other electrical rooms
18-32 oC or according to electrical

equipment supplier requirements
Computer rooms
18-32 oC or according to electrical

equipment supplier requirements
Working offices
20-25 oC
Turbine hall, Diesel Generator

Room, Cable Floor

Revision 1
Ventilation not higher than 45oC
Page 235 of 247

PECC3

10.5.40.3 Standards and Regulations

The equipment and installation shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
ASHRAE standards or equivalent.
10.5.40.4 Air Conditioning/Ventilation for Power House

10.5.40.4.1
System Description
The air conditioner shall be air-cooled package type units and air handling units with
air-cooled type chilling units. Indoor equipment of the system shall be installed at the
Air-Con Machine room to be arranged in the mezzanine floor of the Central Control
Building. Outdoor equipment of the system shall be installed at the roof deck of the
Central Control Building.
The air conditioning system to be supplied shall be thoroughly designed in order to provide
the required room condition to each room. The system may be divided into multi zones
considering distribution of heat load and operating conditions.
The normal operation of the air-conditioning system in each zone shall be two (2) units
operating and one (1) unit as stand-by. These three units selected shall have the same
capacity. Each unit shall have provision for 50% and 75% capacity control unloading the
compressor. The control is automatic. Both the supply air and the return air are conveyed
to the room via the air ducts installed in the intermediate ceiling.
The air conditioning system shall be complete with air intakes, filters, supply and return
ducts, diffuser, return grilles, dampers, insulation, etc.
The turbine generator (TG) room shall be ventilated and slightly pressurized to prevent
dust ingress.
Roof mounted exhaust ventilators including N+1 unit for standby (the N is the number of
operating roof exhauster) shall be provided.
To pressurize the main turbine generator room, wall mounted supply air fans shall be
installed at places to be approved by the Owner.
The exhaust fans shall be installed at the Switchgear room, cable room and battery room
and will discharge to the outside of the Power House.
The turbine hall shall be ventilated by roof mounted exhaust fan and louver. Intake air shall
be entered the turbine hall atmosphere through louver at low level.

Revision 1
Page 236 of 247

PECC3
10.5.40.4.2
(a)

Equipment General Specification
Package type air conditioning unit

(i) Type
:
Air cooled package air conditioner
(ii) Manufacturer
:
Trane, Carrier, York or approved equal
(iii) Capacity control :
50%, 75% capacity control
(iv) Condenser
:
Upright air cooled coils
(v) Evaporator
:
Direct-expansion cooling coil
(vi) Compressor
:
Semi-hermetic reciprocating with multi-step capacity
control
(vii) Electric Data
:
a) All motors shall be 400 V, 3 , 50 Hz with built-in thermal overload
protection
b) Starter
:
Combination circuit breaker and star-delta transition
magnetic starter, NEMA 1A, floor-mounted
c) Controls
:
230 V, 1 , 50 Hz
(viii) Control panel
:
Weatherproof
Unit shall be equipped with all the necessary appurtenances and accessories
including but not limited to the following:
- Gages for condenser, evaporator and oil pressure.
- Anti recycle timer for compressor motor.
- Low evaporator temperature, high condenser pressure, high motor
temperature and differential oil pressure cut-outs with pilot lights and
manual reset.
- Maximum amperage control mechanism
- Manual limiter switch for power load
- Control transformer
(b)
Air handling unit shall be of the draw through, modular element type with rigid
framework and shall be factory- fabricated. They shall be complete with air tight
insulated casing, filters, motorized dampers, fans, motors, adjustable v-belt drive,
removable panels or access doors, with fasteners for rapid fixing whenever required
for servicing filter sections, vibration-insulators, and any other appurtenances
necessary for satisfactory operation. Vibration insulators shall be provided between
the unit and base. The unit shall be connected to the ductwork by means of
externally mounted flexible connections.
Casing shall be constructed of at least 1.25 mm thick hot- dip galvanized steel or
approved equal surface treatment to resist corrosion. The casing shall be internally
insulated at the factory with 160 kg/m3 density fiberglass insulation.
Low pressure centrifugal fan shall be complete with fan motor, belt drive, flexible
connections to casing outlet and base frame with slide rails. Fan wheels shall be of
forward or backward curved type, statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be

Revision 1
Page 237 of 247

PECC3

selected for their maximum efficiency. Impeller tip speed and outlet velocity shall
ensure quiet running at all operating speeds. Shaft bearing shall be of the
permanently lubricated, self-aligning type.
Fan motor positions shall be adjustable by means of slide rails to permit the
regulation of the fan speed when necessary. Sufficient allowance in fan horsepower
calculations should be made so that design air quantities are obtained towards the end
of the useful filter life when the pressure drop across the air filter reaches maximum.
Fan and motor assembly shall be installed inside the casing on a frame mounted on
rubber in shear vibro-isolators. Motors shall be of the tropical type, suitable for
ambient temperature up to 45C, voltage shall be 400 V, 3, 50 Hz.
Fan section shall be equipped with a pressure differential switch in order to indicate a
failure of the air flow on the switchboard.
Filters shall be 75% by weight filtering efficiency. The filters shall be housed in a
suitable structure made of welded steel sheet. Air-tight access door shall be
galvanized after welding this structure. Filter frame and filter wire mesh shall also
be galvanized.
(c)
Chilling Unit
(i) The chilling unit shall be an air-cooled type comprising a reciprocating
compressor, an electric motor, power transmitting device, condenser, cooler,
safety device and accessorial devices. The unit shall possess the specified
performance with minimal vibration or noise during its operation.
(ii) The compressor shall be a hermetic or semi-hermetic type capable of
withstanding operation for a long duration of period, and with a sturdy
construction and secure function.
(iii) The electric motor to be used shall be standard products of manufacturers.
(iv) The power transmission mechanism for the fan for the air-cooled type
condenser shall be either direct coupling to an electric motor, or V-belt driven
type with little power loss and capable of safety transmitting power. In case of
V-belt driving, a belt cover shall be installed.
(v)
The air-cooling condenser shall consist of a coil with fin, a fan and an electric
motor and a casing.
The surface of the fin shall be given a corrosion resisting treatment. A suitable
protective measure shall be taken where any damage is feared for the fin.
(vi) The casing for the air-cooling type condenser shall be made of steel plate or
glass fiber reinforced polyester resin with adequate reinforcement. In case of
steel plate, the plate shall be thicker than 1.2 mm and shall receive an
appropriate corrosion resisting treatment.

Revision 1
Page 238 of 247

PECC3

(vii) Protective devices such as the pressure relay, water cut-off relay, temperature
relay and oil pressure relay (when the oil pressure of the compressor exceeds
1 kg/sq.cm) shall be installed.
(viii) Hot insulation, cold insulation and painting shall be to the standard of
manufacturers.
(ix) The control panel shall be to the standard of manufacturers that possess
specified function.
(x)
(d)
The following accessories shall be installed:

Pressure gage and oil pressure gage
(oil pressure gage when required)
Required spare parts1 whole set Foundation bolt
Nameplate (clearly showing the name of manufacture,
date of manufacture, performance, etc.)
1 whole set
1 whole set
1 whole set
Chilled Water Pump

(i) The pump to be used shall be a centrifugal pump directly connected with an
electric motor with a shaft coupling. The pump and motor shall be firmly
installed on a common frame.
(ii) The pump shall be of such construction that it operates smoothly with only
minimal vibration at places, but no abnormal sound during the operation and
that no oil will find its way into the liquid portion.
(iii) The following accessories shall be installed:
Pressure gage
Air vent cock
Drain cock
Shaft coupling protection cover, made of steel
Companion flange (with bolts)
Foundation bolt
2 sets
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 whole set
1 whole set
(e)
Turbine Generator House Roof Exhaust Ventilators

Roof ventilators shall be of propeller/kidney type blades, multi-bladed made of G.I.
sheet materials, V-belt driven by 3, 1520 rpm, 400 volts, 50 Hz TEFC type electric
motor. Complete with belt, pulleys, aluminum butterfly type damper, weather proof
hood cap and birdscreen. Painted with epoxy primer and lacquer finish. Statically
and dynamically balanced propeller.
(f)
Turbine Generator House supply Air Fan

Wall mounted propeller supply air fans shall be of kidney type blades, multi-bladed
made of G.I. sheet materials, with 6 mm W.G. static pressure, V-belt driven by 3,
1450 rpm, 400 volts, 50 Hz electric motor. Complete with belts, pulleys, air intake
filters and birdscreen. Painted with epoxy primer and lacquer finish. Statically and
dynamically balanced propeller.

Revision 1
Page 239 of 247

PECC3

(g)
Switchgear room Supply Air Blowers

Centrifugal blower(s) for Switchgear room and cable room shall be of forward
curved type blades made of B.I. sheets 19 mm WG static pressure, V-belt driven, 3,
1450 rpm, 400 V, 50 Hz TEFC type electric motor, complete with belt pulleys and
belt pulley guard, intake filters and birdscreen, intake and discharge ductings.
Painted and dynamically balanced blower wheel.
(h)
Exhaust Fan
All exhaust fans shall be tube axial type with propeller/kidney blades, multi-bladed,
made of G.I. sheet materials (except for battery room), V-belt, 3, 1450 rpm, 400 V,
50 Hz TEFC type electric motor. Complete with belts and pulleys. Painted and
dynamically balanced propeller. Exhaust fan for battery room shall be hard PVC
explosion- proof or other approved material.
10.5.40.4.3
(a)
Air Distribution System
Ductwork
(i) Velocity
(ii)
: All ductwork shall have maximum design velocity of 610 meters

per minute.
Galvanized Steel Ducts

a) Duct Material
: Zinc-coated steel, complying with ASTM A93
b) Minimum gauge thickness for ducts, exclusive of coatings shall be as
listed hereunder. Duct dimensions given refer to longest side of
rectangular duct with corresponding gauge standard.
Rectangular Duct
Dimension (mm)
U.S. Standard Gage
up to 305
26
306 to 762
24
763 to 1372
22
1373 to 2134
20
2134 and over
18
(iii) Flexible Connections

Flameproof flexible connections shall be fitted on all suction and discharge
connections of fans and air handling units, for preventing the transmission of
vibration through the ducts to occupied spaces. Connections shall fit closely
and secured air-tight to ductwork, fans and units by means of angles and flat
iron frames.

Revision 1
Page 240 of 247

PECC3

Flexible aluminum tubes with insulation shall be used as connections between

the air ducts in the false ceiling and the grilles or diffusers. Tubes shall be
fitted and secured air-tight to the duct.
(iv) Duct Fabrication
a) Joint and bracing: In accordance with the relevant local standard.
b) Obstructions: Cross sectional area shall not be decreased more than 10%
by obstruction; where necessary, provide transition pieces to maintain
cross sectional area.
c) Bracing: Auxiliary angles riveted to metal ductwork as required to prevent
noise, vibration, or excessive deformation.
d) All vapor barriers shall be continuous; Contractor shall replace at his own
expense all duct work which becomes wet due to discontinuity of vapor
barrier.
(v)
Dampers
Adjustable dampers shall be provided in ductwork system. The operating
mechanism shall be clearly marked to indicate the "open" and "shut" position
and shall be such that they can be locked in place once set. All dampers shall
be with galvanized steel interlocking blade, sleeves, bearings and galvanized
steel frame and shall be free from rattle and vibration.
The operating mechanism of all dampers shall be easily accessible for
adjustment.
All dampers shall be carefully inspected before installation, and any damper
having poorly fitted blades, insufficient frame rigidity, or excessive clearance
in moving parts will be rejected and replaced.
Fire dampers shall be provided in air ducts and shall be triggered by a fire
detector. The damper has to close in the direction of the air flow. If the air
conditioning system is on, the damper has to be open; if the system is off or the
control system is out of operation, it has to be closed. The damper shall also be
provided with a hand lever and shall be clearly marked to indicate the "open"
and "shut" positions.
(b)
Fasteners and Supports

(i) Galvanized Steel Ducts
a) Fasteners shall be rivets and bolts compatible with duct materials.
Self-tapping sheet metal screws may be used only when approved by the
Owner.
b) Support spacing, for Horizontal Ducts, shall be as follows:
i) Up to 890 mm
: 2.4 m max. centers.
ii) 891 mm to 1500 mm : 1.8 m max. centers
iii) Over 1500 mm
: 1.2 m max. centers.

Revision 1
Page 241 of 247

PECC3
(ii)

Support Material Sizes for Metal Ducts, Minimum

a) Ducts up to 600 mm: 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm angles, 10 mm rods, and
25 mm x 3 mm straps.
b) Ducts over 600 mm through 1070 mm: 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm angles,
10 mm rods, and 38 mm x 3 mm straps.
c) Ducts over 1070 mm through 2440 mm: 50 mm x 50 mm x 6.35 mm
angles and 13 mm rods, strap not acceptable.
d) Ducts over 2440 mm: 63.5 mm x 63.5 mm x 10 mm angles and 16 mm
rods.
(iii) Support shall allow for thermal movement of ducts

(c)
Access Doors
(i) Construction: In accordance with the relevant local standard.
(ii) Access doors in plenums and machinery housing shall be operable from both
the interior and exterior of the enclosure.
(iii) Access doors shall be insulated where adjacent ductwork or equipment is
insulated. Doors shall be fully operable after insulating.
(d)
Registers, Grilles and Diffusers

(i) Registers and diffusers shall mean air grilles with volume dampers.
(ii) Contractor shall furnish and install the supply air boots and make air duct
connection to linear diffusers/grilles/registers.
(iii) All other supply, return, exhaust and transfer air registers, grilles and diffusers
shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as specified hereunder:
a) Square-type ceiling Diffusers
i) Material
: 1.4 mm thick aluminum
ii) Accessories : Volume Damper Frame, required for ceiling system
b) Supply, Return and Exhaust Air Registers/Grilles
i) Material
: Extruded aluminum
ii) Accessories : Volume damper
(e)
Ductwork Insulation
(i) Type: Fiberglass with average thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.03605
watt/meter degree Celsius at a mean temperature of 24C (48 kgs per cubic
meter density). Insulation shall be rigid with aluminum foil vapor barrier.
(ii) Use and Thickness
a) Air conditioning supply and return air ductworks inside the building:
25 mm thickness
b) All air conditioning supply and return air ducts outside the building:
50 mm thickness (96 kgs per cubic meter density)
c) All air conditioning plenum or chamber: 25 mm thickness.

Revision 1
Page 242 of 247

PECC3

(iii) Insulation should be installed on surfaces coated with protective paint. All
insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling and sleeves.
(iv) Hangers and supports secured to cold surfaces must be insulated and vapor
sealed.
(v) Where insulated ducts are exposed to weather elements and/or subject to
physical abrasion, insulation shall be metal clad.
10.5.40.4.4
Controls and Instrumentation
(a)
General
(i) Furnish and install a complete system of controls for all the equipment.
(ii) Control system shall be electronic/electric type.
(iii) The control system shall be installed by competent technicians.
(iv) Provide all electrical wiring required for control devices. Provide all interlock
wiring between motor controllers or control devices as required for proper
functioning of controls specified.
(v) Automatic control valves, immersion wells and pressure tappings shall be
installed.
(vi) Control voltage shall be 120 V.
(vii) Provide all necessary control transformers.
(viii) All control components shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
(b)
Electrical Wiring
(i) All wiring in connection with the temperature control system shall be provided.
(ii) The term "wiring" shall be construed to include furnishing of wire, conduit,
miscellaneous materials, and labor as required for mounting and connecting the
electrical control devices.
(iii) Electrical wiring shall be of materials specified, and shall be installed in
accordance with applicable requirements of Vietnam Electrical Code.
(iv) All wires between equipment or devices shall be installed in conduit or other
approved raceway.
(v) Conduit: UL approved or equivalent rigid, galvanized steel with interior coat
of enamel.
(vi) Conductor: Copper, AWG, type TW, establish consistent color code
throughout building insofar as practicable. Identify conductor by means of
tape or printed, or equal, markers at equipment and junction boxes. Use no
splices except as approved. Pull wires into conduit using powdered soapstone
or commercial wire lubrication; do not use soap solution.
(c)
Sensors
(i) Space temperature sensors shall be of Thermistor Type or Balco element type
with no moving parts. They shall be non-indicating. Adjustments of setting
shall be done at the local control panel. Sensors shall have a range of 10 to
38C.

Revision 1
Page 243 of 247

PECC3

(ii)
Duct-type temperature sensors shall be either Balco element or Thermistor

type. Averaging element sensors, such as mixed air and discharge air sensors,
shall have a 4.5 meter minimum capillary element to provide adequate
coverage.
(iii) Sensors shall be of corrosion-resistant construction, tamper-proof, suitable for
mounting on a vibrating surface.
(iv) Space and duct humidity sensors shall be of the Lithium chloride gold grid
resistant type, fully proportioning; shall have adjustable set point adjustment
and sensing range of 20% to 90% RH. They shall be non-indicating type.
(d)
Controllers
(i) Controllers shall be of the electronic type and shall be able to receive signals
from the temperature and RH sensors.
(ii) Controllers shall contain all necessary input-modules, output-modules, power
supply modules Hi-lo selector modules and other accessory modules to
accomplish the control sequence required.
(iii) All adjustments shall be of the direct reading type and shall be concealed to
prevent tampering. Direct reading setpoint scales shall be provided to match
the appropriate sensors.
(iv) Controllers shall be designed and constructed for equipment room use and shall
not be affected by ambient temperature and humidity. Where dual input
controllers are required, the authority of the compensating sensor shall be
adjustable only at the Controller.
(e)
Miscellaneous
(i) The Contractor shall furnish all two-position relays, capacity relays, plus all
other controls necessary to meet the specifications and provide for properly
operating automatic control system.
(ii) All switches and relays must be UL listed and of a type to meet current and
voltage requirements of the particular application.
(f)
Thermostats
(i) In general, all room thermostats shall be fully proportion with a temperature
range of 10C to 39C and shall have adjustable throttling range, and
adjustable set point. Thermostat covers shall have brushed aluminum, brushed
brass or unpolished silver finish and concealed adjustment.
(ii) Provide vandal and damage guards on all thermostats in all areas.
(g)
Reheat System Control

Shall be of electric-type reheat coil that cuts-in in stages whenever the space
temperature drops to its normal setting and also when space humidity is greater than
its normal setting.

Revision 1
Page 244 of 247

PECC3

(h)
Smoke Detection
Air handling systems shall be provided with ionization detectors. All control wiring
from the ionization detectors to the respective motor starters and local control panels
shall be done by the Contractor. These ionization detectors shall be installed inside
the return air ducts to the air handling system. Upon detection of a fire, fan shall be
shut down. At the same time, an alarm will be energized and fire dampers closed.
(i)
Starters
(i) Type: Magnetic across the line, star-delta, manual, or as specified. Conform
to VIETNAM Standards.
(ii) Circuit Breakers: Provide each starter with molded case circuit breaker
complete with thermal magnetic trip.
(iii) Overload Relays: One (1) per phase with heaters.
(iv) Auxiliary Switches: Provide minimum of 2 normally open contacts per starter.
Provide additional contacts as required by controls.
(v) Star-Delta: Magnetic close transition type.
(vi) Enclosures: General purpose with dust protecting gaskets. Rustproof metal,
with baked enamel finish.
(j)
Control Wiring
(i) Furnish and install all 230 V control wiring including step-down transformers
where 230 V power is required.
(ii) Wire Construction: The detailed specification shall be referred to Part 4
Section 1 and Section 7.
(iii) Step-down Transformers: Provide step-down transformers as required by
control system.
(k)
Motor Control Center (MCC)

(i) Shall be refer to Part 4 Section 1 and Section 7.
(ii) Control units shall be mounted on front only.
(iii) The enclosure shall be finished with baked light gray enamel over lead primer
and rust inhibitor.
(l)
Control Panel
The control panel shall be located in the rear of the central control room and shall
house together with remote control circuit breaker on feeding cable, alarms, magnetic
relay, fuses, signaling lamps for equipment in operation-out of service for the whole
air conditioning and ventilation system of the Power House. Each fan and airconditioning unit shall have a local control and a remote control house in the control
panel. Malfunctioning of battery room ventilating system shall actuate alarms also
housed in the control panel. All alarms shall be connected in parallel and
annunciated in the front of the plant control room.

Revision 1
Page 245 of 247

PECC3

10.5.40.5 Air Conditioning/Ventilation for Ancillary Buildings

10.5.40.5.1
System Description
The air conditioner shall be air-cooled package type units or air handling units with
air-cooled type chilling units.
The air conditioning system to be supplied shall be thoroughly designed in order to provide
the required room condition to each room/building.
Standby full capacity air conditioning units for use in case of failure in the operating units
shall be provided to Clause 10.3.17 of this Document.
10.5.40.5.2
Others
Technical requirement for the system shall comply with Clause 10.5.40.3 of this document
and relevant standards.
10.5.40.6 Test and Test Records

After the completion of each and every section of the works, the Contractor shall arrange
as and when direction by the Owner to demonstrate to him that the installation is adjusted
and regulated correctly to fulfill the function for which it has been designed.
The room temperature shall be measured by recording instruments located five feet above
floor level and points away from the influence of draughts or directed radiation from hot or
cold surfaces. The air quantities shall be measured by the velometer or anemometer.
No demonstration of room temperature shall be allowed when weather conditions are
abnormal as to wind, rain or external air temperature.
The duration of the tests shall be at the discretion of the Owner and all recording charts
shall be submitted to him for approval.
At the completion of the installation the contractor shall test the output from each diffuser,
grille and fan and submit copies of the record of tests.
10.5.41
Settlement & Tilt Monitoring
In the construction period, Settlement and Tilt monitoring shall be carried out by the
Contractor for all important structures in the plant such as Main power building, Boiler
structure, Chimney, Coal storage sheds, oil & water tanks, CW facilities, ....etc . At the
Revision 1
Page 246 of 247

PECC3

time of PAC of Unit #2, the Contractor shall hand over all records of subsidence
monitoring for the Owner.
10.5.42
Architectural Items Not Included in the Specifications
For finishes or materials not included in this architectural specifications but are necessary
in the execution of works, the Contractor shall promptly seek clarification/approval of the
Owner in writing.

Revision 1
Page 247 of 247

VT4, SA For STG & Other Building Structural Steel Erection PC AE6 Owner's Requirement (R0, 20141209)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

VT4, SA For STG & Other Building Structural Steel Erection PC AE6 Owner's Requirement (R0, 20141209)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

PART 4 SECTION 10 CIVIL AND ARCHITECTUAL WORKS

Part 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

10.3.4.6 Horizontal Forces on Crane Runway Beam .......................... 29

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

10.3.14 Site Catchment Drainage System ........................................................ 53

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

10.5.3.2 Materials Requirement ............................................................. 95

Part 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

10.5.9 Miscellaneous Steelworks ...................................................................... 140

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

10.5.16.2 Waterproofing Mortar ............................................................ 173

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

10.5.22.12 Chiseled Concrete Finish ..................................................... 200

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

10.5.33.1 Materials ................................................................................ 219

Part 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

SECTION 10- CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

- Plumbing including septic tanks and provision of fixtures.

01-2. Boiler House

01-3. Central Control

Foundation: Pile (Bored/Steel Pipe/Prestressed concrete/Reinforced concrete) and

Part 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

Pile (if necessary)

Fire fighting pump

Pile (if necessary)

Ash silo aerating fan

Fuel feed system and Coal Handling

Coal Conveyer Foundation

Pipe / Cable Rack Foundations Reinforced Concrete

Oil Handling Facilities

Part 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works

Vinh Tan Thermal Power Management Board

Vinh Tan 4 Thermal Power Plant Project

Pile (if necessary)

Pile (if necessary)

Coal sampling house

Pile (if necessary)

Coal crusher house

Pile (if necessary)

Oil Pump House

Pile (if necessary)

Coal Storage Yard

Coal Storage Yard Foundations

Reinforced Concrete or Ballast and/or

Drainage basin for coal yard

Part 4 Section 10 Civil and Architectual Works